JP2023070821A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with enhanced marketability.SOLUTION: Along with the start of a variable display, a switching display for switching a reservation display to a corresponding display is performed. As the variable display of decoration identification information, a movement display for moving the decoration identification information and a pre-operation display before starting the movement display are performed. The pre-operation display is performed while the switching display is performed. A common switching display is performed for first type of variable display pattern information and second type of variable display pattern information. A background display is displayed during a first period after the end of a game, and a demonstration display is displayed during a second period after the first period. The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene. An animation display of the company name is more emphasized than an animation display of warning, and the animation display of the title name is more emphasized than the animation display of the warning.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 88

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by executing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information.

As a pachinko game machine typified by gaming machines, there have been some that variably display multiple types of decoration identification information (decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information (special patterns) (for example, patent Reference 1). Furthermore, control is executed to display the normal background display during the first customer waiting period after the end of the variable display of the pattern, and to display the demonstration display during the second customer waiting period after the end of the first customer waiting period. There was a thing to do (for example, see patent document 2).

JP 2017-86392 A JP 2016-22196 A

There is room for improving the marketability of the game machines having the functions and configurations of Patent Documents 1 and 2.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been devised in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced marketability.

(1) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of specific identification information and being able to be controlled to an advantageous state for a player when a specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
game control means;
production control means;
a display means;
The game control means is
performing variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns;
controllable between a normal state and a special state in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is short;
The production control means is
It is possible to perform variable display of a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information that has not yet started,
A corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area,
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display,
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display for moving the decoration identification information and a pre-operation display for moving the decoration identification information in a manner different from the movement display before starting the movement display are performed. is possible and
performing the pre-operation display while performing the switching display in the normal state;
performing variable display of the decoration identification information based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means;
The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. and
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
A demonstration display is displayed in a second period after the first period ends,
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the game machine is displayed in animation,
The title name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
The attention-calling display scene is a scene in which a character display for calling attention when playing the game machine is displayed in animation,
The animation display of the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is a mode that is emphasized more than the animation display of the character display for calling attention when playing the gaming machine,
The animation display of the character display of the title of the gaming machine is characterized in that it is emphasized more than the animation display of the character display for calling attention when the gaming machine is played.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the display of the decoration identification information and the pending display in an unnatural manner, and it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control, so that the marketability can be improved. can.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

1 is a front view showing a gaming machine according to Embodiment 1; FIG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which illustrates a production|presentation control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of big hit types. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a start winning command buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure for demonstrating a decoration design and a small design. (A1) and (A2) are the first production mode, (B1) and (B2) are the second production mode, (C1) and (C2) are the third production mode, and (D1) and (D2) are the fourth production mode. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decoration pattern in the first effect mode, and (B1) and (B2) in the second effect mode. (C1) and (C2) are the third effect mode, (D1) and (D2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decoration pattern in the fourth effect mode, and (E) is the variable display of the decoration pattern and the small pattern. It is a diagram for explaining the aspect of , (A) is a variation start action of decorative symbols, (B) is a variation stop action, and (C) is a loop action. (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of decorative patterns and periods of lamp light emission control, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of the lamp. (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams for explaining an operation example of the hold display. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 1st production|presentation mode. 26. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative design following FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 2nd production|presentation mode. 28. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative design following FIG. 28. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow of the variable display of the decoration design of FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design as the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative design following FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 3rd production|presentation mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the appearance of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 4th production|presentation mode. It is a figure which shows the flow of the stop display of the decoration design in 1st production|presentation mode (2nd production|presentation mode). It is a figure which shows the flow of the stop display of a decorative design following FIG. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols when the number of pending memories is 3 in the first effect mode (second effect mode). (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the fourth effect mode (third effect mode). (A1) is a diagram showing a first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing a first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram explaining a background change. It is a figure which shows the flow of a background change in 1st production|presentation mode. It is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the first effect mode. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of each part of the variable display in 2nd production|presentation mode. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of each part of the variable display in 3rd production mode and 4th production mode. (A) is a 1st production mode, (B) is a 2nd production mode, (C) is a timing chart which shows the aspect of each part at the time of the variable display start in a 3rd production mode and a 4th production mode. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a customer waiting demonstration production. It is a figure which shows the example of an operation|movement when starting prize-winning generate|occur|produces during the customer waiting demonstration production. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of pseudo consecutive notices; (A) is a diagram showing an example of pseudo-run number display and symbol colors, (B) is a diagram showing pseudo-run number display and symbol color types, and (C) is a diagram showing a pseudo-run number display color determination table. . It is a figure which shows the flow of reach production|presentation. 50. It is a figure which shows the flow of the ready-to-win production following FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation example of each part in reach production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the flow of SP reach production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the flow of SP ready-to-win production following FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation example of each part in SP reach production|presentation. (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing Modification 2 of the present invention. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing Modified Example 3 of the present invention. 1 is a front view showing a gaming machine in an embodiment; FIG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which illustrates a production|presentation control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of big hit types. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a start winning command buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of demonstration production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of demonstration production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of demonstration production control processing. (A1) and (A2) show the first effect mode, (B1) and (B2) show the second effect mode, and (C1) and (C2) show the third effect mode. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 1st production|presentation mode. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative design following FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 3rd production|presentation mode. (A) is a 1st production mode, (B) is a timing chart which shows the aspect of each part at the time of the variable display start in the 2nd and 3rd production modes. It is a figure which shows the flow of SP reach production|presentation in a low base state. It is a figure which shows the flow of SP reach production|presentation in a high base state. (A) is a diagram showing start and end conditions for displaying a demonstration movie, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the demonstration movie display. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example of each unit during a demo movie; It is a transition diagram of the customer waiting demonstration effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example of displaying a demo movie; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example of displaying a demo movie; (A) is a first scene (company name), (B) is a fourth scene (attention 1), and (C) is a display example of the fourth scene (attention 2). It is a figure which compares the display mode of a 1st scene (company name), a 4th scene (calling 1, 2), the number of pending memories, and a small pattern. It is a figure which shows the light emission mode of the lamp|ramp corresponding to a game state. (A) is a diagram showing the layout positions of lamps in a pachinko game machine, and (B) is a schematic diagram of (A). (A1) to (A8) are diagrams showing an operation example when the customer waiting demonstration effect is intervened after the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state is completed. (A4) to (A5) are diagrams showing the main part of FIG. 94; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demonstration effect in the low base state; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demonstration effect in the low base state; FIG. (B1) to (B8) are diagrams showing an operation example of the customer waiting demonstration effect in the high base state. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demonstration effect in the high base state; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demonstration effect in the high base state; FIG. It is a diagram showing an operation example when the customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko gaming machine is started by cold start. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of starting a customer waiting demonstration effect after the pachinko gaming machine is activated by cold start. FIG. It is a diagram showing an operation example when the customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko gaming machine is activated by hot start in the low base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of starting the customer waiting demonstration effect after the pachinko gaming machine is activated by the hot start in the low base state. It is a diagram showing an operation example when the customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko gaming machine is activated by hot start in the high base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of starting the customer waiting demonstration effect after the pachinko gaming machine is activated by hot start in the high base state. (A) to (E) are diagrams showing an operation example when the demonstration movie display ends after a lapse of time in the low base state. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a flow in which demonstration movie display ends over time in a low base state; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a flow in which demonstration movie display ends over time in the high base state; FIG. (A) to (E) are diagrams showing an operation example in the case where the demonstration movie display ends with the start winning in the low base state. 111(A) to (G) are diagrams showing details of the high base state of the display mode of FIG. 110; 10 is a timing chart showing a flow of displaying a demo movie in a low base state and ending with a first start winning. 10 is a timing chart showing a flow in which the demonstration movie display ends with the second start winning in the low base state. 10 is a timing chart showing a flow in which the demonstration movie display ends with the second start winning in the high base state. 11 is a timing chart showing a flow of displaying a demo movie in a high base state and ending with the first start winning. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an operation example in the case where demonstration movie display is ended by steering wheel operation in the low base state. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a flow in which demonstration movie display is terminated by a steering wheel operation in a low base state; FIG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an operation example in the case where demonstration movie display is terminated by menu operation in the low base state. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a flow in which demo movie display is terminated by menu operation in the low base state; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a flow in which demo movie display is terminated by menu operation in the high base state; FIG. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of normal operation of the payout device associated with winning, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of error operation of the payout device associated with winning. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a ball-out error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration effect; It is a figure for demonstrating a priority layer. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration effect started in the low base state; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration effect started in the high base state; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to an LED driver; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a lamp data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of the child table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a parent table forming a lamp data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a child table forming a lamp data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a grandchild table forming a lamp data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a grandchild table forming a lamp data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a grandchild table forming a lamp data table; It is a diagram showing a lamp data table used during non-game (only button white blinking, button red blinking is used during the game). Lamp Data Table: Background This is a diagram showing the setting contents of a normal parent table. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of a normal child table for background. Lamp Data Table: Background This is a diagram showing the setting contents of a normal grandchild table. Lamp Data Table: Background This is a diagram showing the setting contents of a normal grandchild table. Lamp data table: It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of a background time saving. Lamp data table: It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of a background time saving. Lamp data table: It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of background time saving. Lamp data table: It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of background time saving. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of background probability change. Lamp data table: A diagram showing setting contents of a child table of background probability variation. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the background probability change grandchild table. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the background probability change grandchild table. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demo. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demo. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demo. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demo. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demo. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demo. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demo. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table for button white lighting. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of button white lighting. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of button white lighting. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of button white flashing. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of button white flashing. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of button white flashing. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table for button red flashing. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of red flashing button. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of button red flashing. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: A diagram showing setting contents of a child table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for initialization notification. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the error parent table. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of an error child table. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of an error grandchild table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing operation examples of character display and light emission mode in each scene. (A) is a first scene, (B) is a third scene, and (C) is a diagram showing an operation example of a fourth scene. 4 is a comparison table showing character animation display. (A) and (B) are diagrams for explaining similar colors. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a list of display timings for displaying a demo movie; FIG. 111(A) to (G) are diagrams showing details of the high base state of the display mode of FIG. 110;

A form for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the embodiment.

[Mode 1] (No. 1)
The game machine of form 1 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decoration patterns in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
The size is smaller than the decoration identification information, and it is possible to variably display the reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can reduce the size corresponding to the decoration pattern). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 21) for moving the decoration identification information,
The variable display of the reduced identification information is switching display (for example, switching display, see FIG. 22(E)) for switching to other reduced identification information without moving the reduced identification information,
In the variable display of the reduced identification information, one decoration identification information is displayed in the variable display of the decoration identification information, and the reduced identification information is switched a plurality of times during a period until the display of the decoration identification information is finished. is possible (for example, one decoration pattern is displayed, and in the period Ta2 until the display of the decoration pattern finishes displaying, the small patterns are switched five times to the small patterns of the losing combination, and each is displayed over the period Ta1. (period Ta1<period Ta2), see FIG. 22(E)),
The display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is composed of a combination of the decoration identification information (for example, a combination of decoration patterns such as "111" and "326"),
The display result of the variable display of the reduced identification information is composed of a combination of the reduced identification information (for example, a combination of small patterns such as "111" and "326"),
When a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to the non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the variable display of the decoration identification information is performed. Before the display result is derived, the reduced identification information is switched so that the combination of the reduced identification information does not correspond to the non-specific combination in the variable display of the reduced identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , If it is decided to stop display the fixed decorative pattern of the lost combination (for example, "326"), start the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the fixed decorative pattern of the lost combination (for example, "326") 22(E)), before stopping the display of the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the variable display of the reduced identification information is performed before the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is derived. Since the reduced identification information is switched so as not to become a combination of reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination, the non-specific combination is displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information from the combination of the reduced identification information in the variable display of the reduced identification information It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest because the derivation is not known in advance.

[Mode 2] (No. 2)
The game machine of form 2 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is composed of a combination of the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area among the plurality of decoration identification information displayed in the display area (for example, the decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5C). , The part that becomes a big hit or loses by combining decoration patterns such as "111" and "326" stopped at the stop position of 5R),
When a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to non-specific display results other than the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification information is effectively displayed. When stopped in the area, it is possible to display the decoration identification information in an enlarged form from the normal size and then return it to the normal size. 36 to 38, 42 and 43), a portion that can execute a change stop action when temporarily stopping display of decorative symbols in the display;
When enlarging and displaying the decoration identification information to be stopped in the effective display area, the decoration identification information not located in the effective display area is not displayed in an enlarged manner (see Modification 3 of FIG. 57),
During execution of the variable display of the decoration identification information, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period, and the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed. (For example, even when the effect control CPU 120 is executing the fluctuation stop action when temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, A portion where the loop light emission control of the movable body lamp 9d is performed (see FIGS. 42 and 43)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to the non-specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area is displayed. By once enlarging the display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area, and to draw the player's line of sight even when a non-specific combination that is essentially meaningless to the player is derived. It can be pinned to the area where the decoration identification information is displayed. Also, when enlarging and displaying the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area, since the decoration identification information not located in the effective display area is not enlarged and displayed, the player's line of sight can be focused on the decoration identification information stopped in the effective area. In addition, the load of display control can be reduced. Further, even when the decoration identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed, the predetermined light emission control is continuously performed, so that the control of the light emission means can be simplified.

[Form 3-1] (No. 4-1)
The game machine of form 3-1 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes front movement display (for example, scroll display) in which the decoration identification information is moved from the depth side toward the front side while increasing transparency and erased (see FIGS. 28 to 30). ,
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a number image (for example, number display section 002SG051),
While the decoration identification information is displayed moving forward, the other decoration identification information located on the far side with respect to the one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the other decoration identification information is displayed. While the character image of the information is displayed, the number image is not displayed, and after the one decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the other decoration identification information is displayed (for example, FIG. 30). As shown in (A) and (B), one decorative design (for example, decorative design "2") is displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R between frame-in display and frame-out display. Another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") located on the far side so as to partially overlap with the decorative pattern "2" may be visible through the decorative pattern "2". While the character of the character display portion 002SG052 with the pattern "3" is displayed, the number ("3") of the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in FIG. 30(C), The part where the number (“3”) of the number display part 002SG051 of the decoration design “3” is displayed after the decoration design “2” is erased.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is moved from the back side toward the front side while increasing the transparency and erased, the other decoration identification information located on the back side is displayed. The decoration identification information is visible through the one decoration identification information. At this time, the other decoration identification information located on the back side is displayed with the character image but not with the number image. Since the numeric image of the other decoration identification information is displayed after the one decoration identification information is erased, the numeric image of the one decoration identification information and the numeric image of the other decoration identification information are displayed overlapping each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the numeric image of the decoration identification information located on the front side from becoming difficult to understand.

[Form 3-2] (No. 4-2)
The game machine of form 3-2 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a forward moving display (for example, scroll display) in which the decoration identification information is moved from the near side toward the far side while increasing transparency and erased (see FIGS. 31 and 32). ,
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a number image (for example, number display section 002SG051),
While the decoration identification information is displayed moving forward, other decoration identification information located on the far side with respect to the one decoration identification information is visible through the one decoration identification information, and the one decoration identification is visible. While the character image of the information is displayed, the number image is not displayed, and after the other decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the one decoration identification information is displayed (for example, FIG. 31). As shown in (G) and (H), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the front side to the back side, so frame-in display is performed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After the frame is displayed, another decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) located on the back side so as to partially overlap with one decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern "3") is displayed. "2") may be visible through the decorative pattern "3".At this time, while the character of the character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "2" is displayed, the number ( "2") is a portion that is difficult to see (or is not displayed).Modification 1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is moved from the front side toward the back side while increasing the transparency and is erased, the other decoration identification information positioned at the back side with respect to one decoration identification information is displayed. The decoration identification information is visible through the decoration identification information. At this time, the character image of the decoration identification information located on the front side is displayed, but the number image is not displayed. Since the numeric image of one decoration identification information is displayed after the other decoration identification information is erased, the numeric image of the other decoration identification information and the numeric image of the one decoration identification information are displayed overlapping each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the numeric image of the other decoration identification information located on the far side from becoming difficult to understand.

[Mode 4] (No. 5)
The game machine of form 5 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes rotating display in which the decoration identification information is rotated to repeatedly display the front side and the back side of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 33 and 34),
The decoration identification information is in a semi-transparent state during the rotating display, and the decoration identification information is in a non-transparent state when the rotating display is stopped (see FIGS. 33 and 34),
The decoration identification information includes a number image (for example, number display unit 002SG051),
While the numeric image on the front side of the decoration identification information that is in a semi-transmissive state during the rotating display is displayed, the numeric image on the back side is not displayed (see FIG. 34),
During the execution of the variable display of the decoration identification information, predetermined light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period is repeatedly performed, and the predetermined light emission control is continued even during the rotating display. (For example, even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed in the high base state, the order of white, blue, and yellow is displayed based on the loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see FIG. 24(B)). A portion where the light emission pattern of may be repeatedly executed.Modified example.Refer to FIG. 44)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is rotated to display the front side and the back side of the decoration identification information repeatedly, the decoration identification information is in a semi-transparent state, so only the front side of the decoration identification information is displayed. In this case, the numeric image on the front side of the decoration identification information is displayed, but the numeric image on the back side is not displayed. The image and the numeric image on the back side are not displayed overlapping each other, and the numeric image on the front side can be prevented from becoming difficult to understand. Further, since the predetermined light emission control is continuously performed even during the rotating display, the control of the light emitting means can be simplified.

[Mode 5] (No. 6)
The game machine of form 5 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The areas in which the decoration identification information is displayed are a first area (for example, the left decorative design display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative design display area 5R), the first area, and the second area. and a third area (for example, the middle decoration design display area 5C) located between
the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-reach state after the ready-to-reach state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area when the specific display result is derived; A specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) in which the same type of decoration identification information stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, the reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed, and it is possible to execute the reach line suggesting effect to be erased (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggesting effect),
After entering the reach state, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area is transmitted at a first transparency (for example, a first transmittance F1) until the reach line suggestion effect is executed. state, and after executing the reach line suggestion effect, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to a second transparency lower than the first transparency (for example, a second transmittance F2). to make it transparent (see FIG. 52),
After the execution of the reach line suggesting effect, the timing at which the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to the second transparency is the timing at which the reach line suggesting image is erased from the third area ( For example, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the transmittance (transparency) of the decoration pattern being displayed in the middle decoration design display area 5C is set higher than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed. The timing of setting the second transmittance F2 having a low transmittance (transparency) is the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIGS. 50 to 52).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area. In addition, at the timing when the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area becomes the second transparency lower than the first transparency, so that the decoration identification information is being variably displayed in the third area. The decorative identification information does not interfere with the reach line suggestion image.

[Mode 6] (No. 7)
The game machine of form 6 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
a means for emitting light;
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The areas in which the decoration identification information is displayed are a first area (for example, the left decorative design display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative design display area 5R), the first area, and the second area. and a third area (for example, the middle decoration design display area 5C) located between
the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-reach state after the ready-to-reach state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area when the specific display result is derived; A specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) in which the same type of decoration identification information stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, the reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed, and it is possible to execute the reach line suggesting effect to be erased (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggesting effect),
When executing the reach line suggesting effect, enlarged display for enlarging the decoration identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, and separation display for separating the decoration identification information after executing the enlarged display. and can be executed (see FIGS. 50 to 52),
The second period from the start to the end of the separated display is longer than the first period from the start to the end of the enlarged display (for example, the period from the start to the end of the enlarged display). The second period te1 from the start to the end of the separation display is longer than the first period td1 (td1<te1; see FIG. 52),
The light emitting means includes specific light emitting means (for example, a movable body lamp 9d) arranged around the display means,
It is possible to execute extinguishing control to extinguish the specific light emitting means during execution of the reach line suggestion effect (for example, when changing the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the display screen of the image display device 5 Portions for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged in the periphery (nearby) (see FIGS. 50(F) to (H))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area. In addition, the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area is enlarged and displayed for the first period, and then displayed separately for the second period longer than the first period, thereby forming the reach state. The identification information can be recognized by the player. Further, by turning off the specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggesting image can be made to stand out more.

[Mode 7] (No. 8)
The game machine of form 7 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
a means for emitting light;
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The areas in which the decoration identification information is displayed are a first area (for example, the left decorative design display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative design display area 5R), the first area, and the second area. and a third area (for example, the middle decoration design display area 5C) located between
the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-reach state after the ready-to-reach state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area when the specific display result is derived; A specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) in which the same type of decoration identification information stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, the reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed, and it is possible to execute the reach line suggesting effect to be erased (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggesting effect),
The light emitting means includes specific light emitting means (for example, a movable body lamp 9d) arranged around the display means,
It is possible to execute extinguishing control to extinguish the specific light emitting means during execution of the reach line suggestion effect (for example, when changing the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the display screen of the image display device 5 Portions for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged in the periphery (nearby) (see FIGS. 50(F) to (H))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area. In addition, by turning off the specific light emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestive image can be made to stand out more.

[Mode 8] (No. 9)
The game machine of form 8 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b),
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, predetermined operation display control for operating the decoration identification information in a predetermined operation mode is repeatedly performed over a first period (for example, for effect control When the CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative patterns at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative patterns is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special patterns is completed. 23(C), 42 and 43),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, predetermined light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode is repeatedly performed over a second period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 3. When the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state, loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp 9d is repeatedly executed. 24(B), 42 and 43),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is stopped in the special state, the predetermined operation display control is not performed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may display the decoration symbols in the high base state in the decoration symbol display areas 5L and 5C). , a part that does not execute the loop action of the decorative pattern when the temporary stop display is made at the stop position of 5R (see FIG. 44),
The second period is longer than the first period (for example, loop action period Tb3<loop light emitting period Tb4; see FIG. 24A)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state, the predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed in the sense of prompting the player to variably display the decoration identification information. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling annoyed by being urged to do so. Further, since the predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed at a shorter period than the predetermined light emission control, the decoration identification information can be preferably highlighted.

[Mode 9] (No. 10)
The game machine of form 9 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
Information relating to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started can be stored as pending storage information (for example, the CPU 103 stores the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the start winning judgment process of step S101, and the number of pending storage The part that performs the update process),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
The display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is composed of combinations of the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area (for example, "111" stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, The part that becomes a big hit or loses by combining decorative patterns such as "326"),
In the normal state, when a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to the non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification When the information is stopped in the effective display area, the decoration identification information is displayed in an enlarged size from the normal size according to the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information, and then displayed in a mode of returning to the normal size. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops displaying the decoration pattern, the part that can execute the fluctuation stop action. See FIGS. 36 to 39),
In the special state, when the non-specific combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, when the decoration identification information is stopped in the effective display area, it is stored as the reserved storage information. Regardless of the number of reserved memories, the decoration identification information is maintained at a normal size (for example, in a high base state where the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, regardless of the number of reserved memories When the variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed, the portion where the variable stop action is not executed and the temporary stop display is performed while maintaining the size (see FIGS. 39 and 44).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state, the movement when the decoration identification information is stopped is varied according to the number of retained memories to improve interest, while the average variable display period is short and the decoration identification information is visually recognized. In a special state where it is difficult to do so, by stopping while maintaining the size, it is possible to stop so that the visibility of the decoration identification information is not impaired.

[Mode 10] (No. 11)
The game machine of form 10 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
In one production mode, it is possible to switch and display a plurality of types of background images including the first background image and the second background image (for example, in the first production mode, the background image may be a daytime town seen from a distance). A first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) representing a landscape in the middle of the day and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) representing a townscape in the daytime can be switched and displayed. part),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed to gradually increase the transparency of the first background image and erase it, and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is executed, the background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A A portion where a cross-fade display synchronized with the fade-in display period B1 of is executed (see FIG. 40),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after scroll display is started). As the display speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the display fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually lowered (for example, the stop timing of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). approaches, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R decorative patterns, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C decorative patterns are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed, proportional to the decrease in speed. Then the transmittance (transparency) decreases and the part fades in),
The execution period of the background fade-out display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-out display (for example, the fade-out display period A1 during which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21; see FIGS. 42 and 43).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the fade-out display basically gives the impression that the fade-out display has disappeared abruptly as it is executed in a short period of time. In some cases, the fade-out display of the identification information is executed in a shorter period of time than the fade-out display of the background, so that it can be noted that the variable display of the decoration identification information has started.

[Mode 11] (No. 12)
The game machine of form 11 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
In one production mode, it is possible to switch and display a plurality of types of background images including the first background image and the second background image (for example, in the first production mode, the background image may be a daytime town seen from a distance). A first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) representing a landscape in the middle of the day and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) representing a townscape in the daytime can be switched and displayed. part),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed to gradually increase the transparency of the first background image and erase it, and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is executed, the background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A A portion where a cross-fade display synchronized with the fade-in display period B1 of is executed (see FIG. 40),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after scroll display is started). As the display speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the display fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually lowered (for example, the stop timing of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). approaches, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R decorative patterns, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C decorative patterns are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed, proportional to the decrease in speed. Then the transmittance (transparency) decreases and the part fades in),
The execution period of the identification information fade-out display is different from the execution period of the background fade-out display (for example, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed at the same time; see FIGS. 42 and 43).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by synchronizing the identification information fade-out display and the background fade-out display, it is possible to prevent difficulty in understanding that the variable display of the decoration identification information has started.

[Mode 12] (No. 13)
The game machine of form 12 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
In one production mode, it is possible to switch and display a plurality of types of background images including the first background image and the second background image (for example, in the first production mode, the background image may be a daytime town seen from a distance). A first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) representing a landscape in the middle of the day and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) representing a townscape in the daytime can be switched and displayed. part),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed to gradually increase the transparency of the first background image and erase it, and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is executed, the background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A A portion where a cross-fade display synchronized with the fade-in display period B1 of is executed (see FIG. 40),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after scroll display is started). As the display speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the display fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually reduced (for example, the stop timing of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). approaches, the left decorative design display area 5L, the right decorative design display area 5R, and the middle decorative design display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at low speed in this order, and proportional to the decrease in speed. Then the transmittance (transparency) decreases and the part fades in),
The execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is In the scroll display of 5L, 5C, and 5R, a period longer than the fade-in display period B21 from the start of deceleration of the display speed to the temporary stop display (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21).See FIGS. 42 and 43)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the fade-in display basically gives the impression that the fade-in display is performed in a short period of time, so that the variable display of the decoration identification information and the background change may be performed at the same time. In some cases, it can be noted that the variable display of the decoration identification information ends when the identification information fade-in display is performed in a shorter period of time than the background fade-in display.

[Mode 13] (No. 14)
The game machine of form 13 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
In one production mode, it is possible to switch and display a plurality of types of background images including the first background image and the second background image (for example, in the first production mode, the background image may be a daytime town seen from a distance). A first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) representing a landscape in the middle of the day and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) representing a townscape in the daytime can be switched and displayed. part),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed to gradually increase the transparency of the first background image and erase it, and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is executed, the background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A A portion where a cross-fade display synchronized with the fade-in display period B1 of is executed (see FIG. 40),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after scroll display is started). As the display speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the display fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually lowered (for example, the stop timing of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). approaches, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R decorative patterns, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C decorative patterns are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed, proportional to the decrease in speed. Then the transmittance (transparency) decreases and the part fades in),
The execution period of the identification information fade-in display is different from the execution period of the background fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 42 and 43). )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by synchronizing the identification information fade-in display and the background fade-in display, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand that the variable display of the decoration identification information ends.

[Mode 14] (No. 15)
The game machine of form 14 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
After the variable display is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, it is possible to execute a specific effect of restarting the variable display (for example, The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is resumed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started to when the display result is derived and displayed. , a portion that can execute a “pseudo continuous notice” that incites whether or not to make one variable display look like multiple variable displays in a pseudo manner),
The decoration identification information has decoration identification information of a plurality of colors (for example, blue and red) including a numeric image,
When the variable display is restarted in the specific effect, a number image (for example, pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212) that can specify the number of times the variable display is restarted can be displayed in a plurality of colors (for example, blue and red). (See FIGS. 48 and 49),
In the specific effect, the number image of the temporarily stopped decoration identification pattern and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed are of the same type, and the number image of the temporarily stopped decoration identification pattern and the number image are of the same type. When the first combination of different colors is obtained, the number image of the temporarily stopped decoration identification pattern and the number of times when the variable display is restarted, the number image of the temporarily stopped decoration identification pattern, and the number of times There is a case where both colors of the image are the same kind of second combination,
In the specific effect, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher when the variable display is restarted with the second combination than when the variable display is restarted with the first combination (for example, a pseudo In the consecutive notice, if the display color of the temporary stop displayed decorative symbol and the pseudo consecutive number display is the first combination of non-same colors, and the temporary stop displayed decorative symbol and the pseudo consecutive number display display color are the same color. There are cases where it becomes the second combination, and when the variable display is resumed with the second combination, the jackpot game state is more likely than when the variable display is resumed with the first combination in the pseudo consecutive notice. part where the controlled rate is high)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention not only to whether or not the specific effect is executed, but also to the combination of numbers and colors of the number image and the number image of the decoration identification information temporarily stopped and displayed when the specific effect is executed. Therefore, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Mode 15] (No. 16)
The game machine of form 15 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
The size is smaller than the decoration identification information, and it is possible to variably display the reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can reduce the size corresponding to the decoration pattern). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
When the variable display is not being executed, it is possible to execute a standby effect that displays a predetermined image (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command output from the main board 11, the variable A portion that can execute a “customer waiting demonstration effect” when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed without receiving a control command such as a display start designation command (see FIG. 46),
When the standby effect is being executed, the display of the reduced identification information is continued while the decoration identification information is hidden (see FIG. 46),
When the condition for starting variable display is satisfied while the standby effect is being executed, the predetermined image is hidden after variable display of the reduced identification information is started before the predetermined image is hidden. After being displayed, the decoration identification information is displayed and the variable display is started (for example, if the start winning occurs while the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is not displayed). The variable display of the small symbols is started before it becomes, then the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden, and the background image corresponding to the effect mode at that time (here, the first effect mode corresponding to the first effect mode) is displayed. 1 background image 002SG081), after which the decoration pattern is displayed and the scroll display is started (see FIG. 47)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by starting the variable display of the decoration identification information after the predetermined image is hidden, the player can recognize that the variable display has started in accordance with the fulfillment of the condition for starting the variable display. However, since the variable display of the reduced identification information is started before the predetermined image is hidden, it is possible to ensure the display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information.

[Mode 16] (No. 17)
The game machine of form 16 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs decoration in the production control process processing of step S76. The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the pending display update process of step S161, the first A part that performs processing to display the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
The corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161. A part that performs processing to display the active display 002SG103),
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a special figure pending storage display area A portion for performing a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25),
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 21) for moving the decoration identification information, and a mode different from the movement display before starting the movement display. It is possible to perform a preliminary action display (for example, a variable start action, see FIG. 23 (A)),
In the normal state, when the switching display is performed, the preliminary operation display is performed (for example, the first suspension display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure suspension storage display area 5U is moved and displayed to the active display area 5F, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is not started until the pending shift display period until switching display as the active display 002SG103 ends, and the above-described fluctuation start action is executed. , the part where the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is started after the pending shift display period ends (see FIGS. 26C to 26F),
Based on the variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process processing of step S76 A part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11),
The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes variable display based on the first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (for example , reach variation pattern designation command), and a portion that executes a shift display that switches the first reserved display 002SG101 and the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, along with the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and during the switching display, the decoration identification information is moved. By performing preliminary operation display that operates in a manner different from display, the period required for switching display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and when the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous. can increase the interest of Also, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Mode 17] (No. 18)
The game machine of form 17 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs decoration in the production control process processing of step S76. The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the pending display update process of step S161, the first A part that performs processing to display the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
The corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161. A part that performs processing to display the active display 002SG103),
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a special figure pending storage display area A portion for performing a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25),
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 21) for moving the decoration identification information, and a mode different from the movement display before starting the movement display. It is possible to perform a preliminary action display (for example, a variable start action, see FIG. 23 (A)),
In the normal state, when the switching display is performed, the preliminary action display is performed, and the scroll display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the left side in the special figure reservation storage display area 5U The first pending display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the display area is moved to the active display area 5F, and is displayed by scrolling the decoration pattern until the pending shift display period ends until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ( (variable display) is not started, the above-described variable start action is executed, and after the pending shift display period ends, the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is started. )reference),
Based on the variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process processing of step S76 A part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11),
The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes variable display based on the first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (for example , reach variation pattern designation command), and a portion that executes a shift display that switches the first reserved display 002SG101 and the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and during the switching display, the decoration identification information is moved. By performing the pre-operation display in which the decoration identification information is operated in a manner different from the movement display before starting the display, the period required for the switching display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the moving display of the decoration identification information does not start until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the moving display of the decoration identification information may start before the corresponding display is displayed. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and when the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous. can increase the interest of Also, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Mode 18] (No. 19)
The game machine of form 18 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs decoration in the production control process processing of step S76. The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the pending display update process of step S161, the first A part that performs processing to display the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
The corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161. A part that performs processing to display the active display 002SG103),
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a special figure pending storage display area A portion for performing a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25),
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 21) for moving the decoration identification information, and a mode different from the movement display before starting the movement display. It is possible to perform a preliminary action display (for example, a variable start action, see FIG. 23 (A)),
In the special state, when the switching display is performed, the preliminary action display is performed (for example, the first suspension display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure suspension storage display area 5U is moved and displayed to the active display area 5F, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is not started until the pending shift display period until switching display as the active display 002SG103 ends, and the above-described fluctuation start action is executed. , A portion where the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is started after the pending shift display period ends.Modified example),
Based on the variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process of step S76 A part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the process)

The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes variable display based on the first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (for example , reach variation pattern designation command), and a shift display that switches the first reserved display 002SG101 and the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, along with the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and during the switching display, the decoration identification information is moved. By performing preliminary operation display that operates in a manner different from display, the period required for switching display can be effectively utilized. Further, since the pre-operation display is performed while the switching display is being performed in the special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the special state can be excited. Also, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Mode 19] (No. 20)
The game machine of form 19 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs decoration in the production control process processing of step S76. The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the pending display update process of step S161, the first A part that performs processing to display the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
The corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161. A part that performs processing to display the active display 002SG103),
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a special figure pending storage display area A portion for performing a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25),
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 21) for moving the decoration identification information, and a mode different from the movement display before starting the movement display. It is possible to perform a preliminary action display (for example, a variable start action, see FIG. 23 (A)),
In the special state, when the switching display is performed, the preliminary action display is performed, and the movement display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the left side in the special figure reservation storage display area 5U The first pending display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the display area is moved to the active display area 5F, and is displayed by scrolling the decoration pattern until the pending shift display period ends until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ( Variable display) is not started, the above-described variable start action is executed, and after the pending shift display period ends, the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started.Modified example),
Based on the variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process of step S76 A part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the process)

The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes variable display based on the first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (for example , reach variation pattern designation command), and a shift display that switches and displays the first pending display 002SG101 and the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. See Figure 25)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, along with the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and during the switching display, the decoration identification information is moved. By performing the pre-operation display in which the decoration identification information is operated in a manner different from the movement display before starting the display, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required for performing the switching display. In addition, since the moving display of the decoration identification information is not started until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the moving display of the decoration identification information may start before the corresponding display is displayed. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by Further, since the pre-operation display is performed while the switching display is being performed in the special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the special state can be excited. Also, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Mode 20] (No. 21)
The game machine of form 20 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
It is possible to control any one of a plurality of production modes (for example, first production mode to fourth production mode) including a first production mode and a second production mode,
When starting the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform a fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display). As the display becomes faster, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part where the display fades out),
In the first effect mode, a moving display for moving the decoration identification information is executed as a variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 20A1 and 20A2),
In the second effect mode, as the variable display of the decoration identification information, a special variable display different in mode from the moving display is executed (see FIGS. 20(B1) and (B2)),
The execution period of the fade-out display when the special variable display is performed in the second effect mode is longer than the execution period of the fade-out display when the moving display is performed in the first effect mode ( For example, a portion (fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22 (see FIGS. 45A and 45B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second effect mode, not only is the aspect of variable display of the decoration identification information different from that in the first effect mode, but also a fade-out from the start of the variable display until the decoration identification information is erased. Since the display period is lengthened, it is possible to draw attention to the decoration identification information for a long period of time.

[Mode 21] (No. 22)
The game machine of form 21 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
It is possible to control any one of a plurality of production modes (for example, first production mode to fourth production mode) including a first production mode and a second production mode,
When starting the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform a fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display). As the display becomes faster, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part where the display fades out),
any one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns can be determined as the variable display pattern of the decoration identification information;
The execution period of the fade-out display differs between when the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the first effect mode and when the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the second effect mode (for example, the first effect mode 45 (A ) See (B)))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the execution period of the fade-out when the predetermined variable display pattern is determined differs between when the first effect mode is controlled and when the second effect mode is controlled. Since it becomes difficult for the player to predict the display pattern, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Mode 22] (No. 23)
The game machine of form 22 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (for example, information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
The variable display period includes a pre-variable display period from when the condition for starting variable display is established until the decoration identification information starts variable display, and a post-variable display period after the decoration identification information starts variable display. , including (for example, the variable display period of the special design is the pre-variable display period from the start of the variable display of the special design and the small design to the start of the scroll display of the decoration design, and the scroll display of the decoration design and a variable after-display period after is started),
the character image is displayed in the pre-variable display period and the post-variable display period;
After being displayed in the pre-variable display period, the related information image is erased before the start of the post-variable display period (for example, the name of the character displayed in the information display section 002SG053). Related information) is displayed during the pre-variable display period, that is, when the variable start action is being executed, and before the post-variable display period is started, that is, the scroll display of the decoration pattern is started. The portion to be erased before (see FIGS. 23(A) and 26)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character by drawing attention to the related information image before the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, that is, when the display is stopped. Also, by erasing the related information image before the start of the variable display, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, the advance notice effect, etc., rather than the related information image.

[Mode 23] (No. 24)
The game machine of form 23 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
In the normal state, control to one of a plurality of types of presentation modes including a first presentation mode (for example, first presentation mode) and a second presentation mode (for example, second presentation mode). It is possible (for example, first production mode to fourth production mode. See FIG. 20),
In the special state, it is possible to control the production mode including the third production mode (for example, the third production mode and the fourth production mode),
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (for example, information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
In the first effect mode, decoration identification information is displayed in a manner including the character image and the related information image (see FIG. 26),
In the second presentation mode and the third presentation mode, the decoration identification information is displayed in a manner not including the related information image (see FIGS. 28, 29 and 33).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the first effect mode, by displaying the related information image to make the player pay attention to the related information image, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character. By erasing the related information image in the 3-effect mode, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, the advance notice effect, etc., rather than the related information image.

[Mode 24] (No. 25)
The game machine of form 24 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
The decoration identification information includes a numeric image (eg, numeric display unit 002SG061),
When the background image is normally displayed, it is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled (for example, the effect control CPU 120 will notify whether or not the big hit will be announced). the part where the production can be executed),
In the notification effect, a specific background image (for example, a fifth background image 002SG085) different from the normal background image is displayed,
When the notification effect is executed in the variable display from which the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display, decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result when the specific background image is displayed in the notification effect. is displayed (for example, in the SP reach effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, the combination of the jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, “222”) is temporarily Stopped display (see FIG. 53(F)),
Upon completion of the notification effect, the specific background image is erased and the normal background image is displayed, and when the normal background image is displayed, a combination of decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 53(G), with the end of the SP ready-to-win effect, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. A part where a combination of jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped when there is
a specific image (for example, a specific image 002SG075) is operatively displayed in proximity to the numeric image of the combination of decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result being displayed while the normal background image is being displayed;
In the special state, the specific image is not displayed (for example, in the low base state, a specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed for the number display portion 002SG051 of the combination of the jackpot confirmed decoration symbols displayed after the end of the SP ready-to-win effect. While the operation is displayed (see FIGS. 53(H) and (I)), in the high base state, flames are emitted to the number display portion 002SG051 of the combination of the jackpot confirmed decorative symbols displayed after the end of the SP ready-to-win effect. 54(P) and (S)) where the specified image 002SG075 is not displayed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in a normal state, the specific image is displayed in motion with respect to the numeric image of the decoration identification information displayed after the termination of the notification effect, thereby increasing the effect of the effect and making it lively, but the average variable display period is short. In the special state, the variable display can be given a sense of speed by not displaying the specific image with respect to the numerical image of the decoration identification information displayed after the end of the notification effect.

[Form 25] (No. 18-2)
The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to form 17 or 18,
The production control means is
When the variable display of the specific identification information ends, the corresponding display (eg, active display 002SG103) corresponding to the variable display displayed in the corresponding display area (eg, active display area 5F) is erased. can display an erasing effect display (for example, erasing effect 002SG110) that emphasizes that the corresponding display has been erased when
If the suspension display is displayed when the deletion effect display is displayed, the deletion effect display is continuously displayed until the variable display corresponding to the suspension display is started (for example, the deletion effect 002SG110 It continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased, and is erased after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started as follows. (See FIG. 25(B3))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the presentation from deteriorating by not creating a blank period of the presentation after the variable display is finished and before the next variable display is started. In addition, the erasing effect display makes the player recognize that the corresponding display corresponding to the finished variable display has been erased, and at the same time, displays a new corresponding display to recognize that a new variable display has started. can be made

[Form 26] (No. 18-3)
The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to form 17 or 18,
The areas in which the decoration identification information is displayed are a first area (for example, the left decorative design display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative design display area 5R), the first area, and the second area. and a third area (for example, the middle decoration design display area 5C) located between
In the normal state, the decoration identification information is displayed in a smaller size in the third area than in the first area and the second area (see, for example, FIG. 19),
In the special state, the decoration identification information of the first area, the second area and the third area are displayed in the same size (see, for example, FIG. 19),
The third area in the special state is arranged closer to the center of the display area of the display means than the third area in the normal state (see, for example, FIG. 19).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in a normal state, the decoration identification information of the first and second areas are made to appear large, and the decoration identification information of the third area is shifted to give a sense of depth and enhance interest. Also, in a special state in which the average variable display period is short, the decoration identification information is arranged at a position near the center of the display area, so that the degree of recognition of the decoration identification information can be enhanced.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

Next, the form for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the drawings. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, the back side is the rear (rear, rear) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Described as a standard. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is the facing face facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, in the explanation of each step in the flowchart, for example, "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "002SGS1", "normal reach" is "N reach", and "super reach" is "SP reach". It is sometimes abbreviated as

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization is also generically called simply variable display.

In addition, on the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5, the number corresponding to the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0" etc.), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4" etc.) and the decoration pattern A display area 5S for displaying small patterns is provided, and the small patterns are variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the decorative patterns.

In addition, the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the reserved display, the small pattern, the error display (not shown) indicating the error state that occurred in the pachinko game machine 1, and the right hitting operation that prompts the player to perform the right hitting operation. The notification image 002SG201 (see FIG. 20) and the time saving remaining display 002SG202 (see FIG. 20) indicating the number of remaining time saving are displayed on the front side (upper layer) than the effect image such as the character, so that the effect image While preventing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small patterns and error display from being reduced due to overlap, the decorative pattern is deeper than the effect image (lower layer) , it may be possible to prevent the visibility of the effect image from being lowered due to overlapping of the decorative symbols.

Incidentally, the small pattern is also referred to as a fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are displayed variably, for example, in a display device such as the image display device 5. The display changes depending on the movement. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, an effect is performed such that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or the movable bodies 32A and 32B are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 entirely or Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when a part of the pattern is shielded, it is possible to recognize whether or not it is currently in a variable display state. The effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variable display start command. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variable display start command.

In addition, a fourth pattern display provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 which is a predetermined location on the game board 2) such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED The pattern displayed on the device is also called a fourth pattern.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, a display area (special figure pending storage display area 5U , an active display area 5F). Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display. In addition, in the present embodiment, the common special symbol pending storage display area 5U is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but represents a variable display in which the execution of the first special symbol is suspended. A first special figure pending storage display area in which a first pending display is displayed, and a second special figure pending storage display area in which a second pending display representing a variable display in which the execution of the second special symbol is suspended is displayed. , may be provided separately.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric accessory having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable piece is in the upright position, thereby causing the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole. It will be in a closed state that does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start winning opening) by tilting the movable piece when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state. It is said that the mouth is open.) When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

Movable bodies 32A and 32B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (upper and lower positions of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1). A movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable bodies 32A and 32B. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting and extinguishing, the movement of the movable bodies 32A and 32B, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 from the. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 , an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 and a real-time clock 106 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 outputs a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door. transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable bodies 32A and 32B, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . It also performs display processing for outputting the image data of the display image creation area of the VRAM area designated by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn in a certain V blank, and the area is switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. As a result, drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

In addition, since the display control unit 123 superimposes (combines) a plurality of layers to generate an image to be displayed on the image display device 5, the image of each layer is drawn and stored in the VRAM area. a layer image drawing area for arranging, a display image creating area for generating an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area, and are placed. Note that each layer has a concept of upper, middle, and lower layers, and an image in a higher layer is given a higher display priority in the image display device 5, and an image in a lower layer is given a higher display priority in the image display device 5. is set low.

The VRAM area has a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 1 images, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 2 images, and a layer for drawing and arranging layer 3 images. 3 image drawing areas are arranged. A displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

The displacement image creation area creates an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) the image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn/arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area as an image to be displaced. This is an area in which a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area superimposes ( Display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image synthesized), or an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area. This is the area to be created as an image for use.

The image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: high), and the image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area is image display. An image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5 and an image drawn/arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area have the highest priority in the image display device 5 . Each image is set to an image with a low display priority (display priority: low). That is, layer 1 is a higher layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is a lower layer with the lowest image display priority. layer.

The layer 1 image drawing area is the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5. The first special figure reservation storage display area 5U that displays the number of first special figure reservation storage and the number of second special figure reservation storage so that it can be specified. A drawing area for drawing an interface image and a second interface image including a small pattern whose display area is smaller than the decoration pattern and a display of the number of retained memories in the upper left part of the display area of the image display device 5. be.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn in order to perform variable display of the decorative patterns in the central portion of the display region of the image display device 5 .

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a background image is drawn in order to display the background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5 .

In this embodiment, an image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), an image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and a layer 3 image drawing area An image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing each of the images (images of layer 3) drawn and arranged in . In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (the first interface image and the second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority. The image (decorative pattern) displayed as an image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area. The image (background image) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is displayed as a low layer image on the image display device 5 because the lowest display priority is set.

In the present embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area have a transmittance (transparency) in order to make the overlapping portion of the upper layer image invisible to the player when superimposed on the lower layer image. is set to 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the image drawn/arranged in each image drawing area may be set higher than 0%. However, an image that is transparently displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable bodies 32A and 32B to the movable bodies 32A and 32B or a drive circuit for driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable bodies 32A and 32B (supply of signals to operate the movable bodies 32A and 32B, etc.) are for effect control. It may be executed by the CPU 120 .

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "0", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the command 8001H is a first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. , Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while it is performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability high base state, time reduction with probability variation state) in which both time saving control and probability variation control are performed. In addition, the probability variation state with time saving may simply be referred to as "probability variation state".

The command A0XXH is a win start specifying command (also called a "fanfare command") specifying display of an effect image indicating the start of a big win game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big win game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "0" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 3A are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, and these commands may be replaced with different commands. You can add different commands from For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the notification command of passing, and the remaining variable display frequency by which probability variation control and time saving control are performed.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, a random number MR2 for big hit type determination, a random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and a normal figure display result determination Numerical data representing each of the random numbers MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby setting the random numbers MR1 to MR4. You may make it count the numerical data which show a part.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "0" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". It is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, as the display result determination table, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a "jackpot" to a jackpot game state based on the random number MR1 for judging the special symbol display result. is a table.

In the display result determination table, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), random for special figure display result judgment A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to a special figure display result of "big win" or "losing".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big win" to the big win game state. It is data for judgment to be assigned. In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display result assigned to. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in the present embodiment), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in the present embodiment /30). That is, in the display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of determining to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or the time-saving state is higher. Judgment data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so as to increase.

FIG. 6A shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present embodiment, when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state, based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, the jackpot type can be any of a plurality of types. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described using FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A", "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C" that shifts to a high probability high base state, and only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state to shift to a low probability high base state " Non-probability variable jackpot" is set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal opening big-hit in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, the jackpot game state by the ``non-probable variable jackpot'' is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

The variable probability control and the time saving control, which are started after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win A to the variable probability big win C, are ended on the condition that the game state is controlled to the big win game state. In addition, the time saving control started after the end of the jackpot game state of the non-probability variable jackpot is controlled to the jackpot game state by the end of the variable display of 100 times or by the end of the variable display of the 100 times. terminated on the condition that Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is one of the variable probability big win A to variable probability big win C, the variable probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state passes through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously without In other words, the variable probability state in the present embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result becomes a big hit regardless of the number of variable display times, while the time saving state in the present embodiment is a game state in which the variable display result does not become a big hit. If not, it is a game state controlled to a normal state by executing variable display 100 times. For this reason, the time-saving state is also a game state that is controlled when the consecutive game state can end.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" are assigned different determination values for the jackpot types. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a big hit state with a small number of rounds as "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by the high opening control, the frequent occurrence of a big win state with few winning balls is avoided and the interest in the game is reduced. It is designed to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), the assignment of the determination value to the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-probable jackpot or a definite jackpot, it is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. ing.

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure In addition, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 7 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the display result is a "big hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, three types of variation patterns are provided as super reach variation patterns: super reach (no pseudo run), super reach (one pseudo run), and super reach (two pseudo runs). The present invention is not limited to this, and four or more or two or less super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

In addition, the super reach variation pattern in the present embodiment is a variation pattern (PA2-2) that deviates from the variation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a variation pattern of super reach (no pseudo run), As a variation pattern of super reach (1 pseudo-run), the variation pattern (PB1-3) where the variable display result is a big hit and a variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of step, as a variation pattern of super reach (2 pseudo-runs) There are provided a variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a big hit, and a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the result is not.

As shown in FIG. 7, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach production of the normal reach in the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes "big hit", in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, these variation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. , For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of variation pattern is first determined from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern, and then the A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a variation pattern according to this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved memories, the game state, and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using the big win variation pattern determination table A. -1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach (no pseudo consecutive effect) jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach (one pseudo consecutive effect) jackpot), PB1-4 (super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect) big hit variation pattern). More specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 35%. , PB1-4 at a rate of 40%.

Also, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A to C, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern ), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) big hit variation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (1-time pseudo-continuous effect) big hit variation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach (pseudo-continuous effect 2) It is determined from the number of times) variation pattern of the jackpot). More specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%. .

Also, if the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 1 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-1 (no shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) fluctuation pattern ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo-continuous effect)), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect)). More specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

In addition, if the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2, select the variation pattern determination table B for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) loss variation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo-continuous effect)) and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect)). More specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

In addition, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) loss fluctuation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo-continuous effect)) and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect)). More specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

Also, if the gaming state is a high base state (time saving state or probability variable state), select the variation pattern determination table D for loss, and change the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table D for loss PA1-3 (shortened Variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) loss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (simulated continuous effect 1 time) fluctuation pattern) and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo continuous effect)). More specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 80%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 10%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a big hit, the variation pattern is determined according to the type of the big win. The selection ratio of any one of the variation patterns for big wins (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied according to, for example, the gaming state, regardless of the type of the big win. By doing so, the variable display is performed in a variation pattern suitable for the game state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 002SG150 as shown in FIG. there is The game control data holding area 002SG150 shown in FIG. It has a control timer setting section 002SG153, a game control counter setting section 002SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 002SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) are stored in order of winning.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) are stored in the winning order.

As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for hit type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment is held data, It stores until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data representing the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on is reserved data. It stores until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 002SG151A and the second special figure suspension storage unit 002SG151B can be used to execute a special figure game using the first special figure or a special figure game using the second special figure. It shows that it is suspended, and it becomes suspension information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in these special figure games.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning hole in this way, and the second starting winning hole When the holding information (second holding information) based on the establishment of the second start winning by the game ball passing (entering) is stored in association with the holding number in a separate holding storage unit, The variable display based on the second reserved storage information is preferentially executed over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The normal pattern pending storage unit 002SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 002SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it was detected by the gate switch 21, and the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 002SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 002SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 002SG153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. For example, the game control timer setting unit 002SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 002SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the production operation in addition to the production control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns, and the like. there is

As an example, in the ROM 121, the production control CPU 120 controls production operations by various production devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, the production model, etc.). A performance control pattern table storing a plurality of types of performance control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern corresponds to various performance operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is composed of data indicating the content of the control. The effect control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display time effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like.

In the RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, a production control data holding area 002SG190 as shown in FIG. is provided. The production control data holding area 002SG190 shown in FIG. 10A includes a production control flag setting unit 002SG191, a production control timer setting unit 002SG192, a production control counter setting unit 002SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 002SG194. there is

The effect control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 002SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 002SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 002SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 002SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 002SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 002SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the reception command buffer 002SG194A at the time of start winning as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 002SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning command buffer 002SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, the start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (second 1 pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer 002SG194A at the time of start winning are associated with these starting entrance winning designation command and reservation storage number notification command , A storage area (entry) for storing separately in the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 002SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 002SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , the pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 002SG194A shown in FIG. 10B is an entry (buffer number " 1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. , and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10(B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern in the first special figure reserved memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number "0" is deleted. ' are shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "0". , the commands stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after the restoration process (step S4) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the restoration condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after the initialization process (step S6). The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 12 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110, and It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Special pattern process processing)
FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 12 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special game using the second special is preferentially executed over the special game using the first special. ). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (002SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (002SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (002SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 002SG154, it should have specified the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. 002SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (002SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "0" (002SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 002SGS101 (002SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reserved storage reaches the upper limit in 002SGS102 (002SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (002SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (002SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (002SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. In 002SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (002SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "2" (002SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 002SGS103 and 002SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (002SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "0", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (002SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of 002SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for the fluctuation pattern determination and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (002SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way and the starting port buffer value are stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit (002SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 002SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 002SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (002SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "0", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

CPU103, following the processing of 002SGS111, for example by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, to the effect control board 12 Settings are made for sending the pending storage count notification command (002SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the process of 002SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "0" (002SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "0" (Y at 002SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 002SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, and after initializing the stored value to "0" (002SGS116), the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 13 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 002SGS141). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 002 SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

In step 002SGS141, when the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" (step 002SGS141; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "0" in the second special figure pending storage unit Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 002 SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 002 SGS142, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, subtract 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" in the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 002 SGS143).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 002SGS144), it moves to step 002SGS149.

On the other hand, at step 002SGS141, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 002SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 002SGS145). . The number of the first special figure reserved memory is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 002 SGS145, if the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0" good. Thus, the processing of step 002SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 002SGS141, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "0" in the first special figure pending storage unit As such, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 002 SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 002 SGS146, by subtracting 1 from the first special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, subtract 1 from the first special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data in the first special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" in the first special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 002 SGS147).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "0" (step 002SGS148), it moves to step 002SGS149.

In step 002 SGS 149, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 5 is selected as a table used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, should be a "jackpot" or a "lose". to set. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss" , determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or "loss" (step 002 SGS150). In addition, in this step 002 SGS150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (variable probability state) in which the variable probability flag is on, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a high probability state (variable probability state ), it is determined as a "big hit" if it falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, and if not, it is determined as a "loss". Also, if the probability variation flag is off low probability state (low probability low base state if this characteristic part), if the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination falls within the range of 1 to 219, "big hit ”, and if not applicable, it is determined as “missing”.

As described above, in the display result determination table selected at step 002SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" corresponding to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time, so step 002SGS150 In the processing, depending on whether the gaming state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high-probability state, different determination data (determination value) is used to determine the special figure display result as a "big hit" By determining whether or not, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) as a “jackpot” with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is judged to be a "jackpot" at step 002SGS150 (step 002SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on (step 002SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step 002 SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table A”, “probability variable jackpot B”, “probability variable jackpot C”, which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches, determines which of a plurality of jackpot types should be selected (step 002 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of step 002 SGS154, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is changed to a time-saving state (low probability high base state) and a probability variable state ( Which game state is to be controlled from among the high-probability-high base state) is determined before deriving the fixed special symbol as a variable display result. Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 002 SGS155), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable big hit" corresponding to non-probable variable big hit, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable big hit A, it is set to "0". If it is "probability variable B" corresponding to B, it is set to "2", and if it is "probability variable C" corresponding to probability variable big hit C, it is set to "3". After the processing of step 002SGS155, the process proceeds to step 002SGS156.

Further, when it is determined to be "missed" at step 002SGS150 (step 002SGS150; N), the processing of step 002SGS156 is executed without executing the processing of steps 002SGS152 to 002SGS155.

In step 002 SGS156, the CPU 103 corresponds to the result of prior determination of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), and the decision result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot game state. , Set a fixed special pattern. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" at step 002 SGS 150a, if the big hit type at step 002 SGS 154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is displayed. Set as a fixed special pattern. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B", a special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "0" is set as the fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of kinds of symbols may be set as the confirmed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step 002SGS156, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 002SGS157), the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

It should be noted that when the reserved memory number of the special game using the first special figure in step 002SGS145 is "0" (step 002SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step 002SGS158), End the special symbol normal process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration specifying command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit).

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32A. , 32B, and control to operate various production devices. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random value update process (step S77), a demonstration effect control process (step S78) for executing a demonstration effect in the pachinko game machine 1 and a background image displayed on the image display device 5 are changed. A background display update process (step S79) for updating to another background image and a menu display process (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state are executed. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

Incidentally, in the background display update process of the present embodiment, the first background image corresponding to the first effect mode, the second background image corresponding to the second effect mode, and the third background image corresponding to the third effect mode , and a fourth background image corresponding to the fourth effect mode. The first background image and the second background image can be displayed when the game state is the normal state, the third background image can be displayed when the game state is the low probability/high base state, and the third background image can be displayed when the game state is the low probability/high base state. 4 The background image can be displayed when the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Switching between the first background image and the second background image is performed, for example, when the variable display of SP reach swelling is executed, or when one of the background images is continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time. It switches when the conditions are met.

In the menu display process, in addition to the process of displaying the menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, in the state where the menu screen is displayed, the speaker is displayed in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B. It includes processing for adjusting the volume output from 8L and 8R and processing for adjusting the amount of light (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 .

In the demonstration effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer until the customer waiting demonstration effect is started, such as a timer for waiting for the start of the customer waiting demo effect, based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command. The customer waiting demonstration effect may be started based on the time-out of the timer without starting the variable display. In addition, when the variable display is started while the customer waiting demonstration effect start waiting timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration effect start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration effect is interrupted, The display of the image display device 5 may be switched to the variable display of decorative patterns.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 16 as the effect control process. In the production control process shown in FIG. 17, the production control CPU 120 first starts the reservation storage display (first reservation display 002SG101 and second reservation display 002SG102) in the special figure reservation storage display area 5U of the image display device 5. A pending display update process for updating the display according to the stored contents of the received command buffer 002SG194A at the time of winning and performing shift display, etc., which will be described later, is executed (step S161). After executing the pending display update process, one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

In addition, in step S161, based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination for executing the pre-reading advance notice effect (for example, the effect of changing the display color of the pending display, etc.) A pre-reading notice setting process in which determination, setting, etc. are performed may be executed together with the pending display update process.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, commands to the lamp control board 14 (illumination signals ), such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, various effect control during the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is changed to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, operation|movement of CPU120 for production|presentation control is demonstrated. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 002 SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 002SGS271; Y), for example, the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer , are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 002 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Also, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off at step 002SGS271 (step 002SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 002SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273; Y ), for example, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer, buffer number 1 It is shifted upward by one piece (step 002SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

After executing step 002SGS272 or step 002SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 002SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) and the variation pattern (step 002SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In this embodiment, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Also, if the received variable display result designation command is a third variable display result designation command to a fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B to the probability variable jackpot C, an odd number other than "7" is used as the stop symbol. It is determined from a plurality of combinations of symbols (for example, combination of decoration symbols such as "111", "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, sets a combination of decoration patterns in which three patterns are even numbers as the stop pattern. to decide.

In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the received variable display result designation command is the third variable corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B to the probability variable jackpot C As in the case of the display result designation command to the fourth variable display result designation command, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", "333", "555", "999 , etc.)) may be determined. In this case, by further sharing the effects during the variable display during the jackpot game and the variable probability state, it is possible to determine whether the game state is the variable probability state or the time reduction state until the variable display is executed 100 times. , the player can be made to pay attention to whether the time saving state ends after 100 times of variable display or continues until 10,000 times of variable display, and interest can be improved.

Further, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as the stop symbols. A combination of symbols (lost symbols) is determined. Further, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the reach variation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but the middle A combination of reach-losses with different symbols (losing symbols) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern specification command read at step 002 SGS 275 is a variation pattern specification command of super reach (variation patterns PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) with pseudo-continuation. It is determined whether or not there is (step 002SGS277). If the variation pattern specification command read at step 002SGS275 is not a super reach variation pattern specification command, that is, if it is a normal reach variation pattern specification command (step 002SGS278; N), proceed to step 002SGS383.

When the variation pattern designation command read out at step 002 SGS275 is a variation pattern designation command of super reach, from the data indicating the stop design of the decorative design determined at step 002 SGS276 and stored in the decorative design display result storage area, reach The display colors of the stop symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5C forming the state are specified. Then, using the pseudo-repeat number display determination table shown in FIG. The display color of the pseudo repetition number display (for example, "x2") indicating that the variable display is started twice is determined and stored (step 002 SGS278).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designation command read out in step 002 SGS275 is a pseudo-run twice super reach variation pattern (step 002 SGS279), and when it is determined that it is a pseudo-run two times super reach variation pattern (Step 002SGS279; Y), using the pseudo-repeated count display determination table shown in FIG. The display color of the pseudo consecutive number display (for example, "x3") indicating that the variable display is started three times including the first variable display is determined and stored (step 002 SGS280).

Then, when it is determined in step 002SGS279 that the variation pattern is not two times of pseudo-repeated, or when the process of step 002SGS280 is executed, a start waiting timer for starting display of the number of pseudo-repetitions is set (step 002SGS281). , go to step 002 SGS 282 .

Next, at step 002SGS282, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (step 002SGS282), and a process timer is started (step 002SGS283).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 002SGS284). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 002SGS285). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 002SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of left, middle, right decorative patterns and small patterns into the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data written in is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of decorative patterns and small patterns. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 002 SGS287), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(decorative design and small design)
Next, decorative patterns and small patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22. FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining decorative patterns and small patterns. 20, (A1) and (A2) are the first production mode, (B1) and (B2) are the second production mode, (C1) and (C2) are the third production mode, and (D1) and (D2) are the fourth production mode. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing aspects of modes; 21, (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decoration pattern in the first rendering mode, and (B1) and (B2) in the second rendering mode. 22, (C1) and (C2) show the third production mode, (D1) and (D2) show the relationship between the variable display area and the decoration pattern in the fourth production mode, and (E) shows the decoration pattern and the small pattern. and FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a variable display mode.

In FIG. 19, the sizes of decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state), and small patterns are those displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and display area 5S. It is displayed as a ratio.

As shown in FIG. 19, when the gaming state is the low base state, the decorative symbols (for the low base state) displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are circular number pedestals and Numeral display section 002SG051 consisting of numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number pedestal, and 10 types of characters corresponding to each number "0" to "9" of the number display section 002SG051 ( Illustration of all characters is omitted), a character display portion 002SG052, a rectangular information pedestal in front view, and information about characters displayed in front of the information pedestal (for example, in the present embodiment, , character name), and a substantially rectangular pedestal display section 002SG054 that is displayed so as to surround the number display section 002SG051, the character display section 002SG052, and the information display section 002SG053. be.

In this embodiment, the information display section 002SG053 displays the name of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the information is related to the character displayed in the section 002SG052, various information other than the name (for example, information such as the character's nickname, personality, battle level, and items possessed by the character) may be displayed.

In addition, when the game state is the high base state, the decorative patterns (for the high base state) displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are number display portions consisting of numbers "0" to "9". 002SG061 and a substantially rectangular pedestal display portion 002SG064 that is displayed so as to surround the number display portion 002SG061. The decorative symbols for the high base state are not provided with the character display portion and the information display portion unlike the decorative symbols for the low base state.

In addition, in the display area 5S provided in the upper left part of the image display device 5, the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decoration pattern are displayed. The small patterns consist of numbers "0" to "9" displayed in the small pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, respectively, and each number corresponds to a decoration pattern. In this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative patterns and the numbers of the small patterns correspond to each other, but the numbers of both patterns do not necessarily correspond to each other. It may be a number from '1' to '5' which is less than the number '0' to '9', or it may be a symbol or figure different from the number of the decorative pattern.

Next, decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state) and small patterns will be described.

<Display timing of each pattern> Decorative patterns (for low base state) and decorative patterns (for high base state) are almost displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R while the power of the image display device 5 is on. Although it is always displayed, it may be erased (not displayed) when, for example, an SP ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect) is executed during variable display, or when a customer waiting demo effect is executed. On the other hand, while the image display device 5 is powered on, the small pattern is always displayed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative pattern, and continues to be displayed even when the decorative pattern is erased as described above. Is displayed. When information having a higher display priority than small symbols (for example, error display) is displayed, it may be erased.

<Variable display mode of each pattern> Decorative patterns (for low base state) are displayed in a scroll display that moves linearly from top to bottom in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first production mode described later. , and in the second presentation mode, variable display is performed by scroll display that moves in a curved manner from the back side to the front side of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

The decorative pattern (for high base state) is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a third production mode, which will be described later. , In the fourth effect mode, variable display is performed by scroll display that linearly moves from the top to the bottom of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Regardless of the game state or production mode, the small symbols are displayed variablely in the switching display (updated display in which the symbols are updated) in which the symbols “0” to “9” are switched in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR. executed.

In a broad sense, both the "scrolling display" and the "switching display" are included in the "switching display" in which patterns are switched and displayed. "Scroll display" means that a plurality of patterns are updated and displayed by frame-out display or fade-out display from the display area after moving and displaying the pattern. A plurality of symbols may be updated and displayed by repeating display and non-display (erasing) or rotating display without fade-out display, which may be distinguished from "switch display".

<Numerical display part> The decorative pattern (for low base state) and the decorative pattern (for high base state) have character display part 002SG052, information display part 002SG053, and pedestal display part 002SG054 in addition to number display parts 002SG051 and 002SG061. On the other hand, the small pattern is composed only of the number display portion.

In addition, the decorative patterns (for the low base state) are displayed in the same size in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R. By displaying in a size slightly smaller than the decorative pattern display area 5R, a sense of depth is created. On the other hand, the decorative patterns (for the high base state) are displayed in the same size in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and arranged linearly in the horizontal direction. The small patterns are displayed in the same size in each of the small pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC and 5SR.

In addition, in the low base state, the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are arranged substantially horizontally at approximately the center position of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction, but the middle decorative design display area 5C is arranged. is positioned slightly above the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R. In the high base state, the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged substantially horizontally at substantially the center position of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed at the stop position of the middle decorative design display area 5C in the high base state are displayed in the image display device more than the decorative symbols stopped and displayed at the stop position of the middle decorative design display area 5C in the low base state. 5 is placed near the center of the display screen (see FIG. 20).

In addition, when the size of the number display portion 002SG051 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as a reference, the size of the number display portion 002SG061 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is large, and the size of the number display portion of the small pattern is large. is small. In other words, the size of the number display area is larger in order of decorative design (for high base state), decorative design (for low base state), and small design. (for low base state) > small pattern). In addition, the overall size of each pattern has the same relationship as that of the number display portion.

In this way, in the low base state, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are made to appear large, and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are shifted to give a sense of depth. In addition, in the high base state where the average variable display period is short, the decoration pattern is arranged at a position near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, so that the degree of recognition of the decoration pattern can be improved. (See FIG. 20).

In addition, the decorative pattern (for the low base state), the decorative pattern (for the high base state), and the number display portions of the small patterns are each formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). A stereoscopic image is, for example, an image created by 3DCG (a virtual solid is constructed (modeled) with points placed on three-dimensional coordinates as vertices, and information for reproducing materials etc. is given to each surface, (reproduced by illuminating an object with arbitrary light intensity, light source position, etc.), but a three-dimensional display device (for example, from a right eye image (R image) and a left eye image (L image) an image liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video), a backlight that irradiates planar light from the rear to the front of the image liquid crystal panel, and the image on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel. and a liquid crystal panel for a parallax barrier provided at a predetermined interval) to be stereoscopically visible.

In addition, among the numbers “0” to “9” of the decorative pattern, the odd numbers “1, 3, 5, 7, 9” are controlled to a high-probability high base state after the jackpot is finished. , and for even numbers of "0, 2, 4, 6, 8", the normal design (non-probability design). It should be noted that even in the event of a variable probability big win, a predetermined big win combination may be obtained according to the normal symbols.

<Character Display Portion> The character display portion 002SG052 of the decoration pattern (for the low base state) is formed of a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the character display portion 002SG052 may be formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Also, the character displayed on the character display portion 002SG052 performs a predetermined action (movement) when the variable display is started or stopped, as will be described later. On the other hand, the decoration pattern (for the high base state) and the small pattern are not provided with the character display portion.

<Information Display Portion> The information display portion 002SG053 of the decoration pattern (for the low base state) is formed of a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). The information display section 002SG053 may be formed with a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). The information display portion 002SG053 displays a "name" which is information about the character displayed in the character display portion 002SG052. It has become. On the other hand, the decoration pattern (for the high base state) and the small pattern are not provided with the information display section.

<Pedestal display part> The pedestal display part 002SG054 of the decoration pattern (for the low base state) displays the decoration part that decorates the character on the front, and is formed with a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). . Also, the pedestal display portion 002SG064 of the decorative design (for the high base state) is formed with a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Note that both the pedestal display portion 002SG054 and the pedestal display portion 002SG064 may be formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Further, when the size of the pedestal display portion 002SG054 of the decorative design (for the low base state) is used as a reference, the size of the pedestal display portion 002SG064 of the decorative design (for the high base state) is large. On the other hand, the small pattern is not provided with a pedestal display portion.

<Main colors> The color of the numbers displayed in the number display parts 002SG051 and 002SG061 of the decorative patterns (for low base state) and decorative patterns (for high base state) is blue for normal patterns consisting of even numbers, and from odd numbers to blue. The probability variation pattern is said to be "red". The pedestals for numbers other than the numbers, the pedestal display portions 002SG054 and 002SG064, etc. may be displayed in the same color as the numbers or in a color different from the numbers.

Also, the characters displayed in the character display section 002SG052 may be configured in their original colors without being affected by the main colors. Also, the character corresponding to the variable probability symbol is preferably the ally character if, for example, the ally character and the enemy character are separated. Alternatively, it is preferable that the character is a main character of the story, such as a main character in the story among allied characters or a person closely related to the main character.

In addition, as described above, when the story concept of allies and enemies is adapted, the notice effect and SP reach effect are basically expressed from the point of view of the allies, and the allies and enemies fight in the SP reach effect. In the case of such a presentation configuration, it is notified that the player will be in an advantageous state (for example, a big win) when the ally side has an advantageous ending, such as when the ally side wins over the enemy.

Also, the main color having the highest occupation rate in the entire area of each of the decorative pattern (for low base state) and the decorative pattern (for high base state) may be the same color as the number. In addition, although the even-numbered normal symbols are "blue" and the odd-numbered probability variable symbols are "red", other colors may be used.

Also, in the high base state, as described later, the scroll display is performed at high speed, so it is necessary to make it easier to see than the decorative symbols (for the low base state), so decorations such as the stop symbol notice and the fluctuation start notice are displayed. Since effects are often displayed in relation to the design, the decorative design (for high base state) is mainly composed of the number display section 002SG061, and is composed of a character display section and a number display section. It is characterized by a larger design size ratio than the decorative design (for low base state).

Although illustration is omitted in the present embodiment, the numbers of the decorative patterns (for high base state) are more complicated than the numbers of the decorative patterns (for low base state), and the design is more complicated. The high base state may be livened up by making the appearance more flashy, such as making it taller.

On the other hand, the color of the numbers of the small symbols is "yellow" for normal symbols consisting of even numbers, and "yellow-green" for probability variable symbols consisting of odd numbers. In the present embodiment, even-numbered normal symbols are "yellow" and odd-numbered odd-numbered odd-numbered symbols are "yellow-green", but other colors may be used. Also, the same number as the decorative pattern may be the same kind of color as the decorative pattern.

Regarding the design of the small pattern, it is possible to reduce the number material of the decorative pattern in the low base state or high base state as it is, but it is said that the design will enhance the effect. In order to improve visibility for the player, it is preferable that the design is simpler than the decorative numbers (for example, it is flat rather than three-dimensional, and has a simple color without gloss). .

As shown in FIG. 20, the effect control CPU 120 has, as effect modes, a first effect mode (see FIGS. 20 (A1) and (A2)), a second effect mode (see FIGS. 20 (B1) and (B2)), a Either of the 3 production modes (see FIGS. 20(C1) and (C2)) and the 4th production mode (see FIGS. 20(D1) and (D2)) can be executed. The first effect mode and the second effect mode are effect modes that can be executed when the game state is controlled to the low-probability-low base state. In addition, the third effect mode is an effect mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to the low probability and high base state, and the fourth effect mode is when the game state is controlled to the high probability and high base state. It is an executable production mode.

As shown in FIG. 20 (A1), in the first production mode, the decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative patterns is a landscape of a town in the daytime. A first background image 002SG081 is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 20A2, the variable display of decorative patterns is scroll display (first scroll display) in which the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R move linearly from top to bottom. executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21A1 and 21A2, each decorative pattern is framed downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then straight downward. , and is framed out downward from the lower sides of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, a decorative pattern of "3") passes through the decorative pattern stop position set in the center of the vertical direction of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the subsequent decoration pattern (for example, the decoration pattern of "4") is displayed in the frame and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 21 (A2), when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized. However, after the preceding "3" decoration pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "3" decoration pattern and the subsequent "4" decoration pattern become visible. In this way, the number of decorative patterns increases in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and "0" to "9". ” is repeatedly displayed. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, thereby executing the scroll display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, in the display area 5S provided at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, the number of the first reserved memory, the number of the second reserved memory and the small pattern are displayed, and the special figure provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 In the pending storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F, the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display being executed are displayed. be done. In addition, since the number of these first reserved memories, the number of second reserved memories, the small symbols, the special figure reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5F are displayed in common in all production modes, the explanation is omitted below. do.

As shown in FIG. 20(B1), in the second rendering mode, the decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative patterns is a landscape of a wilderness in the daytime. A second background image 002SG082 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 20B2, the variable display of decorative patterns is scroll display (second scroll display) in which the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are curved from the back side to the front side. A variable display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21(B1) and (B2), the left and right decorative patterns approach the center of the screen from the upper left side of the left decorative design display area 5L and the upper right side of the right decorative design display area 5R. After that, it moves downward to the left and right sides of the screen, and moves sideways from the lower left side of the left decorative design display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative design display area 5R. displayed out of frame. The middle decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed so as to approach the front side of the middle decoration pattern display area 5C from the back side of the screen, and then displayed out of frame.

In addition, the previous decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the decorative pattern "2") passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the center position in the vertical direction of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. Occasionally, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "3" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves toward the center of the screen. That is, as shown in FIG. 21 (B2), when the leading "2" decorative pattern is passing near the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "3" decorative pattern are It can be visually recognized, but after the preceding decorative pattern "2" has passed the stop position, the following decorative patterns "3" and "4" can be visually recognized. In this way, the number of decorative patterns increases in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and "0" to "9". ” is repeatedly displayed. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, thereby executing the scroll display of the decorative symbols.

As shown in FIG. 20 (C1), in the third production mode, the decorative patterns for the high base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative patterns is the scenery of the town in the evening. A representative third background image 002SG083 is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 20(C2), the variable display of the decorative design is performed by rotational display in which the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are rotated around a rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction. be.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 22(C1) and (C2), the decoration pattern in the third production mode has a first surface 5a and a second surface 5b opposite to the first surface 5a. , the preceding decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern of "3") is displayed on the first surface 5a. On the other hand, when the first surface 5a faces the front, it cannot be specified whether the subsequent decorative pattern (for example, "4" decorative pattern) is displayed on the second surface 5b. That is, since the pedestal display portion 002SG064 has a low transmittance (opaqueness), the decoration pattern displayed on the second surface 5b cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decoration pattern).

Also, the decorative pattern is rotatable in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view), and the first surface 5a, the second surface 5b, the first surface 5a, the second surface 5b, . . . By rotating, the numbers increase in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc. After "9", it returns to "0" and goes from "0" to "9". is repeatedly displayed. In other words, the decoration symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in each of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, so that the rotation display of the decoration symbols is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22(C2), when the second surface 5b is displayed by rotating about 90 degrees or more from the state in which the first surface 5a faces the front, the second surface 5b has the first A decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern of "4") following the decorative pattern displayed on the surface 5a (for example, a decorative pattern of "3") is displayed. Next, although not shown in particular, when the first surface 5a is displayed by rotating about 90 degrees or more from the state in which the second surface 5b faces the front, the first surface 5a is displayed on the second surface 5b. A decoration pattern (for example, a decoration pattern of "5") following the decoration pattern (for example, a decoration pattern of "4") is displayed.

Further, in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and characters of "Right-handed" is displayed to notify the player to promote the right-handed operation. In the lower left part, a time saving remaining display 002SG202 (in this example, characters of "remaining XX times", XX=0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time saving control is executed is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 20 (D1), in the fourth effect mode, the decorative patterns for the high base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative patterns is a night townscape. A representative fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 20(C2), the variable display of the decorative design is a scroll display (third scroll display) in which the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are linearly moved downward. A variable display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 22(D1) and (D2), each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then straight downward. , and is framed out downward from the lower sides of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, "3" decorative pattern) passes through the decorative pattern stop position set in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Then, the subsequent decoration pattern (for example, the decoration pattern of "4") is displayed in the frame and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 22 (D1), when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized. However, as shown in FIG. 22 (D2), after the leading "3" decorative pattern has passed the stop position, the leading "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern are visible. becomes. In this way, the number of decorative patterns increases in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and "0" to "9". ” is repeated. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, thereby executing the scroll display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing image 002SG201 including a right arrow and characters "Right-handed" is displayed for informing the player to promote the right-handed operation.

In addition, in the second effect mode, the name of the information display portion 002SG053 of the decorative pattern is always hidden even when the decorative pattern is stopped. In addition, in the third production mode and the fourth production mode, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner without including the information display section 002SG053. Thus, in the first effect mode, by displaying the information display section 002SG053 to draw attention to the name of the character, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character. By hiding the information display section 002SG053 in the presentation mode, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the variable display and the notice presentation rather than the characters. It should be noted that not only the name displayed on the information display section 002SG053 but also the information display section 002SG053 itself may be hidden.

As shown in FIG. 22(E), the decoration pattern and the small pattern are different in variable display mode. For example, during the period in which the decorative patterns are scrolled and displayed at high speed, one decorative pattern passes through the frame-in display from the upper sides of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the frame-out display from the lower sides. A period Ta2 is required. That is, one decorative pattern is displayed, and it takes a period Ta2 until the display of the decorative pattern is finished. On the other hand, the small symbols are switched (updated) a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) to display the small symbols of the losing combination during the period Ta2.

Specifically, when the frame rate (screen display speed) is set to 30 FPS (displaying 30 frames (frames) of images per second), from the start of the display of one decorative pattern to the end of the display An image of 10 frames is displayed at , and the period Ta2 is about 0.3 seconds.

On the other hand, small symbols of different combinations (for example, "635", "175", "461", "532", "913", etc.) are displayed every two frames (period Ta1). That is, during the period Ta2 from when one decoration pattern is displayed to when the display of the decoration pattern is finished, the small patterns of the losing combination are switched five times and displayed for each period Ta1 (period Ta1 < period Ta2). It should be noted that the small symbols of each lost combination are displayed for the period Ta1, but since it is only a moment (about 0.06 seconds), it is difficult to visually confirm.

Also, when it is determined that the display result of the variable display will be the result of the display of the failure, the effect control CPU 120 decides to stop display the fixed decorative pattern of the failure combination (for example, "326"). , after starting the variable display of the decoration pattern and before stopping and displaying the fixed decoration pattern (for example, "326") of the lost combination, the small pattern of the lost combination of "326", which is the same as the decorative pattern, is not displayed. Switching display is performed as follows. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fact that the decorative symbols of the lost combination will be stop-displayed in advance from the small symbols of the lost combination.

In addition, in the scroll display in the first production mode, the second production mode and the fourth production mode, and the rotating display in the third production mode, the decorative pattern changes the variable display speed from low speed to high speed at the start of the variable display, When the variable display stops, it changes from high speed to low speed, that is, the variable display speed can be changed. ing.

(Various actions with decorative patterns)
Next, various operation displays of decorative patterns will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing (A) a decorative pattern variation start action, (B) a variation stop action, and (C) a loop action.

As shown in FIGS. 23(A) to 23(C), the decorative patterns for the low base state are moved within the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R or displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for variable display. It rotates within the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, but apart from such variable display movements, it is possible to execute various actions (movements) that change the number display portion 002SG051 and the character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative design. .

(variable start action)
As shown in FIG. 23(A), when the variable display is started in the first production mode and the second production mode, the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 in the decoration pattern is left-right reversed. A "variation start action" that causes Specifically, the character is in a normal mode of putting both hands on the hips and facing diagonally forward right in the variation start action A1, and in a variation start action A2 with both hands spread upward and facing the front. In action A3, the character puts both hands on the waist and looks diagonally to the left. Here, for convenience of explanation, only three frames of the variation start actions A1, A2, and A3 are shown, but in reality, the character is displayed over several tens of frames within the variation start action period (A1 to A3). As a result, a variation start action (movement) is performed in which the orientation of the character's body changes in the order of diagonally forward right (A1), front (A2), and diagonally forward left (A3).

Next, after the character's body is turned diagonally forward left, the decoration pattern moves (rises) from the stop position to the side opposite to the scroll direction by a predetermined distance (A4), and then starts moving downward. to start the scroll display. These fluctuation start actions A1 to A4 are a fluctuation start action period Tb1 (see FIG. 24) from when the variable display of the special design is started to when the scroll display of the decoration design (the movement of the decoration design downward) is started. is executed over

Here, for convenience of explanation, only four frames of the variation start actions A1, A2, A3, and A4 are shown. A change start action (movement) is performed by displaying the movement of the character over ten frames.

In the present embodiment, as the variation start action, a mode in which the orientation of the character's body is horizontally reversed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation start action is Modifications other than those described above are possible. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the body may move. At least one of the number display portion 002SG051, the character display portion 002SG052, the information display portion 002SG053, and the pedestal display portion 002SG054, which form the decorative pattern, should be an action. In other words, the variable start action is an action that is executed before the decorative pattern starts scrolling display or rotating display, and is an action that changes in the scrolling display, that is, a separate action that operates in a manner different from the scrolling display. be.

Further, in the first effect mode, the name of the character (character-related information) displayed in the information display section 002SG053 is erased (hidden) during the variable start action period Tb1. In this manner, the name of the character is made easy to see when it is stopped, and the name of the character is hidden after the start of the scroll display, so that attention can be drawn to the scroll display.

Specifically, the variable display period of the special symbols includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special symbols and small symbols is started until the scrolling display of the decorative symbols is started, and the scrolling display of the decorative symbols. and a variable post-display period after being initiated. The name of the character (character-related information) displayed on the information display section 002SG053 is displayed during the pre-variable display period, that is, when the change start action is being executed, and then the post-variable display period starts. , that is, before the scroll display of the decoration pattern is started. In this way, by erasing the name before the variable start action period Tb1, that is, before the scroll display is started, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, the advance notice effect, etc., rather than the name.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbols and small symbols to the start of the scroll display of the decorative symbols is set as the pre-variable display period. However, the pre-variable display period is the period from when the condition for starting variable display is satisfied until the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, that is, the timing when the start winning occurs and the reserved memory. A period from when the variable display based on the display pattern is started to when the scroll display of the decoration pattern is started may be sufficient.

(fluctuation stop action)
As shown in FIG. 23(B), when the variable display ends in the first effect mode and the second effect mode (when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed), the decorative pattern is displayed on the character display portion 002SG052. "Variation stop action" is executed in which the character that is being displayed is enlarged and displayed.

Specifically, when the scroll-displayed decoration pattern is temporarily stopped at the stop position, the character changes from the normal mode of placing the hand on the waist and facing diagonally forward to the right (fluctuation stop action B1) to the normal mode. After being enlarged and displayed so as to protrude far above the pedestal display portion 002SG054 (variation stop action B2), it is reduced and restored to the normal mode (variation stop action B3).

Here, for convenience of explanation, only three frames of the fluctuation stop actions B1, B2, and B3 are shown. A change stop action (movement) is performed by displaying the movement of the character over ten frames.

In the present embodiment, a mode in which a character is enlarged and displayed is exemplified as a variation stop action. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the body may move. At least one of the number display portion 002SG051, the character display portion 002SG052, the information display portion 002SG053, and the pedestal display portion 002SG054 that form the decoration pattern may take action. In other words, the change stop action is an action that is executed when the scrolling display of the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped, and is a separate action from the changing action such as the scrolling display and the rotating display.

(loop action)
As shown in FIG. 23(C), when the variable display ends in the first production mode and the second production mode (from the temporary stop display of the decoration pattern until the stop display (design determination)), the decoration pattern In , the character displayed on the character display portion 002SG052 is repeatedly reduced and restored, and the number display portion 002SG051 is repeatedly rotated horizontally around the vertical axis of rotation.

Specifically, in the loop action C1, the character puts both hands on the waist and looks diagonally forward to the right, while the number display section 002SG051 faces the front. The characters are displayed in a reduced size so that they can be accommodated, and the number display portion 002SG051 is rotated about 45 degrees to the right. In the loop action C4, the character is displayed in a reduced size so that it fits on the pedestal display portion 002SG054, and the number display portion 002SG051 is rotated to the left by about 45 degrees. In this loop action, the loop actions C1, C2, C3, and C4 are sequentially executed over the loop action period Tb3, and after the loop action period Tb3 ends, the loop action C1 is returned to, and the actions of the loop actions C1 to C4 are executed again over the loop action period Tb3. is executed. That is, in loop actions, loop actions C1 to C4 are periodically executed.

Here, for convenience of explanation, only four frames of the loop actions C1 to C4 are displayed, but in reality, the character is restored after being displayed in reduced size, and the number display section 002SG051 is rotated and restored. In the loop action period Tb3 up to , a loop action (operation) is performed by displaying the character and number display portion 002SG051 over several tens of frames.

In the present embodiment, as the loop action, the character is displayed in a reduced size and the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotates. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of the loop action can be changed to a mode other than the above. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the body may move. At least one of the number display portion 002SG051, the character display portion 002SG052, the information display portion 002SG053, and the pedestal display portion 002SG054, which form the decorative pattern, should be an action. That is, the loop action is an action that is executed from when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position until it is stopped and displayed (design is confirmed), and is a separate action from the action that changes during the scroll display.

(Comparison of various action periods and light emission periods)
Next, various actions of decorative patterns and light emission control of lamps will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24, (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of decoration patterns and periods of lamp light emission control, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of the lamp.

As shown in FIG. 24(A), the variation start actions A1 to A4 (see FIG. 23(A)) of decorative symbols have a variation start action period Tb1 of about 1.5 seconds (variation start action period Tb1=approximately 1.5 seconds), consisting of images of approximately 45 frames. In addition, the variation stop action period Tb2, which is the execution period of the variation stop action B1 to B3 (see FIG. 23B) of the decorative symbols, is about 0.8 seconds (the variation stop action period Tb2=about 0.8 second). ), consisting of about 28 frames of images. In addition, the loop actions C1 to C4 (see FIG. 23C) of the decorative symbols have a loop action period Tb3, which is a period of 1, of approximately 1.8 seconds (loop action period Tb3=approximately 1.8 seconds). It consists of about 55 frames of images.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24(B), movable body lamps 9d provided on each of the movable body 32A provided on the upper part of the image display device 5 and the movable body 32B provided on the lower part of the image display device 5, The main lamp 9a and the frame lamp 9b provided in the gaming machine frame 3 emit light based on the loop light emission control performed by the effect control CPU 120 when the game state is the low base state.

In this loop light emission control, for example, "white", "blue", and "yellow" are emitted in order over the loop light emission period Tb4, which is a period of 1, and after the end of the loop light emission period Tb4, the light returns to "white", and loop light emission is performed again. During the period Tb4, "white", "blue", and "yellow" are emitted in this order, and this is repeated periodically. That is, in the loop light emission control, "white", "blue", and "yellow" light emission is performed periodically.

The loop light emission period Tb4 is longer than the loop action period Tb3 (loop action period Tb3<loop light emission period Tb4). In this way, in the low base state, the loop action is repeated in order to encourage the player to variably display the decorative symbols, while in the high base state, the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the low base state. can prevent the variable display from being excessively urged and making the user feel annoyed. In addition, since the loop action is repeated at a shorter period than the loop light emission control, the decorative pattern can be favorably highlighted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the loop light emission control has exemplified a form in which light emission of “white”, “blue”, and “yellow” is periodically executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The light emission color and light emission pattern of the lamp in one period can be changed in various ways. A light emission pattern in which light is emitted in order may be performed periodically, or a light emission pattern in which light emission of four or more colors is emitted in order may be performed periodically.

Incidentally, the various actions of the decorative symbols shown in FIG. 24(A) are executed when the game state is controlled to the low base state and the production mode is the first production mode or the second production mode. It is not executed when it is controlled to the high base state and the production mode is the third production mode or the fourth production mode. In the loop light emission control of the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b shown in FIG. 24(B), the game state is controlled to the low base state, and the effect mode is the first effect mode or the second effect mode. However, it is not executed when the game state is controlled to the high base state and the effect mode is the third effect mode or the fourth effect mode.

(hold display)
Next, the pending display will be described with reference to FIG. 25, (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams for explaining an operation example of pending display.

As shown in FIG. 25 (A1), in the case of waiting for a game (reserved memory number "0"), the special figure reserved memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 and the active display area 5F , the pending display is not displayed. The special figure reservation storage display area 5U consists of four display areas, the first display area from the left corresponds to the buffer number "1-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 002SG194A, and the second display from the left The area corresponds to buffer number "1-2", the third display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-3", and the fourth display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-4". ing.

As shown in FIG. 25 (A2), when the start winning (for example, the first start winning) occurs during game standby, in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U, the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed. Next, the first suspension display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left (see FIG. 25A3), and then moves diagonally downward to the left toward the active display area 5F so as to draw a parabola. Then, when it reaches the active display area 5F, it is enlarged and displayed as an active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25A4).

That is, as shown in FIG. 25 (A2), when the start winning a prize occurs, the first holding display 002SG101 is displayed in the special figure holding storage display area 5U and is not displayed in the active display area 5F, but the first starting winning a prize When the first suspension display 002SG101 is displayed in the special figure suspension storage display area 5U based on the occurrence of , variable display of small symbols is started according to variable display of special symbols.

However, although the variable display has been started, as shown in FIG. 25 (A4), the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U is active display Since the display has not been switched to the active display 002SG103 after moving to the area 5F, that is, the shift display has not ended, if the scrolling display of the decorative symbols is started in a state in which the shift display has not ended, either The player may not know whether the scroll display corresponding to the first suspension display 002SG101 has started, and the player may feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U is moved and displayed to the active display area 5F, and the pending shift display until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 The scrolling display (variable display) of decorative patterns does not start until the period ends, the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is executed, and after the pending shift display period ends, the scrolling display (variable display) of decorative patterns starts. It has become so.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(B1), when the decoration pattern is being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reserved memories is "1" or more (for example, the number of reserved memories is "2"), the image display device In the special figure reservation storage display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of 5, the first reservation display 002SG101 is displayed in the first and second display areas from the left, and the active display 002SG103 is displayed in the active display area 5F. It is

As shown in FIG. 25(B2), when the variable display corresponding to the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F ends, the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F is erased. An erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to highlight that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

The erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased. Display starts and then disappears. In this way, by not creating a blank period of the effect until the next variable display is started after the end of the variable display, it is possible to prevent the interest of the effect from being lowered. In addition, the erase effect 002SG110 makes the player aware that the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display has been erased, and a new active display 002SG103 is displayed to indicate that a new variable display has started. can be recognized.

Next, when the variable display corresponding to the first suspended display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the first suspended display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left (Fig. 25 (B3)), moving diagonally downward to the left toward the active display area 5F so as to draw a parabola, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, thereby forming the active display 002SG103. Switching display is performed (see FIG. 25 (B4)).

Also, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left is horizontally moved to the left along with the movement of the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left. Start (see FIG. 25(B3)) and move from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 25(B4)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 25(B2), after the active display 002SG103 is erased upon termination of the variable display, as shown in FIG. The first reserved display 002SG101 has not yet been moved to the active display area 5F, but when the moving display of the first reserved display 002SG101 is started, the variable display of the small symbols is started according to the variable display of the special symbols. .

However, although the variable display has been started, as shown in FIG. 25 (B4), the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U is active display Since the movement to the area 5F (shift display) has not been completed, if the scroll display of the decoration pattern is started in this state, it is not known which scroll display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 is started. There is a possibility that the player will feel a sense of incompatibility.

Therefore, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 Hold shift display period Until the end of the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern, the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is executed before the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is started, and after the pending shift display period ends, the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern It is supposed to start.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special figure reservation storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F are common in the first production mode to the fourth production mode, so that the shift display shown in FIG. Although it is designed to be executed in a common manner in the first production mode to the fourth production mode, for example, when providing a special figure pending storage display area 5U and active display area 5F corresponding to each production mode, each It may be possible to execute a shift display in a mode corresponding to the presentation mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, non-reach variation patterns, reach variation patterns, etc.) common operation mode (for example, active from the special figure pending storage display area 5U Shift display is executed to switch the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 to the active display 002SG103 in the aspect in which the pending display moves up to the display area 5F in a mountain locus, but it corresponds to each variation pattern and each production mode. It is also possible to execute the shift display of a plurality of types of operation modes. Further, it may be possible to execute a shift display with different operation modes depending on whether the game state is the low base state or the high base state.

In addition, the operation mode common to multiple types of variation patterns in the shift display is at least one of a plurality of elements such as the display mode until the pending display is switched to the active display, the display speed, and the shift display period. Including those that have elements in common.

In addition, in the present embodiment, with the occurrence of the start winning, after the first pending display 002SG101 (or second pending display 002SG102) is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special figure pending storage display area 5U, Although the first pending display 002SG101 (or the second pending display 002SG102) has been exemplified as being displayed (shifted) from the special figure pending storage display area 5U to the active display area 5F, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, if the number of pending memories is "0", the first pending display 002SG101 (or the second pending display 002SG102) is not displayed in the special figure pending memory display area 5U with the occurrence of the start winning, active display The active display 002SG103 may be displayed directly in the area 5F.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first pending display 002SG101 is stored as a switching display (shift display) for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display along with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Although the display is exemplified by moving from the first display area from the left in the display area 5U toward the active display area 5F non-linearly (for example, in a mountainous manner), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display may be linearly moved toward the left. In addition, the switching display (shift display) is not only for sliding display of the pending display, but also the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F and the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U The first suspended display 002SG101 that was displayed in the active display area 5F may be erased once, and the display of the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the new variable display may be started in the active display area 5F.

(Example of operation of each part at the start of variable display)
Next, an operation example of each part at the start of variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 35. FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first effect mode. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the second effect mode. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the details of the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols as Modification 1. In FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third effect mode. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining how the decorative design looks. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the fourth effect mode.

In the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, the diagrams represented by lines other than solid lines (for example, dashed-dotted lines, dotted lines, etc.) and arrows without symbols are displayed on the display screen. It is not intended to show an image that has been processed, but to explain the movement of the image.

(Operation example of variable display in the first production mode)
First, an operation example of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns is started in the first effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG.

FIG. 26(A) shows a state in which, in the first effect mode, the decorative designs scrolled in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 002SG101 are displayed in the special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2").

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in the combination of missing symbols, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed as the active display. Along with being erased from the area 5F, an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 26(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the variable display of small symbols is started, The decorative design variation start action (see FIG. 23A) is started in the order of the left decorative design display area 5L, the right decorative design display area 5R, and the middle decorative design display area. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first suspension displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 26(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) is started (see FIG. 26(C)), and the display area moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 26(D)).

The erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 26B continues for a while after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started. is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 26(E), when the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left ends the shift display to move to the active display area 5F, it is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L. When the actions A1 to A3 of the ornamental pattern that is displayed are finished, the action A4 of rising is started, and when the rising movement (action A4) is finished, as shown in FIG. 26F, downward movement is started and scrolling Display starts.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R are completed, the upward action A4 is started, and the upward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 26G, downward movement is started and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C are completed, the upward action A4 is started, and the upward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 26(H), downward movement is started and scroll display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started and the variable display of the small pattern is started, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, The variable display of the decoration symbols stopped and displayed is started in the order of the right decoration design display area 5R and the middle decoration design display area, but the first suspension display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. Until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed, the scroll display of the decorative designs displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is not started.

In other words, after the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and displayed as the active display 002SG103, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity. Also, from the start of the shift display along with the start of the variable display to the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the variation start action is performed. can be recognized.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases proportionally, and fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100% at high speed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 26(F) and 26(G), the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L are set at low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, and after passing through the medium speed shown in FIG. (I) becomes the high speed shown in (J) and (K). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases. Further, as shown in FIGS. 26(G) to 27(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5R are also slowed down immediately after the start of the variable display, and A fade-out display is executed in which the speed becomes faster and the transmittance increases with the acceleration.

(Operation example of variable display in the second production mode)
Next, an operation example of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns is started in the second effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG.

FIG. 28(A) shows a state in which, in the second effect mode, the decorative symbols scrolled in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 002SG101 are displayed in the special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2"). In addition, in the second effect mode, the name of the decorative design information display portion 002SG053 is always hidden, including when the decorative design is stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 28(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in the combination of missing symbols, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed as active. Along with being erased from the area 5F, an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 28(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the variable display of small symbols is started, The decorative design variation start action (see FIG. 23A) is started in the order of the left decorative design display area 5L, the right decorative design display area 5R, and the middle decorative design display area. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first suspension displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 28(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) is started (see FIG. 28(C)), and it moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 28(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 28B continues for a while after the start of the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 28(E), when the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left ends the shift display to move to the active display area 5F, it is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L. After completing the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration pattern, the backward action A4 is started, and when the backward movement to the back side of the display screen (action A4) is completed, as shown in FIG. is started to move and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and the backward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(G), forward movement is started and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and the backward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(H), forward movement is started and scroll display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started and the variable display of the small pattern is started, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, The variable display of the decoration symbols stopped and displayed is started in the order of the right decoration design display area 5R and the middle decoration design display area, but the first suspension display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. The scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is not started until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed.

In other words, after the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and displayed as the active display 002SG103, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity. Also, from the start of the shift display along with the start of the variable display to the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the variation start action is performed. can be recognized.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases proportionally, and fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100% at high speed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 28(F) and 28(G), the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L are set at low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, and after passing through the medium speed shown in FIG. (I) becomes the high speed shown in (J) and (K). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases. Further, as shown in FIGS. 28(G) to 29(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5R are also slowed down immediately after the start of the variable display, and A fade-out display is executed in which the speed becomes faster and the transmittance increases with the acceleration.

In this manner, the scroll display in the second effect mode is designed to move from the back side of the screen toward the front side while increasing the transmittance (transparency) and disappear. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, in the scroll display, the decorative design moves in a curved shape from the back side to the front side, so that the decorative design display area 5L, Between the frame-in display in 5C and 5R and the frame-out display, another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "2") positioned so as to partially overlap on the back side is displayed. A decorative design (for example, decorative design "3") may be visible through the decorative design "2". At this time, while the character of the character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed, the number ("3") of the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and the display of FIG. As shown, after the decoration pattern "2" is erased, the number ("3") of the number display portion 002SG051 of the decoration pattern "3" is displayed.

In addition, another decorative pattern "3" positioned on the back side of the one decorative pattern "2" can be seen through the one decorative pattern "2". As for the other decorative pattern "3", the character of the character display portion 002SG052 is displayed, but the number of the number display portion 002SG051 is not displayed, and after the decorative pattern "2" is erased, the number of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. is displayed, the number ``2'' of one decoration pattern and the number ``3'' of the other decoration pattern do not overlap, making it difficult to understand the number ``2'' of the decoration pattern positioned on the front side. You can prevent it from slipping.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30(A), after the decorative design is displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, it is displayed out of the frame as shown in FIG. 30(C). Until the display speed is increased, the decorative patterns are moved and erased while increasing the transmittance (transparency). Since it is designed to be faded out, it is moved from the back side of the screen toward the front side while increasing the transmittance (transparency) while being faded out according to the display speed. 30A to 30C from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display. Visual recognition of the decorative pattern becomes extremely difficult even on the side.

(Example of operation of variable display as modified example 1)
Next, an operation example of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns is started as Modification 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. In this modification 1, the ornamental patterns are scrolled in a curved manner in the same way as in the second production mode, but are moved from the front side of the screen to the back side, which is the opposite side of the second mode. there is

The flow of FIGS. 31A to 31D is the same as that of FIGS. 28A to 28D, and detailed description thereof is omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 31(E), when the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left ends the shift display to move to the active display area 5F, it is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L. After completing the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration pattern, the backward action A4 is started, and when the forward movement to the front side of the display screen (action A4) is completed, as shown in FIG. is started to move and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R are completed, the forward action A4 is started, and the forward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 31(G), backward movement is started and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C are completed, the forward action A4 is started, and the forward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 31(H), backward movement is started and scroll display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started and the variable display of the small pattern is started, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, The variable display of the decoration symbols stopped and displayed is started in the order of the right decoration design display area 5R and the middle decoration design display area, but the first suspension display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. The scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is not started until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed.

In other words, after the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and displayed as the active display 002SG103, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity. Also, from the start of the shift display along with the start of the variable display to the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the variation start action is performed. can be recognized.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. In proportion to this, the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases, and when the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100%. For example, as shown in FIGS. 31(F) and 31(G), the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L are set at low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, and after passing through the medium speed shown in FIG. (I) becomes the high speed shown in (J) and (K). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases. Further, as shown in FIGS. 31(G) to 32(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5R are also slowed down immediately after the start of the variable display, and A fade-out display is performed in which the speed becomes faster and the transmittance increases as the speed increases.

In this manner, the scroll display as Modification 1 is configured to move from the front side of the screen to the back side while increasing the transmittance (transparency) and erase. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 31(G) and (H), in the scroll display, the decorative design moves in a curved shape from the front side toward the back side. Between the frame-in display in 5C and 5R and the frame-out display, another decoration pattern (for example, decoration pattern "3") positioned so as to partially overlap on the far side with respect to one decoration pattern is displayed. A decorative design (for example, decorative design "2") may be visible through the decorative design "3". At this time, while the character of the character display portion 002SG052 of the decoration pattern "2" is displayed, the number ("2") of the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed).

In addition, the other decorative pattern "2" located on the back side of the one decorative pattern "3" is visible through the one decorative pattern "3", but at this time, it is positioned on the far side. As for the other decorative pattern "2", the character of the character display portion 002SG052 is displayed, but the number of the number display portion 002SG051 is not displayed, and after the decorative pattern "2" is erased, the number of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. is displayed, the number "3" of one decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "2" are not displayed overlapping, and the decorative pattern "3" positioned on the front side becomes difficult to understand. You can prevent it from slipping.

Further, in the present modification 1, after the decorative patterns are frame-in displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and before they are framed-out, they are moved and erased while increasing the transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of the variable display, as described above, the decorative pattern is faded out in proportion to the increase in display speed. However, it is moved from the back side of the screen toward the front side while increasing the transmittance (transparency). 31(F) to 31(H) from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display. Visual recognition of the decorative pattern becomes extremely difficult even on the side.

(Operation example of variable display in the third production mode)
Next, an operation example of each part when variable display of decorative patterns is started in the third effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG.

FIG. 33(A) shows a state in which, in the third effect mode, the decorative designs rotated and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 002SG101 are displayed in the special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2"). Also, the small symbols and the right-handed informing image 002SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols.

Then, as shown in FIG. 33(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in a losing combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed as an active display. Along with being erased from the area 5F, an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 33(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the variable display of the small pattern is started, but the high Since it is in the base state, the decorative symbol variation start action (see FIG. 23A) is not performed. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first suspension displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 33(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) is started (see FIG. 33(C)), and the display area moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 33(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 33B continues for a while after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 33(F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, Rotating display of the decoration pattern displayed on 5R is started. In the high base state, the rotating display of the decorative designs displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is started all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. However, until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is moved to the active display area 5F, the decorative pattern display area 5L, Rotating display of decorative patterns displayed in 5C and 5R does not start.

In other words, the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends), and the rotating display is started after being displayed as the active display 002SG103. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity.

In addition, when the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start rotating, the rotational display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases proportionally, and fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100% at high speed. For example, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are slowed down immediately after the start of variable display, as shown in FIGS. , the speed shown in FIG. 33(H). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases.

As shown in FIG. 34, the rotating display in the third effect mode is such that the decorative pattern is rotated and the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b are displayed repeatedly. , becomes non-transmissive when the rotating display stops. During rotating display, the number display portion 002SG051 on the side of the first surface 5a of the decoration pattern that is in a semi-transparent state is displayed, while the number display portion 002SG051 on the side of the second surface 5b is not displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 34(A), in a translucent state in which the decorative design is rotated at a low speed and the transmittance is the first transmittance, it is displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As for the decorative pattern, the number "326" displayed on the first surface 5a is visible, but the number "437" displayed (to be displayed) on the second surface 5b, which is the back side, is difficult to be visually recognized. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34(B), in a translucent state in which the decorative design is rotated and displayed at medium speed rotation and the transmittance is the second transmittance higher than the first transmittance, the decorative design display area 5L, As for the decorative patterns displayed on 5C and 5R, the number "437" displayed on the second surface 5b is visible, but the number "548" (to be displayed) displayed on the first surface 5a, which is the back side, is visible. ” is considered to be difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34(C), the decorative design is rotated at high speed and displayed, and in the translucent state where the transmittance is the third transmittance higher than the second transmittance, the decorative design display areas 5L and 5C are displayed. , 5R, the number "763" displayed on the first surface 5a is difficult but visible, and the number (to be displayed) displayed on the second surface 5b, which is the back surface "874" is in a state of being difficult to see. It should be noted that both the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b are difficult to see during high-speed rotation display.

In this way, when the decorative pattern is rotated and the front and back sides of the decorative pattern are displayed repeatedly, the decorative pattern is in a semi-transparent state, so the surface of the decorative pattern (for example, the first surface 5a) is displayed. Not only the side but also the back side (for example, the second surface 5b) can be seen through. Since the numbers on the 2nd side 5b) side are not displayed, the numbers on the front side of the decorative pattern and the numbers on the back side are not displayed overlapping, preventing the numbers on the front side from becoming difficult to understand. can. In addition, even when the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed in the high base state, based on the loop light emission control (see FIG. 24 (B)) corresponding to the background pattern, the light emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed. By doing so, the control of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp 9d can be simplified.

(Operation example of variable display in the fourth production mode)
Next, an operation example of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns is started in the fourth effect mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 35(A) shows a state in which, in the fourth effect mode, the decorative symbols scrolled in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 002SG101 are displayed in the special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2"). Also, the small symbols and the right-handed informing image 002SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols. (See FIG. 23(A))

Then, as shown in FIG. 35(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in the combination of missing symbols, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed as the active display. Along with being erased from the area 5F, an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 35(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the variable display of the small pattern is started, but the high Since it is in the base state, the decorative symbol variation start action (see FIG. 23A) is not performed. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first suspension displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 35(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) is started (see FIG. 35(C)), and the display area moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 35(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 35B continues for a while after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 35(F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, The scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed on 5R is started. In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative designs displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is started all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. However, until the shift display in which the first suspended display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, the scroll display of the decorative pattern display area 5L, The scrolling display of the decorative designs displayed in 5C and 5R does not start.

In other words, after the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and displayed as the active display 002SG103, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. In proportion to this, the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases, and when the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100%. For example, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, as shown in FIGS. , the speed shown in FIG. 35(H). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases.

As described above, in the low base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variation start action of the decorative symbol while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and the special figure pending storage display area 5U. The scroll display of decorative patterns is not started until the shift display for switching the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F as the active display 002SG103 is completed.

By doing so, along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and during the shift display, the decorative symbols are displayed in a moving manner. By performing the variable start action to operate in a different mode, the period required for the shift display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is performed in the high base state which is more advantageous than the low base state, the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the high base state can be excited.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 in the effect control process processing of step S76, and the first type of variation pattern designation command ( For example, when variable display is executed based on a non-reach fluctuation pattern designation command) and when variable display is executed based on a second type of fluctuation pattern designation command (e.g., reach fluctuation pattern designation command), Since the common shift display can be performed, the common shift display is performed even when the variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, so the shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the low base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variation start action of the decorative symbol while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and the special figure pending storage display. Until the first suspended display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the area 5U is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F, the scroll display of the decoration pattern is not started, while in the high base state , The effect control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the decorative symbol variation start action is not performed when the pending shift display is performed with the start of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, In the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variation start action of the decorative pattern while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and the first from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U. The scrolling display of decorative patterns may not be started until the first suspended display 002SG101 displayed in the display area is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing so, along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and during the shift display, the decorative symbols are displayed in a moving manner. By performing the variable start action to operate in a different mode, the period required for the shift display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is performed in the high base state which is more advantageous than the low base state, the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the high base state can be excited.

In addition, even in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display of the decoration pattern based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the effect control process processing of step S76. When variable display is executed based on the variation pattern specification command (e.g., non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (e.g., reach variation pattern specification command) Variable display is performed based on Since it is possible to perform a common shift display regardless of when the display is performed, a common shift display is performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, thereby reducing shift display patterns. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, after the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed, the left , right, and center, the scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started in this order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special patterns Displayed in one of the left, right, and middle decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R after the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed along with the start of the variable display. If the scrolling display of the displayed decorative pattern is started, the scrolling display of any of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is started while the shift display is being performed. may

(Example of operation of each part at the time of symbol stop display)
Next, an example of operation of each part when symbols are stopped will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 40. FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the first effect mode (second effect mode). FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols following FIG. FIG. 38, (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols when the number of pending memories is 3 in the first effect mode (second effect mode). 39(A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the fourth effect mode (third effect mode).

(Operation example of symbol stop display in the first effect mode [holding memory number "2 or less"])
First, an operation example of each part when the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display based on the deviation variation pattern when the number of pending memories is 2 or less in the first production mode will be described based on FIGS. 36 and 37. do. It should be noted that the second effect mode is substantially the same as the first effect mode except for the background image, so detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 36(A), in a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at high speed and scroll display is being performed, when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches, first, high speed display is performed. The display speed of the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L that has been displayed is reduced, and fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) is gradually reduced, thereby improving the visibility of the decorative patterns. (See FIG. 36(B)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the left decorative design display area 5L (see FIG. 36(C)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque) and the character display section 002SG052. (See FIG. 36(D)), and then a change stop action (see FIG. 23(B)) for restoring the original size is executed (see FIG. 36(E)). Then, the loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is started in the state of the temporary stop display, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

When the decoration symbols in the left decoration design display area 5L are temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. , a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, and the visibility of the decoration pattern is improved (see FIG. 36(F)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 36(G)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque) and the character display section 002SG052. (See FIG. 36(H)), and then a change stop action (see FIG. 23(B)) for restoring the original size is executed (see FIG. 37(I)). Then, the loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is started in the state of the temporary stop display, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

When the decoration symbols in the right decoration symbol display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. , a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, and the visibility of the decoration pattern is improved (see FIG. 37(K)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 37(K)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character display section 002SG052. (See FIG. 37(L)), and then a change stop action (see FIG. 23(B)) for restoring the original size is executed (see FIG. 37(M)). Then, the loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is started in the state of the temporary stop display, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed, the small symbols are stopped and displayed, and the loop action of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is completed and stopped. The active display 002SG103 is erased (see FIG. 37(M)).

(Example of operation example of symbol stop display in the first effect mode [number of pending memories "3"])
Next, an operation example of each part when the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display when the number of pending memories is 3 in the first effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 38(A) to (G). . Note that the second effect mode is substantially the same as the first effect mode except for the background image, so detailed description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38(A), in a state in which decorative patterns are displayed at high speed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and scroll display is being performed, when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches, first, high speed display is performed. The display speed of the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L that has been displayed is reduced, and fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) is gradually reduced, thereby improving the visibility of the decorative patterns. (See FIG. 38(B)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the left decorative design display area 5L (see FIG. 38(C)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display section 002SG052. The change stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 23B) is not executed. Also, after the temporary stop display, the loop action of the character (see FIG. 23(C)) is executed.

When the decorative design in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the display speed of the decorative design in the right decorative design display area 5R, which has been displayed at high speed, decreases, and the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases. A gradual fade-in display is executed, and the visibility of the decoration pattern is improved (see FIG. 38(D)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 36(E)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display section 002SG052. The change stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 23B) is not executed. Also, after the temporary stop display, the loop action of the character (see FIG. 23(C)) is executed.

When the decorative symbols in the right decorative design display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the display speed of the decorative designs in the middle decorative design display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, decreases, and the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases. A gradual fade-in display is executed, and the visibility of the decoration pattern is improved (see FIG. 38(F)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 38(G)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display area 002SG052. The change stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 23B) is not executed. Also, after the temporary stop display, the loop action of the character (see FIG. 23(C)) is executed.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed, the small symbols are stopped and displayed, and the loop action of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is completed and stopped. The active display 002SG103 is erased (see FIG. 38(G)).

(Operation example of symbol stop display in the fourth production mode)
Next, an operation example of each part when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the variable display in the fourth effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 39(A) and 39(B). Note that the third effect mode is substantially the same as the fourth effect mode except for the background image, so detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 39(A), in a state in which the decorative patterns are scrolled at high speed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches, the decorative patterns are displayed at high speed. The display speed of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R decreases all at once, and a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, thereby improving the visibility of each decorative pattern. is improved (see FIG. 39(B)).

Then, the left, middle and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Here, the transmittance of the decorative pattern is almost 0% (opaque), but the action of stopping the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see FIG. 23B) is not executed. Also, the character's loop action (see FIG. 23C) is not executed after the temporary stop display.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished, the small symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are stopped and displayed, and the active display 002SG103 is erased. (See FIG. 39(C)).

Thus, in the low base state, depending on the number of reserved memories (for example, when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less and the variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed), the decoration pattern is temporarily changed by the change stop action. While adding variation to the movement during the static display improves the interest, the high base makes it difficult to see the decorative patterns due to the short average variable display period and the number of retained memories being 3 in the low base state. In the state, if the variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed regardless of the number of retained memories, the display will be temporarily stopped while maintaining the size without executing the variation stop action, thereby impairing the visibility of the decoration pattern. can be stopped so that it does not

In the present embodiment, the data of animation (moving image) of various motions of decorative patterns are, for example, 1. From the start of the variable display to before the high-speed variable display, 2. high-speed variable display;3. 4. Low speed variable display to variable display stop; It is conceivable to create a video by combining materials for each period, such as a stop pattern. As for the high-speed variable display, as shown in FIGS. 20A2, 20B2, 20C2, and 20D2, the decorative pattern has a high transmittance and is almost transparent. Even if it can be recognized, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize which decorative pattern has passed (represented by arrows in FIGS. 20(A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2)). there). Therefore, even if there is animation data for high-speed variable display for each type of decorative pattern (a type corresponding to which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display is started), it does not make much sense, and the capacity of the ROM 121 is used up. Since it is only pressing, it is preferable to use common data for the animation data of the high-speed variable display regardless of which decoration pattern the high-speed variable display starts from.

(Example of background change operation)
Next, an example of background change operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. 40, (A1) is a diagram showing the first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing the first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram for explaining background changes. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the flow of background change in the first effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the first rendering mode, the background images are a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40A1) representing a view of the town in the daytime from a distance, and a view of the town in the daytime. can be displayed by switching between the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)). The switching of the background image is triggered when a predetermined switching condition (for example, when the SP reach is lost) is established. In this embodiment, the SP reach is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of variable display) in the next variable display after loss.

In the present embodiment, the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are switched and displayed in the first effect mode, but the present invention is limited to this. Alternatively, although not shown, three or more background images including the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A may be selectively displayed by switching. Also, the fulfillment of the switching condition is not limited to the above. It may be established when it is selected by an operation.

In addition, the start timing of the switching display is the start timing of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this, and before the decoration pattern becomes ready state. , any timing in the variable display period.

As shown in FIG. 40B, when switching display from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (or switching display from the first predetermined background image 002SG081A to the first background image 002SG081), The first background image 002SG081 displayed with an opacity of 100% is faded out by gradually increasing the transmittance (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081, while the first background image 002SG081 is hidden with an opacity of 0%. A fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) of the background image 002SG081A is gradually reduced. That is, a cross-fade display is performed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized (fade-out display period A1=fade-in display period B1). . The fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are, for example, about 6 seconds, during which about 210 frames of images are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41(A), the transmittance (transparency) increases with the passage of time from the state where the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, making it difficult to see. (See FIG. 41(B)), the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A displayed in the lower layer of the first background image 002SG081 decreases and gradually becomes visible (see FIG. 41B). 41(C)).

Next, the visibility of the first background image 002SG081 is further reduced, and the visibility of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is increased (see FIGS. 41(D) and (E)), and finally, the first background image 002SG081 is transparent. When the rate becomes 100%, it is erased, while the transmittance of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A becomes 0% and becomes easy to see (see FIG. 41(F)).

In this embodiment, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are synchronized, that is, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 have the same period. is not limited to this, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 may partially overlap, or the fade-in display period B1 may start after the fade-out display period A1 ends. may be started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transmittance always increases at a constant rate in the fade-out display of the background image and the decorative pattern, and the transmittance always decreases at a constant rate in the fade-in display of the background image and the decorative pattern. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance in fade-out display or fade-in display of the background image is not necessarily limited to one that increases or decreases at a constant rate. Alternatively, the transmittance may slowly increase or decrease during the first period and then rapidly increase or decrease during the second period.

Further, in the present embodiment, the mode in which the background image is switched and displayed in one rendering mode (for example, the first rendering mode or the second rendering mode) was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the first background image corresponding to the first rendering mode is switched to the second background image corresponding to the second rendering mode, and the fade-out display period of the first background image and the fade-in display of the second background image are also performed. It is also applicable to those whose periods are synchronized with each other.

(Example of operation of each part in variable display)
Next, an operation example of each part in variable display in each production mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. FIG. FIG. 42 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the first effect mode. FIG. 43 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the second effect mode. FIG. 44 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the third presentation mode and the fourth presentation mode. FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first effect mode, (B) the second effect mode, and (C) the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode. .

(First production mode)
As shown in FIG. 42, in the first effect mode, when the variable display based on the non-reach-out variation pattern PA1-1 is executed with the number of pending memories being "2" or less, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol , The small patterns are variably displayed at high speed, and the variation start action is performed in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. After that, the scroll display starts. In addition, a shift display of the pending display is performed, and after the shift display is completed, the scroll display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 45(A)).

Further, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display to display at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed to fade out display. It will be done. This fade-out display period A21 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

Further, when the switching condition for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is satisfied at the start of the variable display, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 is changed at the start of the variable display. While the fade-out display in which the (transparency) gradually increases is started, the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases to start the fade-in display in which it becomes opaque.

When the stop timing of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative design in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative design in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative design in the middle decorative design display area 5C are gradually decelerated in this order. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, and the display fades in. This fade-in display period B21 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

After that, the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative designs in the middle decorative design display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. Further, when the temporary stop display is displayed, the variable stop action is performed, and the loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative pattern ends and is stopped and displayed. After that, the next variable display can be started after a pattern fixing period (for example, 500 ms).

The fade-out display period A1 in which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is set to be longer than the fade-out display period A21 from the start of the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the high-speed display. (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21).

Further, the fade-in display period B1 in which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is from the start of deceleration of the display speed in the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the temporary stop display. (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21).

Further, when the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed, the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are displayed in white and white based on the loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see FIG. 24(B)). A light emission pattern in the order of blue and yellow is repeatedly executed. Background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(Second production mode)
Next, as shown in FIG. 43, in the second effect mode, when the variable display based on the variable pattern PA1-1 of the non-reach loss with the number of pending memories being "2" or less is executed, the variable display of the special symbol is performed. Along with the start, the small patterns are variably displayed at high speed, and the variation start action is performed in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. After that, the scrolling display is started. In addition, a shift display of the pending display is performed, and after the shift display is completed, the scroll display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 45(B)).

Further, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display to display at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed to fade out display. It will be done. This fade-out display period A22 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

Further, when the switching condition for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is satisfied at the start of the variable display, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 is changed at the start of the variable display. While the fade-out display in which the (transparency) gradually increases is started, the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases to start the fade-in display in which it becomes opaque.

When the stop timing of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative design in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative design in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative design in the middle decorative design display area 5C are gradually decelerated in this order. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, and the display fades in. This fade-in display period B22 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

After that, the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative designs in the middle decorative design display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. Further, when the temporary stop display is displayed, the variable stop action is performed, and the loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is stopped and displayed, the loop action of the ornamental pattern is ended and stopped and displayed. After that, the next variable display can be started after a pattern fixing period (for example, 500 ms).

The fade-out display period A1 in which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is set to be longer than the fade-out display period A22 from the start of the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the high-speed display. (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A22). By doing so, the fade-out display basically gives the impression that the fade-out display disappears abruptly as it is executed in a short period of time. As for the fade-out display that may be executed at a certain time, etc.), it should be noted that the variable display of the decorative pattern is started by executing the fade-out display of the decorative pattern in a shorter period than the fade-out display of the background image. be able to.

Further, the fade-in display period B1 in which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is from the start of deceleration of the display speed in the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the temporary stop display. (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B22). By doing so, the fade-in display gives an impression that the fade-in display is basically performed in a short period of time, so that the variable display of the decorative pattern and the background change occur at the same time (for example, when the variable display is stopped). Note that the fade-in display of the decorative pattern is executed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, and the variable display of the decorative pattern ends. can be made

Further, the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is executed in the second effect mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first effect mode (the fade-out display period A21 <Fade-out display period A22, see FIGS. 45A and 45B). By doing so, in the second production mode, not only is the mode of scroll display of the decorative patterns different from that in the first production mode, but the display becomes high-speed after the start of the scroll display, and the decorative patterns can be visually recognized. Since the fade-out display period A22 until it becomes difficult is lengthened, it is possible to draw attention to the decorative pattern for a long period of time.

In the present embodiment, as the variable display of decorative symbols in the second effect mode, as a special variable display that is different from the first scroll display that moves linearly from top to bottom in the first effect mode, Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the second scroll display is applied in which the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are curved from the back side to the front side, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first scroll display. The special variable display, which is different from the above, is not limited to moving the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in a curved shape from the back side to the front side as described above, as described in the first modification, Various scroll displays are applied, such as a scroll display that moves in a curved shape from the front side to the back side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, or a scroll display that moves in a straight line or curve from the bottom to the top. good too.

Further, when the non-reach loss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first effect mode and when the non-reach loss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second effect mode, fade-out display periods A21 and A22 different. By doing so, the player can predict that the determined variation pattern is the non-reach loss variation pattern PA1-1 because the fade-out display period is the same despite the different production modes. Since it becomes difficult, the amusement of the game is improved.

Also, the fade-out display period A1 in which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed and the fade-out display period A22 from the start of the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the high-speed display are different. That is, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, at the start of the variable display), so that it becomes difficult to understand that the variable display of the decoration pattern has started. can be prevented. Specifically, when the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first background image 002SG081 disappear together, making it difficult to understand that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. By erasing the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern can be made conspicuous.

Further, a fade-in display period B1 in which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed, and a period from the start of deceleration of the display speed in the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the temporary stop display. That is, the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, when the variable display is stopped). It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand that the variable display has started. Specifically, when the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are synchronized, the decoration pattern and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A appear together, making it difficult to understand that the variable display of the decoration pattern has been stopped. Therefore, by making the decorative pattern appear first, the decorative pattern can be made conspicuous.

Further, when the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed, the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are displayed in white and white based on the loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see FIG. 24(B)). A light emission pattern in the order of blue and yellow is repeatedly executed. Background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(3rd and 4th production modes)
Next, as shown in FIG. 44, in the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode, when the variable display based on the shortened non-reach out variation pattern PA1-3 is executed, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol , the small patterns are variably displayed at high speed, and the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all start rotating or scrolling without performing a variation start action. In addition, a shift display of the pending display is performed, and after the shift display is completed, the scroll display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 45(C)).

Further, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display to display at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed to fade out display. It will be done. This fade-out display period A23 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

When the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually decelerated all at once to be displayed at a low speed, and the transmittance is proportional to the decrease in speed. (Transparency) is also lowered and fade-in is displayed. This fade-in display period B23 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

After that, the decoration symbols in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed all at once. In other words, the variable stop action and the loop action such as those in the first production mode and the second production mode are not executed, and the variable display is terminated as it is, and the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed together with the small pattern. After that, the next variable display can be started after a pattern fixing period (for example, 500 ms).

Further, the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first effect mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when the scroll display is executed in the fourth effect mode or the rotating display in the third effect mode. In addition, the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is executed in the second effect mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first effect mode (fade-out). Display period A23<fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22 (see FIGS. 45A to 45C).

Further, when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are controlled based on the light emission control corresponding to the pattern of the high-bass music, and the rhythm, melody, and beat of the high-bass music. It emits light according to the output such as. Also, high bass music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed in the high bass state, the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are controlled based on the light emission control corresponding to the high bass music pattern. , the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of a high-bass song are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. 24B), the light emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow is repeatedly executed based on the loop light emission control (see FIG. 24B) corresponding to the background pattern, and the background BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R. You may make it output. By doing so, the light emission control of the effect control CPU 120 can be simplified.

(Operation example of customer waiting demonstration)
Next, the customer waiting demonstration effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an operation example of the customer waiting demonstration effect. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an operation example when a starting prize is generated during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

As shown in FIG. 46, the "customer waiting demonstration effect" is an effect in which a customer waiting (game standby) state is notified. , is an effect started by the effect control CPU 120 when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, although not shown, after the initial motion of the movable bodies 32A and 32B is executed in the initial motion control process when the power is turned on, the menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed. is displayed (see FIG. 46(A)). Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed without the variable display being performed after the power is turned on, the menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 disappears, and the customer waiting demonstration image 002SG400 is displayed. It is displayed, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is started (see FIG. 46(B)).

In the customer waiting demo production, after a moving image introducing a plurality of friendly characters (which may include enemy character images) appearing in various productions and the contents of the content in order is displayed (Fig. 46(B)- (E)), the movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position while the image of the group of allied characters is displayed (see FIG. 46(F)), and after a predetermined time elapses, it rises to the origin position. (See FIGS. 46(G) to (H)), the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the normal state is displayed as the background image, and the process ends (see FIG. 46(I)). When the customer waiting demonstration effect ends, a menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 46(J)).

When a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without the variable display being performed after the customer waiting demonstration effect is finished, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started again. Even after that, as long as the waiting state continues, the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed periodically. The customer waiting demonstration effect may be repeatedly executed a plurality of times in the standby state, or may not be executed after being executed a predetermined number of times. Also, the production mode of the customer waiting demonstration production as the waiting production is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

Further, during the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIGS. 46(B) to 46(H)), the small symbols are continuously stopped and displayed in the display area 5S, while the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, Decorative patterns are not displayed on 5R. In this way, the small symbols are displayed even when the decoration symbols are not displayed, so that the player can be made to recognize that the variable display is in a stopped state.

An operation example in the case where a starting prize is generated while such a customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 47(A), when the first start winning occurs (the conditions for starting the variable display are met) while the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 47(B) , variable display of small symbols is started in the display area 5S in a state where the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(C), the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. . In addition, the special figure reservation storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F are displayed, and the first reservation display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special figure reservation storage display area 5U. Then, the movement display (shift display) from the special figure reservation storage display area 5U of the first reservation display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is started, and the variation start action of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R is left, Starts in order from right to middle.

As shown in FIG. 47(D), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F ends, as shown in FIG. The symbols move upward in order, the fluctuation start action ends, and the scroll display starts (see FIG. 47(F)).

In this way, when the starting winning occurs while the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed, the variable display of the small patterns is started before the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden, and then the customer waiting is performed. After the demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden and switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first effect mode), the decoration pattern is displayed. Scroll display is started.

That is, if the scrolling display of decorative patterns is started while the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is being displayed, it is difficult for the player to understand that the scrolling display has started with the occurrence of the first start winning. While starting the variable display of, after switching display from the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081, the scroll display is started after the shift display of the pending display is finished. It is possible to make the player recognize that the scroll display has started with the occurrence of the first start winning. On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is switched to the first background image 002SG081 and the scroll display is started after the shift display ends, the time lag from the occurrence of the first start winning to the start of the scroll display is large. Therefore, the variable display of the small symbols is started before the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden, so that the display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols can be ensured.

Also, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 46A, 46I, and 46J, after the customer waiting demonstration effect is completed, decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the case of the first effect mode or the second effect mode when the state is reached, the loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) of the decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed is executed, and the main lamp 9a and the frame Loop light emission control (see FIG. 24B) is executed for the lamp 9b and the movable lamp 9d. On the other hand, in the case of the third effect mode or the fourth effect mode, the loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) of the ornamental pattern that is stopped and displayed is not executed, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp are not executed. In 9d, light emission control is executed in accordance with the rhythm, melody, time signature, etc. of the high bass music.

In this way, in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative pattern is repeatedly executed in a cycle shorter than that of the loop light emission control. That is, while it is possible to promote the resumption of the game, in the high base state, since neither the loop action of the decorative pattern nor the loop light emission control is executed, the production during the high base (third production mode and fourth production mode) can be brought to your attention that is being executed. It is not necessary to execute the loop action of the decoration design in the first production mode or the second production mode, or the loop action of the decoration design may be executed in the third production mode or the fourth production mode.

In addition, the loop action of the decoration pattern is not executed while the variable display is stopped in the high base state. Therefore, there is no need to appeal to the player to take a seat just because the pachinko game machine 1 is in a non-operating state, which is not variably displayed. Suppressed.

In addition, although the "loop action" of the present embodiment is focused on "movement", for example, the position of the decorative pattern changes, shakes, or deforms. However, animation or the like may be performed in which the highlight is moved and displayed in the decoration pattern while it is still displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the third background image 002SG083, the fourth background image 002SG084, character images, and other effect images (not shown) displayed as background images in the high-bass state are displayed in accordance with the high-bass music. Alternatively, the background image may be displayed as an animation such that the background image is displayed moving at a predetermined moving speed. In this case, while the variable display is stopped in the high base state as described above, although the loop action of the ornamental pattern is not executed, the animation display of the third background image 002SG083 and the fourth background image 002SG084 is continued. can be

(Example of operation of pseudo consecutive notice)
Next, an example of the operation of the pseudo consecutive notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the flow of pseudo consecutive notices. FIG. 49 shows (A) a diagram showing an example of pseudo-run count display and symbol colors, (B) a diagram showing pseudo-run count display and symbol color types, and (C) a pseudo-run count display color determination table. FIG. 10 shows.

As shown in FIG. 48, the "pseudo recurring notice" indicates that the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is started. This is an effect that prompts whether or not to resume, that is, whether or not one variable display is simulated as multiple variable displays.

As shown in FIG. 49(A), the pseudo-continuous notice includes a "pseudo-continuous one-time pattern" in which the total number of times of variable display is two, the first time variable display and one re-variable display, and the first time variable display and two times. It is possible to execute a "pseudo consecutive 2 times pattern" in which the total number of times of variable display is 3 times with re-variable display, and when the variation pattern of super reach (pseudo consecutive 1 time) is selected The "pseudo-run 1-time pattern" is executed, and when the super reach (pseudo-run 2-time) variation pattern is selected, the "pseudo-run 2-time pattern" is executed. Incidentally, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher in the "pseudo-run 2-time pattern" than in the "pseudo-run 1-time pattern".

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48(A), when the variable display in which the pseudo consecutive notice is executed is started, the left decoration symbol display area A decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and then a decorative pattern having the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R to enter a ready-to-win state. Afterwards (see FIG. 48(B)), the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern with the characters "NEXT!" ).

After that, in the case of the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous notice is executed, the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 48(D)), and the first variable display is performed again. is started, that is, a pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 of "x2" indicating that the second variable display is started is displayed above the center decoration symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 48(F)). , the left decorative design display area 5L, the middle decorative design display area 5C, and the right decorative design display area 5R, the variable display of decorative designs is resumed (see FIG. 48(G)). In addition, in the case of variable display in which the pseudo-continuous notice is not executed, the pseudo-continuous symbol passes through the stop position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, and one of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C. A decorative pattern with a large number is displayed in a stopped state, and a variable display result of failure is displayed (see FIG. 48(E)).

In FIG. 48(G), after the variable display of decorative patterns is resumed, in the case of the pseudo-continuous notice of "pseudo-continuous one-time pattern", after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display is performed in the left decorative design display area 5L. 48(L)), and a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R. 48(M)), and develops into SP reach performance.

In addition, after the variable display of decorative symbols is resumed in FIG. 48(G), in the case of the pseudo-continuous notice of "pseudo-continuous two-time pattern", the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L, and then. , The decorative pattern with the same number as the one temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R. The pseudo-continuous decoration pattern in which is displayed is decelerated and displayed before the stop position in the center decoration design display area 5C (see FIG. 48(H)).

Next, the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the middle decoration design display area 5C (see FIG. 48(I)), and the second re-variable display is started, that is, the third variable display is started. After the pseudo run number display 002SG213 of "x3" indicating that the display is started is displayed above the middle decoration design display area 5C (see FIG. 48(J)), the left decoration design display area 5L and the middle decoration are displayed. The variable display of the decoration design is restarted in the design display area 5C and the right decoration design display area 5R (see FIG. 48(K)).

After that, the decorative design that has been variably displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 48(L)), and the decoration with the same number as the decorative design temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L. The symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R to enter the ready-to-win state (see FIG. 48(M)), and the SP ready-to-win effect is developed.

In addition, the pseudo-continuous notice is an introductory part as a period to instigate whether or not the variable display will be resumed (Fig. 48 (A) to (C), (G), (J), (K), (L) reference), and a result notification part (see FIGS. 48(D) to (F), (H), (I), and (M)) as a period for notifying the result of whether or not the variable display has been restarted. .

As shown in FIG. 49B1, in the pseudo continuous notice, the variable display is resumed when the variable display is resumed after the pseudo continuous decoration symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration symbol display area 5C. A pseudo-run count display is displayed that allows you to specify the number of times you have played. Specifically, the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 (FIGS. 48(F) and (G)) of "×2" indicates that the first re-variable display is started, that is, the second variable display is started. ), or a pseudo consecutive number display 002SG213 (see FIGS. 48(J) and 48(K)) that indicates that the second re-variable display is started, that is, that the third variable display is started. ) is displayed.

The pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 shown in FIG. 49B1 and the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG213 shown in FIG. 49B2 are sometimes displayed in blue and sometimes in red. In addition, as described in FIG. 19, the even-numbered normal symbols are "blue", and the odd-numbered odd-numbered symbols are "red". The display color of such a pseudo-repeated number display is determined using the pseudo-repeated number display color determination table shown in FIG. be.

Specifically, in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280, when the display color of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 is determined, when the variable display result is "probable variable big hit", the symbol color of the decoration pattern determined in step 002SGS276 is used. A display color that is not the same color (for example, the symbol color is blue and the pseudo-running number display color is red/the symbol color is red and the pseudo-running number display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 10%, and is determined in step 002 SGS276. A display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorated pattern (for example, the pattern color and the pseudo-running number display color are blue/the pattern color and the pseudo-running number display color are red) is determined at a rate of 90%.

Further, when the variable display result is "unprobable variable jackpot", a display color that is not the same color as the decorative pattern color determined in step 002 SGS276 (for example, the pattern color is blue and the pseudo consecutive number display color is blue). Red/symbol color is red, pseudo-running number display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 30%, and a display color that is the same as the symbol color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002 SGS276 (for example, symbol color and pseudo Blue for the consecutive number display color/red for the pattern color and pseudo consecutive number display color) is determined at a rate of 70%.

Further, when the variable display result is "miss", a display color that is not the same color as the decorative pattern color determined in step 002 SGS276 (for example, the pattern color is blue and the pseudo-running number display color is red/ The symbol color is red and the pseudo-run number display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 90%, and the display color (for example, the symbol color and the pseudo-run number) is the same color as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276. The display color is blue/the symbol color and the pseudo-run number display color are red) is determined at a rate of 10%.

As described above, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the display colors of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the pseudo consecutive number display are the first combination of non-identical colors, and the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the pseudo consecutive number display are the first combination. There is a case where the display color is the second combination of the same color, and the case where the variable display is resumed with the second combination is more favorable than the case where the variable display is resumed with the first combination in the pseudo-continuous notice. The ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is high.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a big hit, when the normal symbol (blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002 SGS276, the number of pseudo-runs of the first pseudo-run and the second pseudo-run is displayed as follows. The rate of determination of the same color blue is higher than the rate of determination of the non-same color red. On the other hand, when the variable display result is out, when the normal symbol (blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the same color is used as the pseudo-run number display for the first and second pseudo-runs. A blue color is determined less frequently than the non-identical color red.

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, when the probability variable symbol (red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002 SGS276, the same color is used as the pseudo-run number display for the first pseudo-run and the second pseudo-run. A red color is determined more frequently than a non-identical blue color. On the other hand, when the variable display result is lost, when the probability variable symbol (red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002 SGS 276, the same color is displayed as the number of pseudo-runs for the first and second pseudo-runs. A red color is determined less frequently than a non-identical blue color.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a big hit, when the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276 (see FIG. 49(B1)), the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 is changed to " For the first pseudo run of "x2", the second combination ("x2", blue) in which the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo run number display 002SG212 and the display color are the same type of blue are displayed. This is determined at a higher rate than the first combination ("x2", red) in which the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo-running number display 002SG212 are of the same type, but the display color is red. .

In addition, for the second pseudo-run where the pseudo-run number display 002SG213 is "x3", the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo-run number display 002SG212 are different, but the display color is the same kind of blue. The 3 combination ("x3", blue) is better than the 4th combination ("x3", red) in which the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG213 are red. Determined by a high percentage.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is a failure, when the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the number of pseudo-runs of the first and second pseudo-runs is displayed. , the rate at which blue, which is the same color, is determined is lower than the rate at which red, which is the non-same color, is determined.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit, when the probability variable symbol ("3", red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the pseudo-run number display 002SG212 becomes "x2" for the first pseudo-run. , the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 are different, but the third combination ("x2", red), which is the same kind of display color and is red, is displayed temporarily stopped. It is determined at a higher rate than the fourth combination ("x2", blue) in which the display color is different from the numbers of the decorative symbols and the number of pseudo-running display 002SG212.

In addition, for the second pseudo-run where the pseudo-run number display 002SG213 is "x3", the second combination ("x 3", red) is better than the first combination ("x3", blue) in which the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 are the same type, but the display color is different blue. Determined by a high percentage.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is lost, when the normal symbol ("3", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002 SGS276, the number of pseudo-runs of the first and second pseudo-runs is displayed. , the rate at which blue, which is the same color, is determined is lower than the rate at which red, which is the non-same color, is determined.

As described above, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the numbers of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 and 002SG213 are of the same type, and the display colors of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive number display are different. There are cases where it is the first combination, and cases where both the decoration symbol displayed temporarily and the number and display color of the pseudo-running number are the same type, and the first combination is the first combination in the pseudo-running notice. Whether or not the pseudo continuous notice is executed by increasing the ratio of control to the jackpot game state when the variable display is restarted with the second combination than when the variable display is restarted with the second combination. In addition, when executed, it is possible to draw attention to the combination of numbers and colors of the decorative symbols displayed temporarily and the numbers and colors of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Further, in the pseudo-run announcement, the ratio of control to the big win game state is higher when the super reach variation pattern of two pseudo-runs is determined as the variation pattern than when the super reach variation pattern of one pseudo-run is determined. , The decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the second pseudo-run are more likely to be displayed in the second pseudo-run than when both the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the first pseudo-run and the number and display color of the pseudo-run number display are the same second combination. and the second combination of the same type in both the number and the display color of the number of pseudo-runs, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher. It is possible to attract attention by the number of times displayed and the display color.

Also, in the second pseudo run, if both the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and the number and display color of the pseudo run number display are the same type of second combination, the decorative design becomes a variable pattern, so it is simulated as a variation pattern. The ratio of control to the probability variable big win game state may be higher when the super reach variation pattern of two pseudo-reams is determined than when the super reach variation pattern of one ream is determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display color of the pseudo consecutive number display is exemplified by determining one of a plurality of colors according to the number of the ornamental symbol displayed temporarily, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display color of the display of the number of pseudo-runs is not limited, and may be a display color that is predetermined for each number of pseudo-runs.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212, 002SG213, the form of "x2" or "x3" was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Display of the number of repetitions can be changed in various ways as long as the number of pseudo repetitions can be specified. It can be displayed in various forms such as.

In the present embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the number of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the number of the pseudo consecutive number display are of the same type and the same color only when the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is displayed. is a normal symbol (“2”, blue) and the number of pseudo-runs is indicated by 002SG212 (“x2”, blue) There were two patterns in the case of the number of times display 002SG213 (x 3, red), but in addition to the above, the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed is the normal pattern ("4", green), and the pseudo consecutive number display (x 4) , green) may be used, and the number color of the decoration pattern, the number color of the number of pseudo-runs, and the number of pseudo-runs can be changed variously.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive notice, even if the number of the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and displayed is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number of the pseudo consecutive number display, the pseudo consecutive notice It is decided whether or not the consecutive number display color should be the same color as the number of the decoration symbol displayed temporarily. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the numbers of the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed are numbers other than "2" and "3" corresponding to the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number display. In some cases, a predetermined display color (for example, white) may be uniformly determined without determining the pseudo-running number display color.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the decorative symbols of the same number as the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L are temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R to enter the reach state. After that, the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern with the characters "NEXT!" The present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the pseudo-continuous pattern can be changed in various ways. In addition, after a decorative design with a different number from the decorative design temporarily displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R, the left decorative design display area 5L or the right decorative design display area 5R. The re-variable display may be started by temporarily stopping and displaying the decoration pattern or the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern temporarily stopped at the stop position in the middle decoration design display area 5C.

Incidentally, the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the pseudo consecutive notice may not necessarily be the same as the fixed decoration symbols stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display. Further, for example, after the normal symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first pseudo-run, the probability variable symbols, that is, different symbols from the first pseudo-run may be temporarily stopped and displayed in the second pseudo-run. Also, the number of pseudo-runs is not limited to the above two times, and three or more pseudo-runs (re-variable display) may be executed.

(Operation example of reach production)
Next, an operation example of the ready-to-win effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect following FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an operation example of each part in the ready-to-win effect. In the following, an operation example of the ready-to-win effect in the first effect mode will be explained, but the same ready-to-win effect may be executed in the second to fourth effect modes as well.

As shown in FIG. 50(A), when the variable display based on the normal reach fluctuation pattern or the super reach fluctuation pattern is started, at the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the variable display was started, the left decoration symbol display area 5L The decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 50(B)), and then the decorative design with the same number as the decorative design temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R. Then, the mode of variable display of the decoration pattern becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode, and the ready-to-win effect is started (see FIG. 50(C)). At this time, decoration designs are displayed at high speed in the middle decoration design display area 5C. Also, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B are lit based on the aforementioned loop light emission control (see FIG. 24(B)).

In FIGS. 50(B) and (C), the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order, but the present invention is not limited to this. , and the left and right decorative design display areas 5L and 5R may be temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 50(D), when the ready-to-win effect is started, the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decoration design display area 5L and the right decoration design display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, and the middle decoration design is displayed. A reach line effect display 002SG250 as a reach line suggesting image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the ornamental pattern (substantially transparent and invisible) being variably displayed in the area 5C, and the reach line suggesting effect is started. The reach line effect display 002SG250 is a display emphasizing the reach line connecting the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R, and the middle decorative design is displayed on the reach line. This is a display suggesting that the decoration pattern in the area 5C will be stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 50(D), the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are enlarged only for the characters in the character display section 002SG052 as in the above-described fluctuation stop action. Instead of being displayed, the number display portion 002SG051, character display portion 002SG052, information display portion 002SG053, and base display portion 002SG054 forming decorative patterns are all enlarged and displayed at the same ratio. In this manner, by providing an enlarged display that is different in mode from when the variable display is stopped, it is possible to make the user recognize that the variable display is not stopped but in the ready-to-reach mode.

The reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed in a small size so as to be superimposed on the decorative pattern being variably displayed near the stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C when the ready-to-reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 50(D). 50(E)), and after reaching the left and right sides of the display screen (see FIG. 50E) 50 (F)), after the aspect changes so that the vertical dimension expands (see FIG. 50 (G)), the transmittance (transparency) gradually increases due to fade-out display (see FIG. 50 (H)), and finally 51(I)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 50(F), in the reach line suggestive effect, it is possible to change (enlarge) the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, and to change the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250. When changing, turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged around (near) the display screen of the image display device 5 makes the surroundings of the display screen darker than usual. , the reach line effect display 002SG250 can be made more conspicuous.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50(D), after the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, the left decorative design is moved to the left and the right decorative design is displayed. The decorative patterns start moving rightward, that is, in a direction away from each other (see FIG. 50(E)). In addition, while being separated from each other, they are rotated by a predetermined angle around the rotation axis facing the vertical direction (see FIG. 50(F)), and when they reach the most separated position on the left and right of the display screen, the movement and rotation display are completed. 50(G)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 50(H), the left and right decorative patterns displayed at the left and right separated positions while being enlarged are reduced and rotated from the separated positions toward the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. moved and restored to its normal viewing position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 51(I), when the decorative patterns are restored in the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased and becomes non-display, the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is variably displayed. The scroll display speed gradually decreases, and the transparency (transparency) gradually decreases to fade-in the decorative patterns (see FIGS. 51(J) to (K)). Finally, the decorative patterns become transparent. The rate becomes 0% (opaque), and scroll display is performed at a low speed (see FIG. 51(L)).

As shown in FIG. 52, when executing the reach line suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 enlarges and enlarges the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R. , and a separation display in which the decorative pattern is separated after the enlarged display is executed, and the separation display is started and ended before the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display. Since the second period te1 until the game is played is longer (td1<te1), the player can be made to recognize the decoration pattern forming the ready-to-win state.

In addition, the period td2 from the start of the enlarged display to the end of the enlarged display is longer than the period tf1 until the enlarged decorative pattern is restored to the original figure (td2 < tf1 ), while allowing the player to recognize the decoration pattern forming the ready-to-win state, it can be quickly reduced in size when restored to prepare for the next performance.

In addition, when the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, attention is paid to which decorative design is stopped and displayed in the middle decorative design display area 5C. Since the left and right dimensions are narrowed and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative patterns, the left and right decorative patterns are moved away from each other. It is possible to make the user pay attention to the decorative design in the middle decorative design display area 5C.

In addition, the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been exemplified in a form displayed immediately after the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decoration design display area 5L and the right decoration design display area 5R and the reach state is reached. It is not limited to this, and may be displayed at the same time as the ready-to-reach mode.

Also, the movable body lamp 9d displays the decorative patterns temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R, and after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed. Although the form in which the lights are turned off when changing has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lights may be turned off simultaneously with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250. Further, the luminance is not limited to being extinguished, and the luminance may be lowered more than when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable bodies 32A and 32B provided above and below the image display device 5 are provided with built-in specific light emitting means that are turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of board-side lamps including an attacker lamp 9c provided on the game board, and a main lamp 9a provided on the game machine frame 3 , frame lamps 9b, etc., and particularly if the lamps are provided near the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is made conspicuous by turning off the lamps. be able to.

In addition, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the transmittance (transparency) of the decoration pattern being displayed in the middle decoration design display area 5C is set higher than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed. The second transmittance F2 with a low transmittance (transparency) is set to the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration design display area 5C, and is displayed variably in the center decoration design display area 5C. The decorative pattern inside does not interfere with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decoration design display area 5C, the transmittance of the decoration design in the middle decoration design display area 5C gradually decreases (fade-in display). However, the present invention is not limited to this. After the display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration design display area 5C, the transmittance may change to the second transmittance F2 after a predetermined time has passed.

(Operation example of SP reach production)
Next, an operation example of the SP ready-to-win effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP ready-to-win effect. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP ready-to-win effect following FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an operation example of each part in the SP ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIG. 53(A), in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern when it is controlled to the low base state, after becoming the reach mode described in FIG. 50(C), the type of SP reach production The reach title display 002SG070 is displayed to notify the reach title, and the SP reach performance as a notification effect to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) ) is started (see FIGS. 53B and 53C). In the SP reach effect, a fifth background image 002SG085 representing the universe corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed, which is different from the first background image 002SG081 and the second background image 002SG082 which are normal background images. In addition, the fifth background image 002SG085 may be an image having a different aspect according to the type of the SP ready-to-win effect.

Next, during the period from the timing when the battle is settled until the predetermined operation validity period elapses, an operation promotion display 002SG071 consisting of characters "Press!!" prompting the operation of the push button 31B and a button display imitating the push button 31B. 002SG072 is displayed (see FIG. 53(D)).

Then, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation effective period, or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period elapses, the operation prompting display 002SG071 and the button display 002SG072 are hidden, and the process ends. . When the result of the variable display is a big hit, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined luminescent color while the movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect display 002SG073 that emphasizes the movable body 32B is displayed. At the same time, a predetermined production effect sound is output, and it is informed that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state (see FIG. 53(E)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image. , a combination of jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 53(F)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 53(G), with the end of the SP ready-to-win effect, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. A combination of jackpot confirmation symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, a character 002SG074 appears with a lit ignition device in hand, and after displaying a frame-in from the lower right side of the display screen, it runs toward the left and temporarily appears in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The number display portions 002SG051 of the decorative symbols that are stopped are lit (see FIG. 53(H)).

As shown in FIG. 55(A), a specific image 002SG075 showing a flame displayed by being ignited at a predetermined position on the periphery of the number display portion 002SG051 of each pattern is shown in FIGS. 55(B) to 55(D). , it increases along the periphery of the number display portion 002SG051 and is displayed near the number of the number display portion 002SG051. Further, as for the flame image forming the specific image 002SG075, as shown in the middle enlarged view of FIG. By doing so, the movement is displayed as if the flame is swaying. Finally, the specific image 002SG075 is hidden, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped, and the big hit display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 53(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the effect position, and after the result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. (See FIG. 53(K)) In the notification effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP ready-to-win effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of confirmed symbols that are not a big hit combination (for example, "232 ”) is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 53(L)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 53(M), with the end of the notification effect (SP ready-to-win effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. is displayed, a combination of deviated confirmed symbols (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the small symbols and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the result of the display of the deviation is derived and displayed (see FIG. 53(N)).

In addition, in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern in the case of being controlled to the high base state, after the notification effect of notifying that it is controlled to the big hit game state is performed (see FIG. 53 (E)), When the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image in the notification effect after the result display (not shown) indicating that the character has won the battle with the enemy character is displayed. At the same time, a combination of big hit confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 54(O)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 54(P), with the end of the notification effect (SP ready-to-win effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed to display the fourth background image 002SG084. is displayed, the combination of the big hit confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without displaying the specific image 002SG075, and the big hit display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 54(Q)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the effect position, and after the result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. (See FIG. 53(K)) In the notification effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP ready-to-win effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of confirmed symbols that are not a big hit combination (for example, "232 ”) is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 54(R)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 54(S), with the end of the notification effect (SP ready-to-win effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. is displayed, a combination of deviated confirmed symbols (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped and displayed without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the result of the display of the deviation is derived and displayed (see FIG. 54(T)).

In this way, in the low base state, the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in operation on the number display portion 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmed decoration pattern displayed after the end of the notification effect. (See FIGS. 53(H) and (I)), in the high base state in which the average variable display period is short, the specific image 002SG075 is not displayed in operation on the decorative design number display portion 002SG051 displayed after the end of the notification effect. (see FIG. 54(S)), it is possible to give a sense of speed to the variable display.

In the present embodiment, in the low base state, a specific image 002SG075 showing flames is displayed in close proximity to the numerical display portion 002SG051 of the combination of the jackpot confirmed decorative symbols displayed after the end of the SP ready-to-win effect. Although the form was exemplified, the specific image is not limited to the specific image 002SG075 showing flames as described above, and images other than flames (for example, light, water, effects, characters, items, etc.) may be applied. good.

In addition, the movement display of the specific image may include not only the manner in which the flames fluctuate as described above, but also the specific image rotating around the number display portion 002SG051, or changing in form or display color. .

Further, in the present embodiment, the character 002SG074 acts on each of the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, so that the specific image 002SG075 is displayed around the number display portion 002SG051. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific image is displayed without the character 002SG074 acting on the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. may be displayed.

(Modification 2)
Next, Modification 2 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 56, (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing Modification 2 of the present invention.

In the variable stop action in the above embodiment, the characters displayed in the character display section 002SG052 are enlarged and displayed when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after passing through the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the decorative patterns are moved in the opposite direction and restored to the stopped positions. may be moved and displayed.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 56A1 and 56A2, the decorative pattern is displayed at a reduced speed toward the stop position, and gradually moves downward in the direction of the white arrow until it reaches the stop position. When the temporary stop display is made (see FIG. 56A3), the pedestal display portion 002SG054 and the information display portion 002SG053 remain temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, and the number display portion 002SG051 and the character display portion 002SG052 pass through the stop position. Then, the downward movement display is continued.

At this time, the movement distance L2 from when the number display portion 002SG051 passes the stop position until the temporary stop display is displayed is the movement distance from when the character display portion 002SG052 passes the stop position until the temporary stop display is displayed. It is larger than L1 (L1<L2).

After that, the number display portion 002SG051 and the character display portion 002SG052 that have passed the stop position move upward, and while the character display portion 002SG052 is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position (see FIG. 56A5), the character display portion 002SG052 The display unit 002SG052 passes the stop position again and moves upward (see FIG. 56(A6)). In this way, the movement distance L3 from when the number display portion 002SG051 passes the stop position upward until the temporary stop display is displayed is (L3<L2). Finally, the number display portion 002SG051 moves downward and is temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 56(A7)).

Note that the action in which only the character display portion 002SG052 passes through the stop position and moves upward in FIG. It can be made to recognize the difference from the start action.

In this way, when the decorative pattern reaches the stop position, it is not temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing of arrival, but after at least a part of the plurality of seed display parts forming the decorative pattern has passed the stop position, the reverse display is performed. By moving to the side and returning to the stop position, it is possible to make it look as if a part of the display has passed by with momentum, so it can be made more realistic.

In addition, while the first display unit (for example, the base display unit 002SG054 and the information display unit 002SG053) among the plurality of display units is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, the other second display unit (for example, the number display unit 002SG051 and By causing the character display portion 002SG052) to pass through the stop position, movement can be given while the stop position is not ambiguous. Furthermore, by making the movement distances of the number display portion 002SG051 on one side and the character display portion 002SG052 on the other side of the second display portion different, it is possible to display the action according to the size and appearance of the display portion. .

(Modification 3)
Next, Modification 3 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 57(A) to (D) are diagrams showing a modification 3 of the present invention.

In the above-described embodiment, in the first effect mode, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as shown in FIG. Although the decorative symbols before and after the stopped decorative pattern are not temporarily stopped and displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. Thus, when one of the decorative patterns (for example, decorative pattern "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, one of the preceding and following decorative patterns (for example, decorative pattern "2" and decorative pattern "4") The part may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

Then, when one of the variablely displayed decorative symbols (for example, the decorative symbol "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position (see FIGS. 57A and 57B), the variation stop action is performed. In the case (see FIGS. 57C and 57D), the object to be subjected to the fluctuation stop action is the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, and is temporarily stopped and displayed in an area other than the stop position. It is preferable not to execute the fluctuation stop action for the decoration pattern.

By doing so, when a winning combination, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the result of the losing display, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, temporary stop display is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By temporarily enlarging and displaying the displayed decorative patterns, the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be made to attract the player's attention, and a combination that is originally meaningless to the player is derived. Even when the decoration pattern is displayed, the player's line of sight can be kept on the area where the decoration pattern is displayed. Further, when enlarging and displaying the temporarily stopped decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the decorative patterns that are not positioned in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are not displayed in an enlarged manner. It is possible to concentrate on the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and reduce the load of display control.

In addition, since the loop light emission control is continuously performed even when the decorative patterns to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged and displayed (see FIGS. 42 and 43), the main lamp 9a and the frame lamp 9b, the control of the movable lamp 9d can be simplified. Incidentally, when a plurality of effective stop positions are set, the fluctuation stop action may be executed for the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed at each effective stop position.

(Other modifications)
Further, after the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-win mode, when it develops into the SP ready-to-win effect, the left and right decorative patterns forming the ready-to-win mode move to the front side of the display screen in a first predetermined operation and to the back of the display screen. Only the number display part 002SG051 may be moved to a predetermined position (for example, upper left and right sides of the display screen) on the display screen where the SP reach effect is displayed by a specific action including a second predetermined action of moving to the side. In this case, it is preferable that the moving speed of the decorative pattern is faster in the second predetermined motion than in the first predetermined motion.

In addition, when the variable display is stopped, the decorative patterns are the number display portion 002SG051 and the information display portion 002SG053. The information display unit 002SG053 may also be made capable of executing the information display variation start action in conjunction with the number variation start action of the number display unit 002SG051. In this case, the information display variation start action may be completed and the information display section 002SG053 may be erased before the number variation start action is completed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute either the first effect mode or the second effect mode in the low base state, the third effect mode in the low probability high base state, and the fourth effect in the high probability high base state Although the form in which the mode can be executed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute three or more types of production modes in the low base state, or three or more types of effects in the high base state. The mode may be made executable.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the first effect mode, the first scroll display in the vertical direction, in the second effect mode, the second scroll display curving and moving from the back side to the front side, in the third effect mode, the rotating display, and the fourth scroll display. Although the form in which the third scrolling display in the vertical direction is executed in the production mode has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the form of variable display of decorative patterns in each production mode can be changed in various ways. .

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, the form in which the jackpot game state is applied is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous state is a time-saving state or a variable probability state. , Small hit game state and the like may be applied.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal state and the low probability low base state, the special state with a short average variable display period and the low probability high base state and high probability low base state and the variable display is likely to be executed than the normal state However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be a low-probability state, and the special state may be a high-probability state.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the normal state (low base state), the time saving state (low probability high base state), the probability variable state (high probability high base state) are provided as the game state, and the time saving state or probability change at the end of the big hit game Although the form in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to the state is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a part of the case where the variable display result is wrong in the low probability state. Therefore, it is possible to control the time saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, or it is advantageous in a low probability state after the end of the advantageous state or after clearing the RAM (cold start of the pachinko game machine 1) The present invention may be applied to a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a time-saving state based on the execution of a predetermined number of variable displays without being controlled by the state. In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after the big hit game is the time-saving state A, and in a low-probability state after the end of the advantageous state or after clearing the RAM (cold start of the pachinko game machine 1), it is predetermined without being controlled to the advantageous state. The time saving state controlled based on the number of times the variable display is performed is the time saving state B, a part of the case where the variable display result is lost in the low probability state, and the variable display result is displayed as a specific result. The time saving state controlled based on what is done should be the time saving state C.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine that can be controlled in the time-saving state C, a plurality of types of variable display results are provided for winning the time-saving state C, and depending on the type of variable display result when winning the time-saving state C You may vary the variable display frequency|count by which time saving control is performed.

[Example]
Further, a mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment.

[Mode 1]
The game machine of form 1-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means is
in the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
Before the display means switches the display from the background display to the demonstration display, the luminance data table for background display is switched to the luminance data table for demonstration display and the light emitting means is controlled (FIGS. 75 and 76). , Figures 95, 96, 97, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by adopting a step-by-step design in which the control of the light-emitting means is switched first and then the demonstration display is started, it is possible to draw attention to the change rather than starting all at once. , the start of the demonstration display can be noticed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 2]
The game machine of form 2-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state is finished;
before the display means switches the display from the normal background display to the demonstration display, switching from the luminance data table for normal background display to the luminance data table for demonstration display to control the light emitting means;
Before the display means switches the display from the special state background display to the demonstration display, the luminance data table for special state background display is switched to the luminance data table for demonstration display, and the light emitting means is controlled (FIG. 75, 76, 95, 96, 97, 99, 100, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the step-by-step design, in which the control of the light-emitting means is switched first, and then the display of the demonstration display is started, draws attention to the change rather than starting all at once. can be made to notice the start of the demonstration display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is the gaming machine according to form 2-1,
The brightness data first used in the demonstration display brightness data table has a different color from the final brightness data used in the normal state background display brightness data table and the final brightness data used in the special state background display brightness data table. (Fig. 137, Fig. 141, Fig. 145, Fig. 149, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the color of the last luminance data during the normal state background display and the color of the first luminance data during the demonstration display are different, and the color of the last luminance data during the special state background display and the color of the last luminance data during the demonstration display are different. Since the color of the luminance data is different from that of the initial brightness data, the switching of the color of the light-emitting means is conspicuous when the demonstration display is started in each state. can be controlled.

[Mode 3]
The game machine of form 3-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means;
The third light emitting means is light emitting means provided corresponding to the operation means for presentation,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means is
during the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
In the first period and the second period, the third light emitting means is controlled using one luminance data table different from the luminance data table for background display and the luminance data table for demonstration display (FIG. 86, FIG. 95, Figure 96, Figure 99, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light emitting means corresponding to the operation means for production, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the operation of the operation means for production is prompted. By adopting this mode, misunderstanding can be prevented, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 4]
The game machine of form 4-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means;
The third light emitting means is light emitting means provided corresponding to the operation means for presentation,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means is
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a luminance data table for special state background display corresponding to the special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
During the second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are operated using the demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display. control and
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using the luminance data table for demonstration display in a second period after the end of the first period after the game in the special state ends;
In a first period after the game in the normal state is finished, one brightness data table different from the brightness data table for normal state background display, the brightness data table for special state background display, and the brightness data table for demonstration display. to control the third light emitting means using
controlling the third light emitting means using the one luminance data table in a first period after the game in the special state is finished;
controlling the third light emitting means using the one luminance data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
In the second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the one luminance data table is used to control the third light emitting means (FIGS. 86, 95, 96, Figure 99, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light emitting means corresponding to the operation means for effect, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the operation of the operation means for effect is prompted. By maintaining a fixed mode in the state and the special state, misunderstanding can be prevented in both the normal state and the special state, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 5]
The game machine of form 5-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means;
The third light emitting means is light emitting means provided corresponding to the operation means for presentation,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a first scene and a second scene,
The light emission control means is
during the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a first scene luminance data table corresponding to the first scene in the first scene in the second period;
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a second scene luminance data table corresponding to the second scene in the second scene in the second period;
controlling the third light emitting means using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the first scene and the luminance data table for the second scene in the first scene in the second period;
In the second scene in the second period, the one luminance data table is used to control the third light emitting means (FIGS. 86, 95, 96, 99, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light emitting means corresponding to the operation means for production, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the operation of the operation means for production is prompted. By adopting this mode, misunderstanding can be prevented, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

The game machine of form 5-2 is the gaming machine according to form 3-1, form 4-1, and form 5-1,
The one brightness data table is a brightness data table different from the brightness data table for promoting effect used when the promoting effect for prompting the operation of the operation means for effect is executed, and the brightness data table constituting the one brightness data table is different. 154 to 162).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the one luminance data table is composed of luminance data for making the mode less emphasized than when the operation of the operation means for presentation is prompted, the operation of the operation means for presentation is prompted. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that it is, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

The game machine of form 5-3 is the gaming machine according to form 3-1, form 4-1, and form 5-1,
One luminance data table is characterized in that it is composed of luminance data for turning off the light.
According to this feature, since one luminance data table is composed of luminance data for turning off the lights, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the operation of the operating means for presentation is being prompted. Suitable customer waiting control can be performed as.

The game machine of form 5-4 is the gaming machine according to form 3-1, form 4-1, and form 5-1,
The first light emitting means is provided on the game board,
The second light emitting means and the third light emitting means are provided in the game frame (FIG. 93 etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emitting means corresponding to the operating means for presentation is provided in the game frame, but is managed separately from the same brightness data table as the other light emitting means provided in the game frame. Therefore, it is possible to suitably design for preventing the player from misunderstanding that the operation of the performance operating means is prompted, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of form 5-5 is the gaming machine according to form 3-1, form 4-1, and form 5-1,
The display means displays a display indicating that it is being activated after the power is turned on,
The light emission control means is
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display luminance data table at a timing associated with displaying a display indicating that the display means is in operation;
The third light emitting means is controlled using one luminance data table at a timing associated with displaying a display indicating that the display means is in operation (FIGS. 104, 106, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using the brightness data table to emit light before the background is displayed, it is possible to check whether the light emitting means is normal at the stage of startup, and then seamlessly. It is possible to make the light emission mode during customer waiting, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Mode 6]
The game machine of form 6-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, a warning display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The company name display scene is a scene for character display of the company name related to the game machine,
The title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters,
The caution display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to draw attention when playing the game machine,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to introduce the gaming machine,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which characters are displayed to introduce the gaming machine,
The light emission control means is
in the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
controlling the light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene in the company name display scene in the second period;
controlling the light emitting means using a title name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the title name display scene in the title name display scene in the second period;
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for a caution display scene corresponding to the caution display scene in the second period;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period, one brightness data table different from the brightness data table for the company name display scene, the brightness data table for the title name display, and the brightness data table for the alert display scene is provided. controlling the light emitting means using
In the second model introduction scene in the second period, the one luminance data table is used to control the light emitting means (FIG. 86, etc.)
It is characterized by

The company name includes the name of the company involved in the development, manufacture and sale of the game machine.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed by character display, but we want to emphasize information such as company name information, model titles, and alerts, so by making each of them emit a dedicated light, it can be combined with other character displays. This can be emphasized by comparison, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of form 6-2 is the gaming machine according to form 6-1,
There is another scene between the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene,
In other scenes, luminance data tables different from the one luminance data table are used (FIG. 86, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since a common brightness data table is used for the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene, suitable light emission can be achieved without increasing the capacity, resulting in a suitable light emission. Customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of form 6-3 is the gaming machine according to form 6-1,
Execution period of model introduction scene including first model introduction scene and second model introduction scene (30 sec)>Execution period of company name display scene (10 sec), model introduction scene including first model introduction scene and second model introduction scene execution period (30 sec) > execution period (5 sec) of the caution display scene,
The character display of the company name and the character display of the warning are characterized in that they may be displayed at a display timing other than during the demonstration display.
According to this feature, the model introduction scene and the title name display scene, which are displayed only during the demonstration display, can be emphasized for a longer period of time, so that suitable customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Mode 7]
The game machine of form 7-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the game machine is displayed in animation,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which characters for introducing the gaming machine are displayed in animation,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which characters for introducing the gaming machine are displayed in animation,
The light emission control means is
in the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
controlling the light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene in the company name display scene in the second period;
controlling the light emitting means using one luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the company name display scene in the first model introduction scene in the second period;
controlling the light emitting means using the one luminance data table in the second model introduction scene in the second period;
the brightness data table for the company name display scene includes brightness data linked to the animation of the character display of the company name associated with the gaming machine;
The one brightness data table includes brightness data interlocking with a character display animation introducing the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene and interlocking with a character display animation introducing the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene. (Figs. 86, 88, 89, 148 to 155, 176)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed by character display, but since we want to convey information on company names in particular, by using luminance data linked to the display animation, it is possible to emphasize it in comparison with other character displays. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 8]
The game machine of form 8-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a title name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The title name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which characters for introducing the gaming machine are displayed in animation,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which characters for introducing the gaming machine are displayed in animation,
The light emission control means is
in the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
controlling the light emitting means using a title name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the title name display scene in the title name display scene in the second period;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period and the second model introduction scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using one luminance data table different from the title name display luminance data table. ,
the brightness data table for the title name display scene includes brightness data linked to the animation of the character display of the title name of the gaming machine;
The one brightness data table includes brightness data interlocking with a character display animation introducing the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene and interlocking with a character display animation introducing the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene. (Figs. 86, 88, 89, 148 to 155, 176)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed by character display, but in particular, because we want to convey information on the model name, by using luminance data linked to the display animation, it is possible to emphasize it in comparison with other character displays. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 9]
The game machine of form 9-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene,
The company name display scene is a scene for character display of the company name related to the game machine,
The title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters,
The caution display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to draw attention when playing the game machine,
The light emission control means is
in the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
controlling the light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene in the company name display scene in the second period;
controlling the light emitting means using a title name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the title name display scene in the title name display scene in the second period;
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for a caution display scene corresponding to the caution display scene in the second period;
The mode of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for the company name display scene is emphasized more than the mode of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for the alert display scene. and
The mode of the light emitting means controlled by using the brightness data table for the title name display scene is emphasized more than the mode of the light emitting means controlled by using the brightness data table for the alerting display scene. (Fig. 85 etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed by character display, but since it is desirable to emphasize each information such as company name information, model title, and alert, it is possible to emphasize by emitting light exclusively for each. Among them, by emphasizing the luminous mode of the display scene of the company name and model title compared to the scene calling attention, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed. can be done.

The gaming machine of form 9-2 is the gaming machine according to form 9-1,
The aspect of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for the company name display scene is emphasized over the aspect of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for the alert display scene. , and the mode of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for the title name display scene is emphasized over the mode of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for the alert display scene. (1) A mode in which there are many flashes (2) A mode in which there are many colors to be lit (3) A mode in which a large number of light emitting means are used (Fig. 85, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of form 9-3 is the gaming machine according to form 9-1,
The mode of the light emitting means controlled by using the brightness data table for the company name display scene is emphasized more than the mode of the light emitting means controlled by using the brightness data table for the title name display scene. is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the company name more emphasized, and it is possible to appeal to the player in an easy-to-understand manner which company the gaming machine is related to, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control. .

[Mode 10]
The game machine of form 10-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means;
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene and a model introduction scene,
The light emission control means is
during the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene in the company name display scene in the second period;
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a luminance data table for a model introduction display scene corresponding to the model introduction display scene in the model introduction scene in the second period;
the plurality of luminance data constituting the luminance data table for the company name display scene are luminance data configured so that the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means emit light;
A plurality of luminance data constituting the luminance data table for the model introduction scene are luminance data configured so that the first light emitting means emits light and the second light emitting means does not emit light (FIGS. 86, 147 and Fig. 155)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are a plurality of scenes in which information is conveyed by character display. By making the light emitting means emit light while the second light emitting means does not emit light, the company name display scene can be relatively emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.
The game machine of form 10-2 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The light emission control means is
during the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene in the company name display scene in the second period;
controlling the first light emitting means using a luminance data table for the first model introduction display scene corresponding to the first model introduction display scene in the first model introduction scene in the second period;
controlling the first light emitting means using a luminance data table for a second model introduction display scene corresponding to the second model introduction display scene in the second model introduction scene in the second period;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period and the second model introduction scene in the second period, one luminance data table is used to control the second light emitting means.
According to this feature, there are a plurality of scenes where information is conveyed by character display. In the scene and the second model introduction scene, the first light emitting means emits light in a dedicated light emitting mode, while the second light emitting means emits light in a common light emitting mode. The display scene can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 11]
The game machine of form 11-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means is
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow luminance data table;
controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow luminance data table when a specific effect is executed;
The rainbow luminance data table used in the second period and the rainbow luminance data table used when the specific effect is executed are common luminance data tables (FIGS. 85, 88, 89, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by setting the light emission mode to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made gorgeous, and the luminance data table for setting the light emission mode to rainbow is executed during the game. By sharing the brightness data table with the brightness data table used corresponding to the specified effect, the capacity is not increased, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 12]
The game machine of form 12-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow luminance data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow luminance data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state is finished;
controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow luminance data table when executing a specific effect executable in the normal state and a special effect executable in the special state;
The rainbow luminance data table used in the second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, and the second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state The rainbow luminance data table used and the rainbow luminance data table used when executing the specific effect executable in the normal state and the special effect executable in the special state are common luminance data tables ( Figures 85, 88, 89, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by setting the light emission mode to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made gorgeous, and the luminance data table for setting the light emission mode to rainbow is executed in the normal state. By sharing the luminance data table used in correspondence with the possible specific effects and the special effects executable in the special state, the capacity is not increased, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of form 12-2 is the gaming machine according to form 12-1,
The specific effect and the special effect are effects for definitely notifying that the control is in an advantageous state.
According to this feature, since the luminance data table used for the effect that is determined to be controlled in an advantageous state is also used for the demonstration display, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control as a result.

[Mode 13]
The game machine of form 13-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a title name display scene,
The title name display scene is composed of a main title name display part that displays the character display of the main title name of the gaming machine, and a subtitle name display part that displays the character display of the subtitle name of the gaming machine,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a subtitle name display part brightness data table corresponding to the subtitle name display part at the timing of switching from the main title name display part to the subtitle name display part,
The luminance data table for the subtitle name display part is a luminance data table for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a lighting mode linked to the animation of character display of the subtitle name using a plurality of luminance data (FIG. 86, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the main title name and the subtitle name are displayed in order, and the subtitle name is displayed to complete the title name of the gaming machine. By emitting light, the title name of the game machine can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 14]
The game machine of form 14-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
comprising display means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the game machine is displayed in animation,
The title name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
The attention-calling display scene is a scene in which a character display for calling attention when playing the game machine is displayed in animation,
The animation display of the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is a mode that is emphasized more than the animation display of the character display for calling attention when playing the gaming machine,
The animation display of the character display of the title of the game machine is emphasized more than the animation display of the character display for calling attention when playing the game machine (FIGS. 177, 178, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed by character display, but since we want to emphasize each information such as company name information, model title, and alert, it is possible to emphasize by displaying each with a dedicated display animation. Among them, by emphasizing the display animation of the company name and model title display scene compared to the attention calling scene, the company name and model title can be emphasized, resulting in suitable customer waiting control. It can be carried out.

[Mode 15]
The game machine of form 15-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
comprising display means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a title name display scene and a warning display scene,
The title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters,
The caution display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to draw attention when playing the game machine,
The display means is
In the title name display scene, the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is animated at a specified display position,
After that, the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
In the caution display scene, an animation is displayed at a prescribed display position to display a character display for caution when playing the game machine,
After that, the character display for calling attention when playing the game machine is displayed without animation display (Fig. 177, Fig. 178, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display of the title name of the game is given a reverberant movement to give a sense of attention to the title, and the attention call is made to avoid the reverberant movement so that the characters are firmly displayed. can be read, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 16]
The game machine of form 16-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
comprising display means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a warning display scene,
The caution display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to draw attention when playing the game machine,
The alert display scene is composed of a first alert display part that displays a character display for alerting the first event and a second alert display part that displays a character display for alerting the second event. ,
The background color of the character display in the first attention-calling display part is different from the background color of the character display in the second attention-calling display part (FIGS. 90, 91, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, different background colors can be used to draw attention to different events, thereby increasing attention when switching, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 17]
The game machine of form 17-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
comprising display means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene and a warning display scene,
The company name display scene is a scene for character display of the company name related to the game machine,
The caution display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to draw attention when playing the game machine,
The background color of character display in the company name display scene is different from the background color of character display in the attention display scene (FIGS. 90, 91, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase attention when switching between the display of the company name and the call for attention by making the background color different, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 18]
The game machine of form 18-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
after the second period ends, displaying the background display again;
The light emission control means is
in the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
in the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the background display, the luminance data table for demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table for background display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 107 and 108). etc)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by adopting a step-by-step design in which the control of the light emitting means is first switched and then the background display is started, it is possible to prevent the end of the demonstration display from leaving a bad aftertaste. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 19]
The game machine of form 19-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
After the second period in the normal state ends, displaying the normal state background display again,
After the second period in the special state ends, displaying the special state background display again,
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state is finished;
before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the normal background display, switching from the luminance data table for demonstration display to the luminance data table for normal background display and controlling the light emitting means;
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the special state background display, the luminance data table for demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table for special state background display, and the light emitting means is controlled (FIG. 107 to Figure 109, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by adopting a step-by-step design in which the control of the light emitting means is first switched and then the background display is started, it is possible to prevent the end of the demonstration display from leaving a bad aftertaste. Furthermore, it is possible to promptly inform the player of which state the lamp is in by means of the lighting mode of the lamp, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 20]
The game machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a starting condition is met,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
displaying the background display in a first period after the variable display ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
A variable display of effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information can be displayed,
The light emission control means is
in the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the display corresponding to the variable display of the effect identification information, The luminance data table for demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the effect identification information, and the light emitting means is controlled (FIGS. 110 to 115, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, it is possible to quickly inform that the starting condition is established and the demonstration display is finished by switching the light emitting means, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed. It can be carried out.

[Mode 21]
The game machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a starting condition is met,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the variable display in the normal state ends;
displaying a special state background display in a first period after the variable display in the special state ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the special state;
A variable display of effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information can be displayed,
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display in a first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state;
controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display luminance data table corresponding to the special state background display in a first period after the end of the variable display in the special state;
controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state;
controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the special state;
When the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the normal state, the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of the effect identification information in the normal state. before, switching from the luminance data table for demonstration display to a luminance data table corresponding to variable display of the effect identification information in the normal state, and controlling the light emitting means;
When the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means in the special state, the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of the effect identification information in the special state. Before, the luminance data table for demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the effect identification information in the special state, and the light emitting means is controlled (FIGS. 110 to 115, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state and the special state, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, it is possible to quickly notify that the starting condition is satisfied and the demonstration display is finished by switching the light emitting means. Suitable customer waiting control can be performed as.

[Form 22]
The game machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying first special identification information when a first starting condition is met and variably displaying second special identification information when a second starting condition is met,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
displaying a background display in a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information ends;
displaying the background display in a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information ends;
displaying the demonstration display in the second period after the end of the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends;
A variable display of effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information can be displayed,
A variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information can be displayed,
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display in a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed;
controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for background display in a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed;
controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the first special identification information;
controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the second special identification information ends;
When the first starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the display means changes the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the first special identification information. before switching, switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the first special identification information to control the light emitting means;
When the second starting condition is met while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the display means changes the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the second special identification information. Before switching, the luminance data table for demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the second special identification information, and the light emitting means is controlled (FIGS. 110 to 115). etc)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when any starting condition is satisfied, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, the switching of the light emitting means quickly indicates that the starting condition is satisfied and the demonstration display is finished. As a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 23]
The game machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a starting condition is met,
comprising display means,
The display means is
displaying the background display in a first period after the variable display ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
A variable display of effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information can be displayed,
displaying a variable display of the effect identification information so that the transmittance of the effect identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value when the starting condition is satisfied;
When the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the display is switched from the demonstration display to the variable display of the presentation identification information before the transmittance of the presentation identification information becomes the second value. (Fig. 82, Fig. 111, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by completing the switching from the demonstration display before the transmittance of the effect identification information increases, it is possible to notify that the starting condition is established and the demonstration display is finished. Customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 24]
The game machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a starting condition is met,
comprising display means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the variable display in the normal state ends;
displaying a special state background display in a first period after the variable display in the special state ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the special state;
A variable display of effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information can be displayed,
displaying variable display of the effect identification information so that the transmittance of the effect identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value when the starting condition is satisfied;
In the normal state, if the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the performance identification in the normal state from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes the second value. Display by switching the display to a variable display of information,
In the special state, if the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the effect identification in the special state from the demonstration display before the transmittance of the effect identification information becomes the second value. Display is switched to variable display of information (Fig. 82, Fig. 111, Fig. 181, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in both the normal state and the special state, by completing the switching from the demonstration display before the transparency of the effect identification information increases, the starting condition is satisfied and the demonstration display ends. can be notified, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 25]
The game machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying first special identification information when a first starting condition is met and variably displaying second special identification information when a second starting condition is met,
comprising display means,
The display means is
displaying a background display in a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information ends;
displaying the background display in a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information ends;
displaying the demonstration display in the second period after the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends;
A variable display of effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information can be displayed,
A variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information can be displayed,
displaying variable display of the effect identification information so that the transmittance of the effect identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value when the starting condition is established;
When the first start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the effect corresponding to the first special identification information is generated from the demonstration display before the transmittance of the effect identification information becomes the second value. Switch the display to a variable display of identification information,
When the second starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, a performance corresponding to the second special identification information is generated from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value. Display is switched to variable display of identification information (Fig. 82, Fig. 111, Fig. 181, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when any starting condition is satisfied, the starting condition is satisfied and the demonstration display is performed by completing the switching from the demonstration display before the transparency of the effect identification information increases. It is possible to notify the end of the process, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 26]
The game machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a starting condition is met,
a firing operating means;
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
displaying the background display in a first period after the variable display ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
When the firing operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to the background display and displayed;
The light emission control means is
in the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
in the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the firing operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the luminance data for the demonstration display is displayed before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the background display. The table is switched to the luminance data table for background display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 116, 117, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light-emitting means first, it is possible to quickly notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the firing operation means by switching the light-emitting means, and as a result, it is preferable Customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 27]
The game machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
menu operating means;
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
when the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to the menu display and displayed;
The light emission control means is
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for background display,
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
when the menu is displayed, controlling the light emitting means using a menu display luminance data table corresponding to the menu display;
When the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the luminance data for the demonstration display is displayed before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the menu display. Switch from the table to the brightness data table for menu display and control the light emitting means (FIGS. 118 to 120, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light-emitting means first, it is possible to quickly notify that the menu operation means has been operated and that the demonstration display has ended due to the switching of the light-emitting means. Customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 28]
The game machine of form 28-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
menu operating means;
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state is finished;
when the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to the menu display and displayed;
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state is finished;
when the menu is displayed, controlling the light emitting means using a menu display luminance data table corresponding to the menu display;
When the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the normal state, the demonstration is performed before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the menu display. switching from the luminance data table for display to the luminance data table for menu display to control the light emitting means;
When the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the special state, the demonstration is performed before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the menu display. Switching from the luminance data table for display to the luminance data table for menu display and controlling the light emitting means (FIGS. 118 to 120, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state and the special state, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, the switching of the light emitting means quickly informs the end of the demonstration display due to the operation of the menu operation means. As a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control as a result.

[Form 29]
The game machine of form 29-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
comprising display means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
After the second period ends, displaying the switching display, then displaying the background display,
If an interrupt condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to the background display without displaying the switching display (FIGS. 107 to 120, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the end of the demonstration display due to the lapse of time is prevented from appearing to have suddenly switched by interposing the switching display. By showing the abrupt switching, it is possible to highlight the interrupted end by comparing the events, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 30]
The game machine of form 30-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
comprising display means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
After the second period in the normal state ends, displaying a switching display, then displaying the normal state background display,
After the second period in the special state has ended, displaying the switching display, then displaying the special state background display,
When an interrupt condition is met while the demonstration display is being displayed in the normal state, the demonstration display is switched to the normal state background display without displaying the switching display.

If the interrupt condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed in the special state, the demonstration display is switched to the special state background display without displaying the switching display (FIG. 107). ~ Fig. 120 etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state and the special state, the termination of the demonstration display due to the lapse of time is prevented by interposing the switching display from appearing to have suddenly switched, and the termination of the demonstration display due to an interrupt condition is prevented. By showing the sudden switching without intervening the switching display, it is possible to highlight the interrupted end by comparing those events, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control. .

[Mode 31]
The game machine of form 31-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
comprising display means,
The display means is
When a power failure occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, the background display is displayed without displaying the guidance display regarding the effect adjustment at the display start timing of the background display,
Then display the demonstration display,
Thereafter, displaying the background display while displaying the guidance display at the display start timing of the background display,
When the power is turned off and the power is turned on with initialization,
After the power is turned on, the background display is displayed without displaying a guide display regarding production adjustment at the display start timing of the background display,
then displaying the demonstration display,
Thereafter, the background display is displayed while the guide display is displayed at the display start timing of the background display (FIGS. 101 and 102).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, either a hot start (power-on without initialization) or a cold start (power-on with initialization) can be considered as the startup situation before the amusement arcade opens. Even at startup, the game clerk can check the display in the flow of checking the background display after turning on the power, checking the demonstration display, and checking the guide display, which improves the efficiency of confirmation. When the background display is displayed in the situation where the store is opened and the player is welcomed, the background display with the guide display is displayed, so it is possible to properly guide the production adjustment from the timing of the start of the game, and to the player. Therefore, a suitable game environment can be provided, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 32]
The game machine of form 32-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
comprising display means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
displaying a normal state background display in the normal state;
displaying a special state background display in the special state;
In the normal state, when a power failure occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, the normal state background display is displayed without displaying the guidance display regarding the effect adjustment at the display start timing of the normal state background display,
Then display the demonstration display,
After that, while displaying the guidance display at the display start timing of the normal state background display, displaying the normal state background display,
In the special state, when the power is turned off and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, the special state background display is displayed without displaying the guidance display regarding the production adjustment at the display start timing of the special state background display,
then displaying the demonstration display,
Thereafter, the special state background display is displayed while the guide display is displayed at the display start timing of the special state background display (FIGS. 103 to 106, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the state of startup before the opening of the amusement arcade, it can be considered that it is in a normal state or in a special state, and guidance display is provided so that it can be confirmed in the background in which state it has started up. If the background is displayed again after that, there is a high possibility that you have already confirmed the status, so you can display the guidance display from the start of the background display. , When the background display is displayed when the amusement store opens and welcomes players, the background display will be a guidance display, so it is possible to properly guide the production adjustment from the timing of the start of the game. A suitable game environment can be provided for the player, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 33]
The game machine of form 33-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
comprising display means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
After the variable display ends in the normal state,
displaying a normal state background display without displaying a guidance display regarding performance adjustment, and after a predetermined period of time has passed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
Thereafter, a demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the normal state background display is displayed while performing the guidance display,
After the variable display ends in the special state,
Displaying a special state background display without displaying a guidance display related to production adjustment, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, displaying the special state background display while displaying the guidance display,
After that, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has passed, the special state background display is displayed while the guide display is being performed (FIGS. 96 to 101, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in either the normal state or the special state, the guidance display is not immediately displayed after the end of the variation, thereby preventing unnecessary adjustment of the production, and once the demonstration display is displayed. Since there is a possibility that the player is out of the seat after the end, the game is played in a suitable game environment by prompting the performance adjustment immediately after the demonstration display is switched to the background display. can be prompted, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 34]
The game machine of form 34-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying first special identification information when a first starting condition is met and variably displaying second special identification information when a second starting condition is met,
comprising display means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
After the variable display of the first special identification information ends in the normal state,
displaying a normal state background display without displaying a guidance display regarding performance adjustment, and after a predetermined period of time has passed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
Thereafter, a demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the normal state background display is displayed while performing the guidance display,
After the variable display of the second special identification information ends in the normal state,
displaying the normal state background display without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
After that, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the normal state background display is displayed while performing the guide display,
In the special state, after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed,
displaying a special state background display without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the special state background display while displaying the guidance display;
After that, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the special state background display is displayed while performing the guide display,
In the special state, after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed,
displaying the special state background display without displaying the guidance display, and displaying the special state background display while displaying the guidance display after the predetermined period has elapsed;
After that, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has passed, the special state background display is displayed while the guide display is being performed (FIGS. 96 to 101, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even after the change of the first special identification information ends in either the normal state or the special state, or even after the change of the second special identification information ends, the guidance display is immediately performed after the change ends. By not displaying, it is possible to prevent unnecessary adjustment of the production from being urged, and once the demonstration display ends, there is a possibility that the player has left the seat, so the background is removed from the demonstration display. By prompting the adjustment of the effect immediately after switching to the display, it is possible to prompt the game to be played in a suitable game environment, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 35]
The game machine of form 35-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
comprising display means,
The display means is
After the variable display ends,
displaying a background display without displaying a guidance display related to effect adjustment, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, displaying the guidance display so as to be superimposed on the background display by displaying a specific animation;
After that, a demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has passed, the guide display is displayed so as to be superimposed on the background display by displaying the specific animation (FIGS. 96 to 101, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the guide display is not displayed immediately after the end of the variation, thereby preventing unnecessary prompting of the production adjustment, and once the demonstration display is completed, the background display is switched from the demonstration display to the background display. By prompting the production adjustment immediately after switching, it is possible to prompt the player to play in a suitable game environment, and furthermore, when the guidance display is displayed immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display, guidance is provided after the end of the fluctuation. By displaying the guidance using animation common to the display, it is possible to appeal that the guidance display has been displayed without spending a cost, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 36]
The game machine of form 36-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
comprising display means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
In the normal state, the demonstration display is displayed after the first specific period has passed after the end of the variable display,
displaying the demonstration display when the first specific period has elapsed after the end of the variable display in the special state;
In the normal state, the demonstration display is displayed when the second specific period has elapsed after the power was turned off and the power was turned on,
In the special state, the demonstration display is displayed when the second specific period elapses after the power is turned off and the power is turned on;
The first specified period is longer than the second specified period (FIGS. 96, 99, 104, 106, 180, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the end of the variation, the players may not have changed hands, which is annoying. Since the game clerk, not the player, is present, the game clerk can immediately confirm the demonstration display by setting the time to be short, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 37]
The game machine of form 37-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
comprising display means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
In the normal state, the demonstration display is displayed after the first specific period has passed after the end of the variable display,
displaying the demonstration display when the first specific period has elapsed after the end of the variable display in the special state;
In the normal state, the demonstration display is displayed when the second specific period has elapsed after the power is turned off and the power is turned on with initialization,
In the special state, the demonstration display is displayed when the second specific period elapses after the power is turned off and the power is turned on with initialization,
The first specified period is longer than the second specified period (FIGS. 96, 99, 102, 180, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the end of the fluctuation, the players may not have changed, and it will be annoying, so set a longer time and cold start (initial The power-on with a change) is a start method that must be performed first when a game machine is introduced into a game arcade. can be immediately confirmed, and the introduced machine can be made more detailed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 38]
The game machine of form 38-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
comprising display means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
In the normal state, after the power is turned off and the power is turned on, the demonstration display is displayed by the elapse of the first specific period,
In the special state, the demonstration display is displayed when the first specific period has elapsed after the power was turned off and the power was turned on;
In the normal state, the demonstration display is displayed when the second specific period has elapsed after the power is turned off and the power is turned on with initialization,
In the special state, the demonstration display is displayed when the second specific period elapses after the power is turned off and the power is turned on with initialization,
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIGS. 102, 104, 106, 180, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a cold start (turning on power with initialization) is a start method that must be performed first when a game machine is installed in a game arcade. By doing so, the game clerk can immediately check the demonstration display and have them become more familiar with the machines that have been introduced. As a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Mode 39]
The game machine of form 39-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
comprising display means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
In the normal state, after the end of the variable display, the demonstration display is displayed when the first specific period elapses, and after the end of the demonstration display, the demonstration display is displayed again when the predetermined period elapses. death,
In the special state, after the end of the variable display, the demonstration display is displayed due to the elapse of the first specific period, and after the end of the demonstration display, the demonstration is displayed again due to the elapse of the predetermined period. show the display,
In the normal state, after the power is turned off and the power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed after the second specific period has passed, and after the demonstration display is finished, the predetermined period of time. After the elapse of, the demonstration display is displayed again,
In the special state, after the power is turned off and the power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed due to the elapse of the second specific period, and after the demonstration display ends, the predetermined power is turned on. Displaying the demonstration display again due to the elapse of the period,
The first specified period is longer than the second specified period (FIGS. 96, 99, 102, 180, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the end of the fluctuation, the players may not have changed, and it will be annoying, so set a longer time and cold start (initial The power-on with a change) is a start method that must be performed first when a game machine is introduced into a game arcade. It is possible to immediately confirm the status of the machine, and to have the machine become more detailed. Furthermore, a demonstration display is displayed once after the fluctuation in the normal condition, after the fluctuation in the special condition, and after a cold start. is displayed, and then the demonstration display is displayed again.

[Form 40]
The game machine of form 40-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display when no specific error has occurred in the first period;
in the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
when the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error luminance data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
After that, if the specific error is not eliminated during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued (FIGS. 122 to 124, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification of a specific error that has occurred during the game by the lamp is carried over during both the background display and the demonstration display, thereby stably reporting the specific error. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 41]
The game machine of form 41-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display when no specific error has occurred in the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
In the first period after the game in the special state is finished, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means is controlled using the special state background display luminance data table corresponding to the special state background display. ,
In the second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error does not occur, the light emission is performed using the demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display. control means,
in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error does not occur, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for demonstration display;
when the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error luminance data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated in the first period after the game in the normal state is finished, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
Thereafter, in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, the light emission means is controlled using the luminance data table for the specific error. continue
when the specific error occurs during the game in the special state, controlling the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved in the first period after the game in the special state is finished, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
Thereafter, in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error is not resolved, the light emission means is controlled using the luminance data table for the specific error. Continue (Fig. 122 to Fig. 125 etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in both the normal state and the special state, the notification by the lamp of the specific error that occurred during the game can be taken over and executed during the background display and during the demonstration display. Therefore, it is possible to stably notify a specific error, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 42]
The game machine of form 42-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying first special identification information when a first starting condition is met and variably displaying second special identification information when a second starting condition is met,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
displaying a background display in a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information ends;
displaying the background display in a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information ends;
displaying the demonstration display in the second period after the end of the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends;
The light emission control means is
if no specific error occurs in a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information ends, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
in a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed, if the specific error does not occur, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for background display;
In the second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information, if the specific error does not occur, the demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display is generated. controlling the light emitting means using
In the second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means uses the luminance data table for demonstration display. to control the
when the specific error occurs during the variable display of the first special identification information, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error luminance data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated in the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
After that, in the second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information, if the specific error is not resolved, the continue to control the light emitting means;
when the specific error occurs during the variable display of the second special identification information, controlling the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved in the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
Thereafter, in the second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, if the specific error is not resolved, the luminance data table for the specific error is used. Continue controlling the light emitting means (Figs. 122 to 125, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification by the lamp of the specific error that occurred during the variable display of the first special identification information and during the variable display of the second special identification information is inherited and executed during both the background display and the demonstration display. By doing so, it is possible to stably notify the specific error, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 43]
The game machine of form 43-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display when no specific error has occurred in the first period;
in the second period, when the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
when the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error luminance data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
The luminance data constituting the demonstration display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table have different colors that occupy a large proportion (FIGS. 92, 135 to 146, and 167 to 169 etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the brightness data table for the specific error and the brightness data table for the demonstration display are configured so that the main colors in the brightness data are different, so that the specific error can be detected depending on the lighting mode during the demonstration display. is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 44]
The game machine of form 44-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display when no specific error has occurred in the first period;
in the second period, when the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
when the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error luminance data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for background display and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific error differ in the color that occupies a large proportion (FIGS. 92, 135 to 146, and 167 to 169 etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the brightness data table for specific error and the brightness data table for background display are configured so that the main colors in the brightness data are different, so that the specific error can be detected depending on the lighting mode during background display. is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 45]
The game machine of form 45-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display when no specific error has occurred in the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
In the first period after the game in the special state is finished, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means is controlled using the special state background display luminance data table corresponding to the special state background display. ,
In the second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error does not occur, the light emission is performed using the demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display. control means,
in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error does not occur, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for demonstration display;
when the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error luminance data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated in the first period after the game in the normal state is finished, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
Thereafter, in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, the light emission means is controlled using the luminance data table for the specific error. continue
when the specific error occurs during the game in the special state, controlling the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved in the first period after the game in the special state is finished, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
Thereafter, in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error is not resolved, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the specific error. continue
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for normal state background display and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific error are different in color that accounts for a large proportion,
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for special status background display and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific error differ in the color occupying a large proportion (FIGS. 92, 135 to 146, and 167). ~ Fig. 169 etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the brightness data table for the specific error and the brightness data table for the normal state background display are configured to have different main colors in the brightness data, and the brightness data table for the specific error, By configuring the main color of the luminance data to be different between the luminance data table for special status background display and the background display, a specific error does not occur due to the light emission mode during background display even during any background display. As a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 46]
The game machine of form 46-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means is
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using the demonstration display luminance data corresponding to the demonstration display when no specific error has occurred in the second period;
If the specific error occurs during the second period,
controlling the first light emitting means using the specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the demonstration display luminance data;
Colors that occupy a large proportion of the luminance data for demonstration display and the luminance data for specific error are different (FIGS. 92, 135 to 146, 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the brightness data for the specific error and the brightness data for the demonstration display are configured so that the main colors in the brightness data are different, so that the specific error occurs depending on the lighting mode during the demonstration display. As a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 47]
The game machine of form 47-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means;
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means is
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using background display luminance data corresponding to the background display when no specific error has occurred in the first period;
If the specific error occurs in the first period,
controlling the first light emitting means using the specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the background display luminance data;
Colors that occupy a large proportion of the luminance data for background display and the luminance data for specific error are different (FIGS. 92, 135 to 146, 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the luminance data for the specific error and the luminance data for the background display are configured so that the main colors in the luminance data are different, so that the specific error occurs depending on the lighting mode during the background display. As a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 48]
The game machine of form 48-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means is
In the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if no specific error has occurred, the normal state background display luminance data corresponding to the normal state background display is used to control the first light emitting means and the first light emitting means. 2 controlling the light emitting means,
In the first period after the game in the special state is finished, if the specific error does not occur, the special state background display luminance data corresponding to the special state background display is used to control the first light emitting means and the controlling the second light emitting means;
When the specific error occurs in the first period after the game in the normal state is finished,
controlling the first light emitting means using the specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the normal state background display luminance data;
When the specific error occurs in the first period after the game in the special state is finished,
controlling the first light emitting means using the specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the special state background display luminance data;
Colors that occupy a large proportion of the luminance data for normal state background display and the luminance data for specific error are different,
Colors that occupy a large proportion of the luminance data for special state background display and the luminance data for specific error are different (FIGS. 92, 135 to 146, 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the brightness data for the specific error and the brightness data for the normal state background display are made to have different main colors, and the brightness data for the specific error and the brightness data for the special state background display are different in main color. By configuring so that the main color in the luminance data is different between the luminance data and the luminance data, in both the normal state and the special state, a specific error occurs due to the light emission mode during background display. can be suggested, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 49]
The game machine of form 49-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display when no specific error has occurred in the first period;
in the second period, when the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
when the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error luminance data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
The luminance data constituting the demonstration display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is different (Fig. 92, Figures 135 to 146, Figures 167 to 169, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the luminance data table for the specific error and the luminance data table for the demonstration display are structured so that the movements of the light emitting means shown to the player are different, so that the light emission mode during the demonstration display can be changed. It is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 50]
The game machine of form 50-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display when no specific error has occurred in the first period;
in the second period, when the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
when the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error luminance data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for background display and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific error are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is different (Fig. 92, Figures 135 to 146, Figures 167 to 169, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the luminance data table for the specific error and the luminance data table for the background display are structured so that the movements of the light emitting means shown to the player are different. It is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 51]
The game machine of form 51-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display when no specific error has occurred in the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
In the first period after the game in the special state is finished, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means is controlled using the special state background display luminance data table corresponding to the special state background display. ,
In the second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error does not occur, the light emission is performed using the demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display. control means,
in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error does not occur, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for demonstration display;
when the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error luminance data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated in the first period after the game in the normal state is finished, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
Thereafter, in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, the light emission means is controlled using the luminance data table for the specific error. continue
when the specific error occurs during the game in the special state, controlling the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved in the first period after the game in the special state is finished, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
Thereafter, in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error is not resolved, the light emission means is controlled using the luminance data table for the specific error. continue
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for normal state background display and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific error are configured such that the lighting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is different,
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for special status background display and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific error are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is different. (Fig. 92, Fig. 135 to Fig. 146, Fig. 167 to Fig. 169, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the brightness data table for the specific error and the brightness data table for the normal state background display are configured so that the movements of the light emitting means shown to the player are different, and the brightness data table for the specific error is configured to be different. and the luminance data table for special state background display, the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player is made different, so that even during any background display, a specific error can be prevented by the light emission mode during background display. is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 52]
The game machine of form 52-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means;
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means is
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using the demonstration display luminance data corresponding to the demonstration display when no specific error has occurred in the second period;
If the specific error occurs during the second period,
controlling the first light emitting means using the specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the demonstration display luminance data;
The luminance data for demonstration display and the luminance data for specific error are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means visually recognized by the player are different ( 92, 135 to 146, 167 to 169, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the luminance data for the specific error and the luminance data for the demonstration display are structured so that the movements of the light emitting means shown to the player are different, so that the specific error can be detected depending on the lighting mode during the demonstration display. is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 53]
The game machine of form 53-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means;
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means is
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using background display luminance data corresponding to the background display when no specific error has occurred in the first period;
If the specific error occurs in the first period,
controlling the first light emitting means using the specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the background display luminance data;
The luminance data for background display and the luminance data for specific error are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means visually recognized by the player are different ( 92, 135 to 146, 167 to 169, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the luminance data for the specific error and the luminance data for the background display are configured so that the movements of the light emitting means shown to the player are different, so that the specific error can be detected depending on the lighting mode during the background display. is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 54]
The game machine of form 54-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
There are a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
The display means is
displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state is finished;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means is
In the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if no specific error occurs, the normal state background display luminance data corresponding to the normal state background display is used to control the first light emitting means and the first light emitting means. 2 controlling the light emitting means,
In the first period after the game in the special state is finished, if the specific error does not occur, the special state background display luminance data corresponding to the special state background display is used to control the first light emitting means and the controlling the second light emitting means;
When the specific error occurs in the first period after the game in the normal state is finished,
controlling the first light emitting means using the specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the normal state background display luminance data;
When the specific error occurs in the first period after the game in the special state is finished,
controlling the first light emitting means using the specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the special state background display luminance data;
The luminance data for normal state background display and the luminance data for specific error are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means visually recognized by the player are different. ,
The light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means visually recognized by the player are configured to be different between the luminance data for special state background display and the luminance data for specific error. (Fig. 92, Fig. 135 to Fig. 146, Fig. 167 to Fig. 169, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the luminance data for the specific error and the luminance data for the normal background display are configured so that the movements of the light emitting means shown to the player are different, and the luminance data for the specific error and the luminance data for the special error are displayed differently. By configuring the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player to be different between the luminance data for the state background display and the state background display, it is specified by the light emission mode during the background display regardless of whether the state is the normal state or the special state. It is possible to suggest that an error has occurred, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 55]
The game machine of form 55-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
a payout unit that pays out game media;
a detection means provided in the payout unit for detecting game media;
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
When the game medium payout condition is satisfied and the detection means does not detect the game medium and there is an unpaid game medium, a specific error occurs,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display when the specific error has not occurred in the first period;
in the second period, when the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
when the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error luminance data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
When the specified error occurs during the second period, game media in excess of the unpaid number are distributed to the payout section, and game media not exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the payout section. In either case, switching from the specific error luminance data table to the demonstration display luminance data table at a timing associated with detection of the first distributed game medium by the detection means, Control the light emitting means (FIGS. 92, 121, 122, 135 to 146, 167 to 169, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the number of game balls distributed to the payout unit, at the timing when the detection sensor detects the first game ball, the light emission mode of the light emitting means is changed to emit light corresponding to the demonstration display. By switching to the mode, it is possible to make the demonstration display look natural, and it is possible to standardize the processing, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Mode 56]
The game machine of form 56-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
a payout unit that pays out game media;
a detection means provided in the payout unit for detecting game media;
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
When the game medium payout condition is satisfied and the detection means does not detect the game medium and there is an unpaid game medium, a specific error occurs,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display when the specific error has not occurred in the first period;
in the second period, when the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
when the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error luminance data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, continuing to control the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table,
When the specified error occurs during the first period, game media exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the payout section, or game media not exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the payout section. In either case, switching from the specific error luminance data table to the background display luminance data table at a timing associated with detection of the first distributed game medium by the detection means, Control the light emitting means (FIGS. 92, 121, 122, 135 to 146, 167 to 169, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the number of game balls distributed to the payout unit, at the timing when the detection sensor detects the first game ball, the light emission mode of the light emitting means is changed to emit light corresponding to the background display. By switching to the mode, the background display can be quickly displayed without a sense of discomfort, and the processing can be shared, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 57]
The game machine of form 57-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
a payout unit that pays out game media;
a detection means provided in the payout unit for detecting game media;
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
When the game medium payout condition is satisfied and the detection means does not detect the game medium and there is an unpaid game medium, a specific error occurs,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display when the specific error has not occurred in the first period;
in the second period, when the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
During the second period, when the game medium payout condition is satisfied and the period during which the detection means does not detect the game medium continues for a predetermined period, a specific error corresponding to the specific error is identified from the demonstration display luminance data table. Switching to the brightness data table for error and controlling the light emitting means,
When the specific error occurs during the second period, when a specific period shorter than the predetermined period elapses after the detecting means detects the game medium, the specific error luminance data table is read from the specific error luminance data table. Switch to the luminance data table for demonstration display and control the light emitting means (FIGS. 92, 121, 122, 135 to 146, 167 to 169, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there is a possibility of a specific error in the state that the detection means does not detect, but there is also a possibility of a ball delay, etc. Therefore, the light emission mode of the light emission means is not switched immediately, and the game ball When it is detected, the luminous mode of the luminous means is immediately switched to the luminous mode corresponding to the demonstration display, so that the demonstration display can be shown without a sense of incongruity, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Mode 58]
The game machine of form 58-1 is
A game machine capable of playing,
a payout unit that pays out game media;
a detection means provided in the payout unit for detecting game media;
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
When the game medium payout condition is satisfied and the detection means does not detect the game medium and there is an unpaid game medium, a specific error occurs,
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display when the specific error has not occurred in the first period;
in the second period, when the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
During the first period, when the game medium payout condition is satisfied and the period during which the detection means does not detect the game medium continues for a predetermined period, the background display luminance data table identifies the specific error corresponding to the specific error. Switching to the brightness data table for error and controlling the light emitting means,
When the specific error occurs during the first period, when a specific period shorter than the predetermined period elapses after the detecting means detects the game medium, the specific error luminance data table is read from the specific error luminance data table. 92, 121, 122, 135 to 146, 167 to 169, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there is a possibility of a specific error in the state that the detection means does not detect, but there is also a possibility of a ball delay, etc. Therefore, the light emission mode of the light emission means is not switched immediately, and the game ball When it is detected, by immediately switching the light emission mode of the light emitting means to the light emission mode corresponding to the background display, the background display can be made to look natural, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

Next, the form for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the drawings. In the following, the front side of FIG. 58 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back side is the rear (rear, back) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Described as a standard. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is the facing face facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, in the description of each step in the flowchart, for example, "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "004SGS1", "normal reach" is "N reach", and "super reach" is "SP reach". It is sometimes abbreviated as

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 58 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization is also generically called simply variable display.

In addition, on the upper left of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), a second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and a decoration A display area 5S for displaying a small pattern corresponding to the pattern is provided, and the small pattern is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, the number of the first reserved memory, the number of the second reserved memory, the reserved display, the small pattern, the error display (not shown) indicating the error state that occurred in the pachinko game machine 1, and the right hitting that prompts the player to perform the right hitting operation The notification image 004SG201 (see FIG. 78) and the time saving remaining display 004SG202 (see FIG. 78) indicating the number of remaining time saving are displayed on the front side (upper layer) than the effect image such as the character, so that the effect image While preventing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small patterns and error display from being reduced due to overlap, the decorative pattern is deeper than the effect image (lower layer) , it may be possible to prevent the visibility of the effect image from being lowered due to overlapping of the decorative symbols.

Incidentally, the small pattern is also referred to as a fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are displayed variably, for example, in a display device such as the image display device 5. The display changes depending on the movement. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, an effect is performed such that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or the movable body 32 is entirely or partially displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when an effect such as shielding is performed, it is possible to recognize whether or not it is currently in a variable display state. The effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variable display start command. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variable display start command.

In addition, a fourth pattern display provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 which is a predetermined location on the game board 2) such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED The pattern displayed on the device is also called a fourth pattern.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, a display area (special figure pending storage display area 5U , an active display area 5F). Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display. In addition, in the present embodiment, the common special figure pending storage display area 5U is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A first special figure pending storage display area in which a first pending display is displayed, and a second special figure pending storage display area in which a second pending display representing a variable display in which the execution of the second special symbol is suspended is displayed. , may be provided separately.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 59). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric accessory having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable piece is in the upright position, thereby causing the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole. It will be in a closed state that does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start winning opening) by tilting the movable piece when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state. It is also said that the mouth becomes open.) When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 58, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 59). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 58, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Below the board 2, a button lamp 9e is provided. The main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b and the button lamp 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also called "frame lamps".

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position (upper and lower positions of the image display device 5 in FIG. 58) on the game board 2, and the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. ing. Also, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. As shown in FIG. The attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the decoration lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps". The main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the button lamp 9e, and the decorative lamp 9f may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the button lamp 9e, and the decoration lamp 9f include LEDs (see FIG. 93). Further, various lamps will be described later.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 59).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 59).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is mounted with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as payout control substrate 004SG030, information terminal substrate, and launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 from the. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 , an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 and a real-time clock 106 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 outputs a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door. transmit.

The payout control board 004SG030 has a payout circuit driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls, 5 balls, 10 balls, 15 balls, etc.) to the player based on the receipt of the payout signal. The device 004SG031 is connected to a game ball detection sensor 004SG032 provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls paid out by the payout device 004SG031 pass, and receives information from the game ball detection sensor 004SG032. It is possible to stop driving the payout device 004SG031 according to the mode of the game ball detection signal.

Also, the payout control board 004SG030 has a handle sensor 004SG034 for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring 004SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is gripping the batting operation handle 30. Based on signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 004SG030 controls a launcher 004SG033 capable of launching game balls onto the game board 2 . In addition, a signal indicating whether or not the touch ring 004SG35 is detected and a signal indicating that the game ball has been shot by the shooting device 004SG033 are input from the payout control board 004SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11. .

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . It also performs display processing for outputting the image data of the display image creation area of the VRAM area designated by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn in a certain V blank, and the area is switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. As a result, drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

In addition, since the display control unit 123 superimposes (combines) a plurality of layers to generate an image to be displayed on the image display device 5, the image of each layer is drawn and stored in the VRAM area. a layer image drawing area for arranging, a display image creating area for generating an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area, and are placed. Note that each layer has a concept of upper, middle, and lower layers, and an image in a higher layer is given a higher display priority in the image display device 5, and an image in a lower layer is given a higher display priority in the image display device 5. is set low.

The VRAM area has a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 1 images, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 2 images, and a layer for drawing and arranging layer 3 images. 3 image drawing areas are arranged. A displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

The displacement image creation area creates an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) the image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn/arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area as an image to be displaced. This is an area in which a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area superimposes ( Display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image synthesized), or an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area. This is the area to be created as an image for use.

The image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: high), and the image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area is image display. An image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5 and an image drawn/arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area have the highest priority in the image display device 5 . Each image is set to an image with a low display priority (display priority: low). That is, layer 1 is a higher layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is a lower layer with the lowest image display priority. layer.

Layer 1 image drawing area is the lower part of the display screen of the image display device 5. First A drawing area for drawing an interface image, and a second interface image including a small pattern whose display screen is smaller than the decoration pattern and a display of the number of retained memories in the upper left part of the display screen of the image display device 5. be.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn in order to perform variable display of the decorative patterns in the central portion of the display screen of the image display device 5 .

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the background display is drawn in order to display the background display over the entire display screen of the image display device 5 .

In this embodiment, an image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), an image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and a layer 3 image drawing area An image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing each of the images (images of layer 3) drawn and arranged in . In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (the first interface image and the second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority. The image (decorative pattern) displayed as an image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area. The image (background display) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is displayed as a low layer image on the image display device 5 because the lowest display priority is set.

In the present embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area have a transmittance (transparency) in order to make the overlapping portion of the upper layer image invisible to the player when superimposed on the lower layer image. is set to 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the image drawn/arranged in each image drawing area may be set higher than 0%. However, an image that is transparently displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 60(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "0", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 60(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 60(A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specifying command, for example, as shown in FIG. , Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 60B, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 9000H is a power-on specifying command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been cold-started (that the power has been turned on while the clear switch 92 is being pressed (power-on with initialization)). Note that cold start refers to a state in which various processes of the gaming machine can be executed after initializing the data without restoring the data before the power is turned on when the power is turned on. . The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that designates that the pachinko gaming machine has hot-started (that the power was turned on while the clear switch 92 was not pressed (power-on without initialization)). It should be noted that "hot start" refers to a state in which various processes of the gaming machine can be executed based on the backed-up data when the power is turned on. Since hot start does not involve initialization, it is also called power-on without initialization. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while it is performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability high base state, time reduction with probability variation state) in which both time saving control and probability variation control are performed. In addition, the probability variation state with time saving may simply be referred to as "probability variation state". The command 96XXH is an error designation command that designates that an error has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and that the error has been cancelled.

The command A0XXH is a win start specifying command (also called a "fanfare command") specifying display of an effect image indicating the start of a big win game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big win game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "0" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like. The command E100H is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating execution of a customer waiting demonstration (demonstration effect). Command F100H is a frame state display designation command that designates the state of each input port (including ON/OFF of touch ring 004SG35).

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 60(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, and these commands may be replaced by different commands. You can add different commands from For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the notification command of passing, and the remaining variable display frequency by which probability variation control and time saving control are performed.

FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 61, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data representing each of the random numbers MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby setting the random numbers MR1 to MR4. You may make it count the numerical data which show a part.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "0" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". It is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 62 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, as the display result determination table, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a "jackpot" to a jackpot game state based on the random number MR1 for judging the special symbol display result. is a table.

In the display result determination table, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), random for special figure display result judgment A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to a special figure display result of "big win" or "losing".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big win" to the big win game state. It is data for judgment to be assigned. In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display result assigned to. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in the present embodiment), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in the present embodiment /30). That is, in the display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of determining to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or the time-saving state is higher. Judgment data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so as to increase.

FIG. 63A shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present embodiment, when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state, based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, the jackpot type can be any of a plurality of types. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in the present embodiment with reference to FIG. 63(B), in the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, variable probability control and time saving control are executed after the jackpot gaming state is finished. "Probability variable jackpot A", "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C" that shifts to a high probability high base state, and only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state to shift to a low probability high base state " Non-probability variable jackpot" is set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal opening big-hit in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, the jackpot game state by the ``non-probable variable jackpot'' is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

The variable probability control and the time saving control, which are started after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win A to the variable probability big win C, are ended on the condition that the game state is controlled to the big win game state. In addition, the time saving control started after the end of the jackpot game state of the non-probability variable jackpot is controlled to the jackpot game state by the end of the variable display of 100 times or by the end of the variable display of the 100 times. terminated on the condition that Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is one of the variable probability big win A to variable probability big win C, the variable probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state passes through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously without In other words, the variable probability state in the present embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result becomes a big hit regardless of the number of variable display times, while the time saving state in the present embodiment is a game state in which the variable display result does not become a big hit. If not, it is a game state controlled to a normal state by executing variable display 100 times. For this reason, the time-saving state is also a game state that is controlled when the consecutive game state can end.

In the setting example of the jackpot classification determination table shown in FIG. B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" are assigned different determination values for the jackpot types. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a big hit state with a small number of rounds as "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by the high opening control, the frequent occurrence of a big win state with few winning balls is avoided and the interest in the game is reduced. It is designed to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 63 (A), whether the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-probable jackpot or a definite jackpot, it is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. ing.

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure In addition, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 64 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the display result is a "big hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, three types of variation patterns are provided as super reach variation patterns: super reach (no pseudo run), super reach (one pseudo run), and super reach (two pseudo runs). The present invention is not limited to this, and four or more or two or less super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

In addition, the super reach variation pattern in the present embodiment is a variation pattern (PA2-2) that deviates from the variation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a variation pattern of super reach (no pseudo run), As a variation pattern of super reach (1 pseudo-run), the variation pattern (PB1-3) where the variable display result is a big hit and a variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of step, as a variation pattern of super reach (2 pseudo-runs) There are provided a variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a big hit, and a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the result is not.

As shown in FIG. 64, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes "big hit", in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, these variation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. , For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of variation pattern is first determined from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern, and then the A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved memories, the game state, and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65, when the variable display result is the non-probable variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table A. -1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach (no pseudo consecutive effect) jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach (one pseudo consecutive effect) jackpot), PB1-4 (super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect) big hit variation pattern). More specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 35%. , PB1-4 at a rate of 40%.

Also, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A to C, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern ), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) big hit variation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (pseudo-continuous effect 1 time) big hit variation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach (pseudo-continuous effect 2) It is determined from the number of times) variation pattern of the jackpot). More specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%. .

Also, if the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 1 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-1 (no shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) fluctuation pattern ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo-continuous effect)), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect)). More specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

In addition, if the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2, select the variation pattern determination table B for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) loss variation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo-continuous effect)) and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect)). More specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

In addition, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) loss fluctuation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo-continuous effect)) and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect)). More specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

Also, if the gaming state is a high base state (time saving state or probability variable state), select the variation pattern determination table D for loss, and change the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table D for loss PA1-3 (shortened Variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) loss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (simulated continuous effect 1 time) fluctuation pattern) and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo continuous effect)). More specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 80%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 10%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a big hit, the variation pattern is determined according to the type of the big win. The selection ratio of any one of the variation patterns for big wins (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied according to, for example, the gaming state, regardless of the type of the big win. By doing so, the variable display is performed in a variation pattern suitable for the game state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 59 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 004SG150 as shown in FIG. there is The game control data holding area 004SG150 shown in FIG. It has a control timer setting section 004SG153, a game control counter setting section 004SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 004SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 004SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) are stored in order of winning.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 004SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) are stored in the winning order.

As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 004SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for winning type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment is held data, It stores until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special figure reservation storage unit 004SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data representing the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on is reserved data. It stores until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 004SG151A and the second special figure suspension storage unit 004SG151B in this way can be used to execute a special figure game using the first special figure or a special figure game using the second special figure. It shows that it is suspended, and it becomes suspension information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in these special figure games.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning hole in this way, and the second starting winning hole When the holding information (second holding information) based on the establishment of the second start winning by the game ball passing (entering) is stored in association with the holding number in a separate holding storage unit, The variable display based on the second reserved storage information is preferentially executed over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The normal pattern pending storage unit 004SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 004SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it was detected by the gate switch 21, and the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 004SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 004SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 004SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 004SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 004SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 004SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 59 stores various data tables used for controlling the production operation in addition to the production control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns, and the like. there is

As an example, in the ROM 121, the production control CPU 120 controls production operations by various production devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, the production model, etc.). A performance control pattern table storing a plurality of types of performance control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern corresponds to various performance operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is composed of data indicating the content of the control. The effect control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display time effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 59 has a production control data holding area 004SG190 as shown in FIG. is provided. The effect control data holding area 004SG190 shown in FIG. 67(A) includes a effect control flag setting portion 004SG191, a effect control timer setting portion 004SG192, a effect control counter setting portion 004SG193, and a effect control buffer setting portion 004SG194. there is

The effect control flag setting unit 004SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 004SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 004SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations, such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 004SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 004SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 004SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 004SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 004SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the reception command buffer 004SG194A at the time of start winning as shown in FIG. In the startup winning command buffer 004SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 004SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, the start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (second 1 pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 004SG194A are associated with these starting opening winning designation commands and reservation storage number notification commands. , A storage area (entry) for storing separately in the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning reception command buffer 004SG194A at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 004SG194A at the time of starting winning (the entry with the youngest buffer number). go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , the pending storage number notification command.

The commands stored in the start winning receive command buffer 004SG194A shown in FIG. 1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. , and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 67(B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern in the first special figure reserved memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number "0" is deleted. ' are shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "0". , the commands stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 68, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. The backup data may be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after the restoration process (step S4) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the restoration condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after the initialization process (step S6). The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flow chart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 69 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Special pattern process processing)
FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 69 as the special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special game using the second special is preferentially executed over the special game using the first special. ). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (004SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (004SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number) (004SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation storage number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation storage number counter provided in game control counter setting section 004SG154, it should be able to specify the number of 1st special figure reservation storage. 004SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (004SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is set to "0" (004SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 004SGS101 (004SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reserved storage has reached the upper limit at 004SGS102 (004SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (004SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (004SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (004SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. In 004SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (004SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is set to "2" (004SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 004SGS103 and 004SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer is updated so as to add 1 (004SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "0", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (004SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of 004SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result and the judgment of the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 004SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for the fluctuation pattern determination and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (004SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way and the starting port buffer value are stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit (004SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 004SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 004SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (004SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "0", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

CPU103, following the processing of 004SGS111, for example by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, to the effect control board 12 Settings for transmitting the pending storage count notification command are made (004SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the processing of 004SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "0" (004SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "0" (Y at 004SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 004SGS114), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS116), then the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 70 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 72, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 004SGS141). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 004SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 004SGS141 (step 004SGS141; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "0" in the second special figure pending storage unit Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 004SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 004 SGS142, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, subtract 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" in the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 004SGS143).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 004SGS144), it moves to step 004SGS149.

On the other hand, at step 004SGS141, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 004SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 004SGS145). . The number of the first special figure reserved memory is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 004SGS145, if the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0" good. Thus, the processing of step 004SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 004SGS141, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "0" in the first special figure pending storage unit As such, the numerical data representing the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 004 SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 004 SGS146, by subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., subtract 1 from the 1st special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data in the first special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" in the first special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 004SGS147).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "0" (step 004SGS148), it moves to step 004SGS149.

In step 004 SGS149, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 62 is selected as a table used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, should be a "jackpot" or a "lose". to set. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss" , determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or "loss" (step 004 SGS150). In addition, in this step 004SGS150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is on, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a high probability state (probability variation state ), it is determined as a “big hit” if it falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, and if not, it is determined as a “loss”. Also, if the probability variation flag is off low probability state (low probability low base state if this characteristic part), if the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination falls within the range of 1 to 219, "big hit ”, and if not applicable, it is determined as “missing”.

As described above, in the display result determination table selected at step 004SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big win" corresponding to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time, so step 004SGS150 In the processing, depending on whether the gaming state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high-probability state, different determination data (determination value) is used to determine the special figure display result as a "big hit" By determining whether or not, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) as a “jackpot” with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

If it is judged to be a "jackpot" at step 004SGS150 (step 004SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on (step 004SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 63(A) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step 004 SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table A”, “probability variable jackpot B”, “probability variable jackpot C”, which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches, determines which of the plurality of types the jackpot type should be (step 004 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of step 004 SGS154, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is changed to a time-saving state (low probability high base state) and a probability variable state ( Which game state is to be controlled from among the high-probability-high base state) is determined before deriving the fixed special symbol as a variable display result. Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 004 SGS155), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable big hit" corresponding to non-probable variable big hit, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable big hit A, it is set to "0". If it is "probability variable B" corresponding to B, it is set to "2", and if it is "probability variable C" corresponding to probability variable big hit C, it is set to "3". After the processing of step 004SGS155, the process proceeds to step 004SGS156.

Further, when it is determined to be "missed" at step 004SGS150 (step 004SGS150; N), the processing of step 004SGS156 is executed without executing the processing of steps 004SGS152 to 004SGS155.

In step 004 SGS156, the CPU 103 determines in advance whether or not to control to the jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on). , Set a fixed special pattern. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" at step 004SGS150a, if the big hit type at step 004SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is displayed. Set as a fixed special pattern. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B", a special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "0" is set as the fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of kinds of symbols may be set as the confirmed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step 004SGS156, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 004SGS157), the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

It should be noted that when the reserved memory number of the special game using the first special figure in step 004SGS145 is "0" (step 004SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step 004SGS158), End the special symbol normal process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration specifying command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 73 is executed. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 73 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and also controls the effect control board 12. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit).

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random value update process (step S77), the demo effect control process (step S78) for executing the demo effect in the pachinko game machine 1 and the background display displayed on the image display device 5 are changed. A background display update process (step S79) for updating to another background display, and a menu display process (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state are executed. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

Incidentally, in the background display update process of the present embodiment, the first background display 004SG081 corresponding to the first effect mode, the second background display 004SG082 corresponding to the second effect mode, and the third background display 004SG082 corresponding to the third effect mode. One of the background display 004SG083 is selected and displayed. The first background display 004SG081 can be displayed when the game state is the normal state, the second background display 004SG082 can be displayed when the game state is the low-probability-high base state, and the third background display 004SG083 is the game. It can be displayed when the state is a high-precision high-base state.

In the menu display process, in addition to the process of displaying the menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, in the state where the menu screen is displayed, the speaker is displayed in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B. It includes processing for adjusting the volume output from 8L and 8R and processing for adjusting the amount of light (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 .

In the demonstration effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer until the customer waiting demonstration effect is started, such as a timer for waiting for the start of the customer waiting demo effect, based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command. The customer waiting demonstration effect may be started based on the time-out of the timer without starting the variable display. In addition, when the variable display is started while the customer waiting demonstration effect start waiting timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration effect start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration effect is interrupted, The display of the image display device 5 may be switched to the variable display of decorative patterns.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 73 as the effect control process processing. In the production control process shown in FIG. 74, the production control CPU 120 first starts the reservation storage display (first reservation display 004SG101 and second reservation display 004SG102) in the special figure reservation storage display area 5U of the image display device 5. A pending display update process for updating the display according to the stored contents of the received command buffer 004SG194A at the time of winning and performing shift display, etc., which will be described later, is executed (step S161). After executing the pending display update process, one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

In addition, in step S161, based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination for executing the pre-reading advance notice effect (for example, the effect of changing the display color of the pending display, etc.) A pre-reading notice setting process in which determination, setting, etc. are performed may be executed together with the pending display update process.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is changed to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Demonstration effect control processing)
Next, operation|movement of CPU120 for production|presentation control is demonstrated. 75 to 77 are flow charts showing an example of the process executed in step S78 of FIG. 73. FIG. In the demonstration effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the demonstration movie is being displayed (step 004SGS501). Whether or not the demonstration movie display is being executed is determined by whether or not a demonstration movie execution flag indicating that the demonstration movie display is being executed is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demonstration movie display is not being executed, it is determined whether or not the menu is being displayed (step 004SGS502). Whether or not the menu is being displayed is determined by whether or not a menu display flag indicating that the menu is being displayed is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is not being displayed, it is determined whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS503). Whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is on is determined by whether or not a touch ring on flag indicating that the touch ring 004SG035 is on is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that the touch ring 004SG035 is not turned on, it is determined whether or not it is waiting for the start of the demo movie (step 004SGS504). Whether or not it is waiting for the start of the demonstration movie is determined by whether or not a flag waiting for the start of the demonstration movie indicating waiting for the start of the demonstration movie is set.

If it is determined at step 004SGS504 that the demo movie is not waiting for start, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting demo specifying command has been received (step 004SGS505). Whether or not the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received is determined by whether or not the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag indicating reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command is set.

If it is determined in step 004 that the SGS 505 has received the customer waiting demo designation command, a timer value equivalent to about 120 seconds is used as the value of the demo movie start waiting timer for measuring the time until the demo movie display starts. (60000) is set (step 004SGS506), the demonstration movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS511), and the value of the guidance display start waiting timer for measuring the time until the guidance display starts is equivalent to about 30 seconds. A timer value (15000) is set (step 004SGS512), a guidance display start waiting flag indicating waiting for guidance display start is set (step 004SGS513), the demonstration effect control process is terminated, and the process returns to the effect control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS505 that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not been received, it is determined whether or not the power-on designation command has been received (step 004SGS507). Whether or not a power-on designation command has been received is determined by whether or not a power-on designation command reception flag indicating reception of a power-on designation command is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that the power-on designation command has been received, a timer value (30000) corresponding to about 60 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie start waiting timer (step 004 SGS508) to wait for the demo movie start. A flag is set (step 004SGS511), a timer value (15000) corresponding to about 30 seconds is set as the value of the guidance display start waiting timer (step 004SGS512), a guidance display start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS513), and the demo The performance control processing is ended and the processing returns to the performance control main processing.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that the power-on designation command has not been received, it is determined whether or not the power failure restoration designation command has been received (step 004SGS509). Whether or not a power failure restoration designation command has been received is determined by whether or not a power failure restoration designation command reception flag indicating reception of a power failure restoration designation command is set.

If it is determined in step 004 SGS509 that the power failure restoration designation command has not been received, the demonstration effect control processing is terminated and the effect control main processing is returned to. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS509 that the power failure recovery designation command has been received, a timer value (45000) corresponding to about 90 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie start waiting timer (step 004SGS510), and the demo movie A start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS511), a timer value (15000) corresponding to about 30 seconds is set as the value of the guidance display start waiting timer (step 004SGS512), and a guidance display start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS513). , the demonstration performance control processing is terminated and the processing returns to the performance control main processing.

If it is determined at step 004SGS504 that the game is waiting for the start of the demo movie, it is determined whether or not the end condition E2 has been established, that is, whether or not a start winning has occurred (step 004SGS514). Whether or not the end condition E2 is established is determined by whether or not a starting winning designation command reception flag indicating reception of the starting winning designation command is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that the end condition E2 is satisfied, the flag waiting for the start of the demonstration movie is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the timer waiting for the start of the demonstration movie is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), The guidance display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demonstration effect control process is terminated, and the process returns to the effect control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that the termination condition E2 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the termination condition E3 is satisfied, that is, whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS515). Whether or not the termination condition E3 is satisfied is determined by whether or not the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035 specified by the frame state display designation command has changed from off to on.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that the end condition E3 is satisfied, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demonstration movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the timer of the demonstration movie start waiting timer is set. The value is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), and the demonstration effect control processing is terminated. Then, it returns to the production control main processing.

If it is determined at step 004SGS515 that the termination condition E3 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the termination condition E4 is satisfied, that is, whether or not the menu display has started (step 004SGS517). Whether or not the termination condition E4 is satisfied is determined by whether or not the control of the menu display has started in the previous menu display processing of step 80 .

If it is determined at step 004SGS517 that the termination condition E4 is satisfied, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demonstration movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the timer of the demonstration movie start waiting timer is set. The value is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), and the demonstration effect control processing is terminated. Then, it returns to the production control main processing.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that the end condition E4 is not satisfied, the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is decremented by 1 (step 004SGS523), and it is determined whether or not guidance display start waiting is in progress (step 004SGS524). ). Whether or not the guidance display start waiting flag is set determines whether or not the guidance display start waiting flag is set.

If it is determined at step 004SGS524 that the guide display start waiting timer is determined, the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is subtracted by 1 (step 004SGS525), and whether or not the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is 0, that is, the guide display is performed. It is determined whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the start waiting timer started to count (step 004SGS526).

When it is determined in step 004SGS526 that the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is 0, the guidance display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS527), the guidance display is started (step 004SGS528), and the demonstration effect control process is executed. It ends and returns to the production control main processing.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that the guidance display start waiting timer is not set, or if it is determined in step 004SGS526 that the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is not 0, whether or not the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is 0, that is, It is determined whether or not a specified time (60 seconds, 90 seconds, or 120 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting (step 004 SGS529).

When it is determined in step 004 SGS529 that the timer value of the timer waiting for the start of the demonstration movie is not 0, the demonstration effect control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined at step 004SGS529 that the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is 0, the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004 SGS530), the demo movie running flag is set (step 004 SGS531), A timer value (27500) corresponding to about 55 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie timer for counting the time until the demo movie display ends (step 004SGS532), the demo movie display is started (step 004SGS533), The demonstration performance control processing is ended and the processing returns to the performance control main processing.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie is being displayed, it is determined whether any of the end conditions E2 to E4 is met, that is, any of the occurrence of start winning, turn-on of the touch ring 004SG035, and start of menu display. is identified (step 004SGS534).

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that none of the end conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied, the timer value of the demo movie timer is subtracted by 1 (step 004SGS535), and whether or not the timer value of the demo movie timer is 0 is checked. It is determined whether or not 55 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie timer started timing (step 004SGS536).

When it is determined in step 004 SGS536 that the timer value of the demo movie timer is not 0, the demonstration effect control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined at step 004SGS536 that the timer value of the demo movie timer is 0, the demo movie running flag is cleared (step 004 SGS537), the demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004 SGS538), and the demo movie A timer value (15000) corresponding to about 30 seconds is set as the timer value of the start waiting timer (step 004SGS539), guidance display is started (step 004SGS540), the demonstration effect control processing is ended, and the effect control main processing is returned to. do.

If it is determined at step 004SGS534 that any one of the termination conditions E2 to E4 has been established, the flag for demonstrating movie execution is cleared (step 004SGS541), and the timer value of the demo movie timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS542). Then, the display of the demo movie is terminated (step 004SGS543), and it is determined whether or not the termination condition E3 is satisfied, that is, whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS544).

If it is determined at step 004SGS544 that the termination condition E3 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the termination condition E4 is satisfied, that is, whether or not the menu display has started (step 004SGS545).

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that the end condition E4 is not established, that is, if the end condition E2 is established, the demonstration effect control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that the termination condition E3 is satisfied, the touch ring-on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demonstration movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the timer value of the demonstration movie start waiting timer is reset. It is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), and the demonstration effect control processing is terminated. It returns to production control main processing.

If it is determined at step 004SGS545 that the termination condition E4 is satisfied, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demonstration movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the timer value of the demonstration movie start waiting timer is reset. It is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), and the demonstration effect control processing is terminated. It returns to production control main processing.

If it is determined at step 004SGS502 that the menu is being displayed, it is determined whether or not end condition 2 has been established, that is, whether or not a start winning has occurred (step 004SGS546).

When it is determined in step 004SGS546 that the end condition 2 is established, that is, when the menu display is terminated due to the start winning, the menu display flag is cleared (step 004SGS547), the demonstration effect control processing is terminated, and effect control is performed. Return to main processing.

If it is determined in step 004SGS546 that end condition 2 is not established, it is determined whether or not menu display has ended (step 004SGS548). Whether or not the menu display has ended is determined by whether or not the control of the menu display has ended in the previous menu display processing in step S80.

When it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has not ended, the demonstration effect control processing is ended and the effect control main processing is returned to. On the other hand, if it is determined at step 004SGS548 that the menu display has ended, the menu display flag is cleared (step 004SGS549), and a timer value (60000) corresponding to about 120 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie start waiting timer. (Step 004SGS506), sets a flag waiting for the start of the demonstration movie (Step 004SGS511), sets a timer value (15000) corresponding to about 30 seconds as the value of the guide display start waiting timer (Step 004SGS512), and waits for the guide display start. A flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demonstration effect control process is terminated, and the process returns to the effect control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that the touch ring 004SG035 is on, it is determined whether or not end condition 2 is established, that is, whether or not a start winning has occurred (step 004SGS550).

If it is determined in step 004 SGS550 that the end condition 2 is established, the demonstration effect control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS550 that end condition 2 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not end condition 4 is satisfied, that is, whether or not menu display has started (step 004SGS551).

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that end condition 4 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is off (step 004SGS552). Whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is off is determined by whether or not the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035 has changed from on to off by the frame state display designation command.

If it is determined in step 004SGS552 that the touch ring 004SG035 is off, the touch ring on flag is cleared (step 004SGS553), and the timer value (60000) corresponding to about 120 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie start waiting timer. set (step 004SGS506), set a demonstration movie start waiting flag (step 004SGS511), set a timer value (15000) corresponding to about 30 seconds as the value of the guidance display start waiting timer (step 004SGS512), and start guidance display. A waiting flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demonstration effect control process is terminated, and the process returns to the effect control main process.

If it is determined at step 004SGS551 that end condition 4 is met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demonstration movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the timer value of the demonstration movie start waiting timer is reset. It is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), and the demonstration effect control processing is terminated. It returns to production control main processing.

(Type of production mode)
Next, the types of production modes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 shows (A1) and (A2) the first effect mode, (B1) and (B2) the second effect mode, and (C1) and (C2) the third effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 78 (A1), when the gaming state is the low base state, the decorative patterns (for the low base state) displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are circular numbers when viewed from the front. Numeral display part 004SG051 consisting of numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the pedestal part and the pedestal part for numbers, and 10 types corresponding to each number "0" to "9" of the number display part 004SG051 A character display portion 004SG052 in which characters (all characters are not shown) are displayed, a rectangular information pedestal in front view, and information about characters displayed in front of the information pedestal (for example, this embodiment In the form of , an information display portion 004SG053 consisting of a character name), a substantially square-shaped pedestal display portion 004SG054 displayed so as to surround the number display portion 004SG051, the character display portion 004SG052, and the information display portion 004SG053, consists of

In this embodiment, the information display section 004SG053 displays the name of the character displayed in the character display section 004SG052. As long as the information is related to the character displayed in the section 004SG052, various information other than the name (for example, information such as the character's nickname, personality, battle level, and items possessed by the character) may be displayed.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 78B1 and 78C1, when the gaming state is the high base state, the decorative symbols (for the high base state) displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are It is composed of a number display section 004SG061 consisting of numbers "0" to "9" and a substantially rectangular base display section 004SG064 that is displayed so as to surround the number display section 004SG061. The decorative symbols for the high base state are not provided with the character display portion and the information display portion unlike the decorative symbols for the low base state.

In addition, in the display area 5S provided in the upper left part of the image display device 5, the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decoration pattern are displayed. The small patterns consist of numbers "0" to "9" displayed in the small pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, respectively, and each number corresponds to a decoration pattern. In this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative patterns and the numbers of the small patterns correspond to each other, but the numbers of both patterns do not necessarily correspond to each other. It may be a number from '1' to '5' which is less than the number '0' to '9', or it may be a symbol or figure different from the number of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 78, the effect control CPU 120 has a first effect mode (see FIGS. 78(A1) and (A2)), a second effect mode (see FIGS. 78(B1) and (B2)) and a Any one of three effect modes (see (C1) and (C2) in FIG. 78) can be executed. The first effect mode is a effect mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to the low-probability-low base state. In addition, the second effect mode is an effect mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to the low probability and high base state, and the third effect mode is when the game state is controlled to the high probability and high base state. It is an executable production mode.

As shown in FIG. 78 (A1), in the first rendering mode, the decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background display of the decorative patterns is a daytime townscape. A first background display 004SG081 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 78A2, the variable display of the decorative design is a scroll display (first scroll display) in which the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R move linearly from top to bottom. executed.

For example, each decorative pattern is framed downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and then moves downward in a straight line to reach the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. is framed out downward from the bottom side of the . Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, a decorative pattern of "3") passes through the decorative pattern stop position set in the center of the vertical direction of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the subsequent decoration pattern (for example, the decoration pattern of "4") is displayed in the frame and moves downward. That is, when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized, but the preceding "3" decorative pattern After passing through the stop position, the preceding "3" decoration pattern and the subsequent "4" decoration pattern become visible. In this way, the number of decorative patterns increases in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and "0" to "9". ” is repeatedly displayed. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, thereby executing the scroll display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, in the display area 5S provided at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, the number of the first reserved memory, the number of the second reserved memory and the small pattern are displayed, and the special figure provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 In the pending storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F, the first pending display 004SG101 and the second pending display 004SG102 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display being executed are displayed. be done. In addition, since the number of these first reserved memories, the number of second reserved memories, the small symbols, the special figure reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5F are displayed in common in all production modes, the explanation is omitted below. do.

As shown in FIG. 78(B1), in the second effect mode, the decorative patterns for the high base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background display of the decorative patterns is the scenery of the town in the evening. A second background display 004SG082 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 78B2, the variable display of the decorative design is performed by rotational display in which the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are rotated around a rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction. be.

For example, the decorative pattern in the second production mode has a first surface and a second surface opposite to the first surface. decoration pattern) is displayed. On the other hand, when the first side faces the front, it cannot be specified whether the subsequent decorative pattern (for example, "4" decorative pattern) is displayed on the second side. In other words, since the pedestal display portion 004SG064 has a low transmittance (opaqueness), the decoration pattern displayed on the second surface cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decoration pattern).

In addition, the decorative pattern can be rotated in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view), and by rotating in the order of the first surface, the second surface, the first surface, the second surface, etc. , the numbers increase in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", and so on, returning to "0" after "9", and the updated display from "0" to "9" is displayed. Repeatedly. In other words, the decoration symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in each of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, so that the rotation display of the decoration symbols is executed.

In addition, in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing image 004SG201 consisting of a right-handed arrow and the characters "Right-handed" is displayed to notify the player to promote the right-handed operation. In the lower left part, a time saving remaining display 004SG202 (in this example, characters of "remaining XX times", XX=0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time saving control is executed is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 78(C1), in the third rendering mode, decorative patterns for the high base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background display of the decorative patterns is a nighttime townscape. A third background display 004SG083 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 78(C2), the variable display of the decorative design is a scroll display (third scroll display) in which the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R move linearly from top to bottom. A variable display is performed.

For example, each decorative pattern is framed downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and then moves downward in a straight line to reach the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. is framed out downward from the bottom side of the . Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, "3" decorative pattern) passes through the decorative pattern stop position set in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Then, the subsequent decoration pattern (for example, the decoration pattern of "4") is displayed in the frame and moves downward. That is, when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized, but the preceding "3" decorative pattern After passing through the stop position, the preceding "3" decoration pattern and the subsequent "4" decoration pattern become visible. In this way, the number of decorative patterns increases in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and "0" to "9". ” is repeated. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, thereby executing the scroll display of the decorative symbols.

Further, in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing image 004SG201 including a right arrow and characters of "Right-handed" is displayed for informing the player to promote the right-handed operation.

In addition, the decoration pattern and the small pattern are different in the form of variable display. For example, during the period in which the decorative patterns are displayed by scrolling at high speed, one decorative pattern is frame-in displayed from the upper side of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and is displayed out of the frame from the lower side. It takes time. In other words, a predetermined period of time is required until one decoration pattern is displayed and the display of the decoration pattern is finished. On the other hand, the small symbols are switched (updated) a plurality of times (for example, five times) to display the small symbols in the losing combination during the predetermined period.

In addition, in the scroll display in the first production mode and the third production mode, and the rotating display in the second production mode, the decorative pattern changes the variable display speed from low speed to high speed at the start of the variable display, and at the stop of the variable display While changing from high speed to low speed, that is, the variable display speed can be changed, the small symbols are variably displayed at a constant speed from the start of the variable display to the stop.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a form in which the effect mode can be the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be possible to execute four or more types of presentation modes. In particular, it may be possible to execute a plurality of types of production modes corresponding to one game state (for example, low-probability-low base state).

(Example of operation of each part at the start of variable display)
Next, an operation example of each part at the start of variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 82. FIG. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first effect mode. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third effect mode. FIG. 82 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first effect mode and (B) the second and third effect modes.

In the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, the diagrams represented by lines other than solid lines (for example, dashed-dotted lines, dotted lines, etc.) and arrows without symbols are displayed on the display screen. It is not intended to show an image that has been processed, but to explain the movement of the image.

(Operation example of variable display in the first production mode)
First, an operation example of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns is started in the first effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG.

FIG. 79(A) shows a state in which, in the first effect mode, the decorative symbols scrolled in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 004SG101 are displayed in special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2").

Then, as shown in FIG. 79(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in a losing combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed as active. The area 5F is erased, and an erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 79(C), when variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, variable display of small symbols is started, The decorative design variation start action is started in the order of the left decorative design display area 5L, the right decorative design display area 5R, and the middle decorative design display area. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first pending displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 004SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 004SG103 (see FIG. 79(D)). In addition, the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) is started (see FIG. 79(C)), and movement (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 79(D)).

The erase effect 004SG110 displayed in FIG. 79B continues for a while after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started. is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 79(E), when the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left ends the shift display to move to the active display area 5F, it is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L. When the action of the decoration pattern (reversing movement of the character) is completed and the upward movement is started, as shown in FIG. be started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(F), the decoration symbol displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R (character reversal motion) is completed and the rising action is started. As shown in 79(G), downward movement is started to start scroll display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(G), when the action of the decoration symbol displayed in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C (character reversal motion) is completed, the upward action is started, and the upward movement is completed, As shown in FIG. 79(H), downward movement is started and scroll display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started and the variable display of the small pattern is started, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, The variable display of the decoration symbols stopped and displayed is started in the order of the right decoration design display area 5R and the middle decoration design display area, but the first suspension display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. Until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed, the scroll display of the decorative designs displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is not started.

In other words, after the movement of the first pending display 004SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and the active display 004SG103 is displayed, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity. Also, from the start of the shift display along with the start of the variable display to the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, a variable start action is performed in which the characters are reversed, so the variable display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the It should be noted that the operation mode of the variable start action can be changed in various ways.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases proportionally, and fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes approximately 90% at high speed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 79(F) and 79(G), the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L are set at low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, and after passing through the medium speed shown in FIG. (I) becomes the high speed shown in (J) and (K). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases. Further, as shown in FIGS. 79(G) to 80(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5R are also slowed immediately after the start of the variable display, and the middle A fade-out display is executed in which the speed becomes faster and the transmittance increases with the acceleration.

(Operation example of variable display in the third production mode)
Next, an operation example of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the third effect mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 81(A) shows a state in which, in the third effect mode, the decorative designs scrolled in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 004SG101 are displayed in special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2"). Also, the small symbols and the right-handed informing image 004SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols. (See FIG. 81(A))

Then, as shown in FIG. 81(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in a losing combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed as an active display. The area 5F is erased, and an erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 81(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the variable display of the small pattern is started, but the high Since it is in the base state, the decorative symbol variation start action (see FIG. 81(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first pending displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 004SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 004SG103 (see FIG. 81(C)). In addition, the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) is started (see FIG. 81(C)), and the display area moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 81(D)).

Note that the erase effect 004SG110 displayed in FIG. 81B continues for a while even after the start of the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 81(C), when the shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, The scrolling display of the decorative designs displayed in 5R is started (see FIG. 81(D)). In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative designs displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is started all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. However, until the shift display in which the first suspended display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, the scroll display of the decorative pattern display area 5L, The scrolling display of the decorative designs displayed in 5C and 5R does not start.

In other words, after the movement of the first pending display 004SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and the active display 004SG103 is displayed, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. In proportion to this, the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes approximately 90% at high speed. For example, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are slowed immediately after the start of variable display, as shown in FIGS. , the speed shown in FIG. 81(H). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases.

In the present embodiment, the transmittance of the decorative design is set to the first value (0%) when the decorative design is stopped and displayed. Although the second value (90%) has been exemplified in the high-speed scroll display, the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the first value is the minimum value of the transmittance, and may be any value that allows the decorative pattern to be clearly visible. The first value may be set to 5% instead of 0% for the most clearly displayed state. Further, the second value is the maximum value of the transmittance, and may be any value that makes the decorative pattern almost invisible. If there is no state, the second value may be set to 100% instead of 90%. That is, the first value and the second value can be changed variously.

As described above, in the low base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variation start action of the decorative symbol while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and the special figure pending storage display area 5U. The scroll display of the decoration pattern is not started until the shift display for switching the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F as the active display 004SG103 is completed.

By doing so, along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and during the shift display, the decorative symbols are displayed in a moving manner. By performing the variable start action to operate in a different mode, the period required for the shift display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is performed in the high base state which is more advantageous than the low base state, the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the high base state can be excited.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 in the effect control process processing of step S76, and the first type of variation pattern designation command ( For example, when variable display is executed based on a non-reach fluctuation pattern designation command) and when variable display is executed based on a second type of fluctuation pattern designation command (e.g., reach fluctuation pattern designation command), Since the common shift display can be performed, the common shift display is performed even when the variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, so the shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the low base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variation start action of the decorative symbol while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and the special figure pending storage display. Until the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the area 5U is switched and displayed as the active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F, the scroll display of the decoration pattern is not started, while in the high base state , The effect control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the decorative symbol variation start action is not performed when the pending shift display is performed with the start of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, In the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variation start action of the decorative pattern while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and the first from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U. The scrolling display of the decorative symbols may not be started until the first suspended display 004SG101 displayed in the display area is switched and displayed as the active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing so, along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and during the shift display, the decorative symbols are displayed in a moving manner. By performing the variable start action to operate in a different mode, the period required for the shift display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is performed in the high base state which is more advantageous than the low base state, the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the high base state can be excited.

In addition, even in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display of the decoration pattern based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the effect control process processing of step S76. When variable display is executed based on the variation pattern specification command (e.g., non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (e.g., reach variation pattern specification command) Variable display is performed based on Since it is possible to perform a common shift display regardless of when the display is performed, a common shift display is performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, thereby reducing shift display patterns. can do.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed with the start of the variable display of the special design, the decorative design display areas are arranged in the order of left, right, and middle. Although the form in which the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in 5L, 5C, and 5R is started is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display is started along with the start of the variable display of the special patterns. After the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to , to the active display, the scroll display of the decorative design displayed in any one of the left, right, and middle decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts. If so, the scroll display of any one of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be started while the shift display is being performed.

(Operating mode of each part at the start of variable display)
As shown in FIG. 82 (A), in the first effect mode, when the variable display based on the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 is executed with the number of pending memories being "2" or less, the variable display of the special symbols is performed. Along with the start, the small patterns are variably displayed at high speed, and the variation start action is performed in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. After that, the scrolling display is started. In addition, the shift display of the pending display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scroll display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started.

Further, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display to display at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed to fade out display. It will be done. This fade-out display period A21 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

When the stop timing of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative design in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative design in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative design in the middle decorative design display area 5C are gradually decelerated in this order. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, and the display fades in. This fade-in display period is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

After that, the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative designs in the middle decorative design display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. Further, when the temporary stop display is displayed, the variable stop action is performed, and the loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative pattern ends and is stopped and displayed. After that, the next variable display can be started after a pattern fixing period (for example, 500 ms).

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), in the second effect mode and the third effect mode, when the variable display based on the shortened non-reach variation pattern PA1-3 is executed, the variable display of the special symbols Along with the start, the small patterns are variably displayed at high speed, and the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R simultaneously start rotating display or scrolling display without performing the fluctuation start action. Further, a shift display of the pending display is performed, and after the shift display is completed, the scroll display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started.

Further, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display to display at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed to fade out display. It will be done. This fade-out display period A23 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

When the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually decelerated all at once to be displayed at a low speed, and the transmittance is proportional to the decrease in speed. (Transparency) is also lowered and fade-in is displayed. This fade-in display period B23 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

After that, the decoration symbols in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed all at once. In other words, the variable stop action and the loop action such as those in the first production mode and the second production mode are not executed, and the variable display is terminated as it is, and the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed together with the small pattern. After that, the next variable display can be started after a pattern fixing period (for example, 500 ms).

Further, the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first effect mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when the scroll display is executed in the second effect mode or the scroll display in the third effect mode. (fade-out display period A23<fade-out display period A21; see FIGS. 82A and 82B).

In addition, in the first effect mode, the mode shown in FIG. 82(A) is obtained even when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. Also, in the second production mode and the third production mode, the mode shown in FIG. 82(B) is obtained even when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

(Operation example of SP reach production)
Next, an operation example of the SP ready-to-win effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. FIG. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach effect in the low base state. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach effect in the high base state. In addition, in FIG. 84, an operation example of the ready-to-win effect in the third effect mode will be explained, but the same ready-to-win effect may be executed in the second effect mode, or a different ready-to-win effect may be executed. .

As shown in FIG. 83(A), when the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern is started in the low base state, the effect control CPU 120 causes a plurality of characters to appear step by step based on the variable display result. Whether or not to execute a step-up effect, and a specific step-up effect display pattern (see FIG. 83(B)) in which the background display is a rainbow form informing the determination of a big hit is displayed at a predetermined step in the step-up effect. determine whether or not to When execution of the step-up effect and display of the specific step-up effect display pattern are determined, the step-up effect is started when a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable display, and the specific step-up effect is performed at the predetermined step. A display pattern is displayed (see FIG. 83(B)). If it is decided not to execute the step-up effect, or if it is decided to execute the step-up effect but it is not decided to display the specific step-up effect display pattern, the step does not include the display of the rainbow background. The up effect display pattern is displayed.

Next, after the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative design of the same number as the decorative design temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R. Then, the state of variable display of the decoration pattern becomes a predetermined ready-to-win state, and the ready-to-win effect is started (see FIG. 83(C)). At this time, decoration designs are displayed at high speed in the middle decoration design display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070 indicating the type of the SP reach performance is displayed to notify the reach title, and to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled. An SP ready-to-win effect (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character, etc.) is started as a effect (see FIG. 83(D)). In the SP reach effect, a fourth background display 004SG084 representing the universe corresponding to the SP reach effect, which is an image different from the first background display 004SG081 which is the normal background display, is displayed (Fig. 83 (E) (F )reference). It should be noted that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image having a different aspect according to the type of SP ready-to-win effect.

Next, during the period from the timing when the battle is settled until the predetermined operation validity period elapses, an operation prompting display 004SG071 consisting of characters "Press!!" prompting the operation of the push button 31B and a button display imitating the push button 31B are displayed. 004SG072 is displayed (see FIG. 83(G)).

Then, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation effective period, or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period elapses, the operation prompting display 004SG071 and the button display 004SG072 are hidden, and the process ends. . Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined luminescent color while the movable body 32 descends from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect display 004SG073 emphasizing the movable body 32 is displayed. At the same time, a predetermined production effect sound is output, and it is informed that the game state is controlled to a big hit (see FIG. 83(H)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background display. , after the combination of the confirmed jackpot symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 83(I)), the fourth background display 004SG084 is hidden and the first After the background display 004SG081 is displayed and the combination of the jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped while the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, The big hit display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 83(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the movable body 32 does not descend from the origin position to the performance position, and after the result notification display 004SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. (See FIG. 83(K)) In the notification effect, when the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP ready-to-win effect is displayed as the background display, a combination of confirmed symbols that are not a big hit combination (for example, "232 ”) is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 83(L)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 83(M), when the notification effect (SP ready-to-win effect) ends, the fourth background display 004SG084 disappears, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed. is displayed, the combination of the deviated fixed symbols (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed, then the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the deviated display result is derived and displayed (Fig. 83 ( M)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(A), when the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern is started in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the specific character to appear and It is determined whether or not to display a specific cut-in effect display pattern (see FIG. 84(D)) in which the background display is a rainbow mode informing the determination of a big hit, and the determination result is stored.

After the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative design having the same number as the decorative design temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R. Then, the mode of variable display of the decoration pattern becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode, and the ready-to-win effect is started (see FIG. 84(B)). At this time, decoration designs are displayed at high speed in the middle decoration design display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070 indicating the type of the SP reach performance is displayed to notify the reach title, and to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled. An SP ready-to-win effect (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character, etc.) is started as an effect (see FIG. 84(C)).

Here, when the display of the specific cut-in effect display pattern is determined at the start of the variable display, after the reach title display 004SG070 is displayed, the cut-in effect is started with the specific cut-in effect display pattern (FIG. 84). (D)). In addition, if it is decided not to execute the cut-in effect, or if it is decided to execute the cut-in effect but not to display the specific cut-in effect display pattern, the background will be cut in a display color other than rainbow. In display is displayed.

Then, in the SP reach effect, a fourth background display 004SG084 representing the universe corresponding to the SP reach effect, which is an image different from the first background display 004SG081 which is the normal background display, is displayed (Fig. 84 (E) (F)). It should be noted that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image having a different aspect according to the type of SP ready-to-win effect.

84(G) to (M) differ only in that the third background display 004SG083 for high base is used in FIGS. Since it is almost the same as M), a detailed description is omitted here.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a specific step-up effect with a rainbow background in the low base state (see FIG. 83(B)), as a specific effect for notifying the confirmation of the big hit. In the base state, it is possible to execute a specific cut-in effect including a cut-in with a rainbow-like background (see FIG. 84(D)). In the specific step-up effect and the specific cut-in effect, the background is the same rainbow pattern, but the display pattern is different, but the board lamp and the side lamp light emission pattern are common. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the board lamp and the side lamp based on a common luminance data table (common table), so that the data capacity for light emission can be reduced.

(Customer waiting demonstration [demonstration movie display])
Next, the customer waiting demonstration effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 91. FIG. FIG. 85 shows (A) the conditions for starting and ending demonstration movie display, and (B) the configuration of the demonstration movie display. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an operation example of each unit during display of the demo movie. FIG. 87 is a transition diagram of the customer waiting demonstration effect. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an operation example of displaying a demo movie. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an operation example of displaying a demo movie. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a display example of the first scene (company name) in (A), the fourth scene (attention 1) in (B), and the fourth scene (attention 2) in (C). FIG. 91 is a diagram comparing the display modes of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (calling attention 1 and 2), the number of pending memories, and small symbols.

"Customer waiting demonstration effect" is for notifying that the effect control CPU 120 is in a game waiting state in which no game (for example, variable display, big win game, small win game, etc.) is being performed, that is, a customer waiting state. , which is performed mainly by displaying a demonstration movie display (see FIGS. 88 and 89) on the image display device 5. FIG.

The demo movie display is a display for notifying the player that the machine is an empty machine where the player is not playing a game by displaying a demo movie display different from the background display during the game. A company name scene that informs whether the game machine is related to the company, what kind of story the pachinko game machine 1 is, what characters appear, what kind of production and what kind of specifications. It consists of a model introduction scene that tells whether there is a pachinko game machine 1, a model introduction scene that tells the title and subtitle of the pachinko game machine 1, a warning scene that tells cautions during the game before the game, and the like. In the demo movie display, in addition to the contents described above, for example, in a model introduction scene, presentation of effects, explanation of model specifications, etc. may be performed, and the contents can be changed in various ways.

As shown in FIGS. 85A to 87, the "customer waiting demonstration effect" (hereinafter also referred to as demo movie display or demonstration display) is executed by the effect control CPU 120 when one of the following start conditions S1 to S6 is satisfied. It is started based on having determined that it was materialized. Specifically, the start condition S1 is established when a first time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command output from the main board 11 upon completion of the variable display. S2 is established when a second time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed after receiving the power-on designation command output from the main board 11 due to power-on with initialization, and the start condition S3 is established when the third time (for example, 90 seconds) has passed since the power failure recovery designation command output from the main board 11 was received due to the power being turned on without initialization, and the start condition S4 is established when the fourth time (for example, 120 seconds) has passed since the touch sensor (touch ring 004SG035) was turned off, and the start condition S5 is when the fifth time ( For example, 120 seconds) has passed, and the start condition S6 is satisfied when the sixth time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed (for example, 2 weeks) after the demo movie display via the conditions S1 to S5 has ended. After the first step, the demo movie display is started 30 seconds after the end of the demonstration of waiting for customers, similarly to the condition of S6).

The "demonstration movie display" ends when the effect control CPU 120 determines that one of the following end conditions E1 to E4 is established. Specifically, the end condition E1 is satisfied when the end time (for example, 55 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the demo movie display, the end condition E2 is satisfied when the starting prize is won, and the end condition E3 is satisfied. is established when the touch ring 004SG035 is turned on, and the end condition E4 is established when the menu screen display start operation is performed.

In addition, although the demo movie is not being displayed, the end conditions E2 to E4 are met when the first to sixth hours are being counted in the waiting state for the establishment of the start condition (demonstration movie start waiting period). When the start conditions S1, S4, and S5 are met, the clocking is stopped (reset).

Also, during the waiting period for the start of the demo movie, the demo movie display is not displayed, but the menu guide display 004SG401 and the sound volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 are displayed on various background displays as guide displays related to effect adjustment. (See FIG. 94 (A4) and FIG. 180).

In addition, the guidance display related to the production adjustment is, for example, a menu that allows customization of various production functions such as the vibration function, the V flash function, the auto button function, and the production mode provided for the push button 31B, and the production function adjustment such as the customized reset. In addition to the menu guidance display 004SG401 that guides the operation of the push button 31B for displaying the screen and the sound volume/light quantity guidance display 004SG402 that guides the button operation for adjusting the sound volume/light quantity, it is possible to adjust effects other than the above. Guidance display may be included.

Further, when the termination condition E3 is satisfied, the termination condition E2 is rarely satisfied. In other words, since the ball-hitting handle 30 must be operated in order for the start winning to occur, basically, the termination condition E3 is satisfied before the termination condition E2, but in the following irregular case, There is a possibility that the termination condition E2 is satisfied without the termination condition E3 being satisfied.

Irregular Case 1: The player calls a clerk based on the occurrence of grapes (so-called ball clogging between nails), but the demo movie display starts before the clerk comes, and then the grapes are released. Thus, when a starting prize is generated, the display of the demonstration movie ends without operating the batting operation handle 30, so the end condition E2 is satisfied without the end condition E3 being satisfied.

Irregular case 2: When the on state of the touch sensor cannot be confirmed by the effect control CPU 120 due to some trouble in the CPU 103 or the trouble in the effect control CPU 120, start winning in a state where the on state of the touch sensor cannot be confirmed may occur, the termination condition E2 is satisfied without the termination condition E3 being satisfied.

It should be noted that the end condition E3, which is established when the touch sensor is turned on, may not be set as the end condition. E2 is established and the demonstration movie display ends.

As shown in FIG. 85(B), the demo movie display consists of four scenes, the first scene to the fourth scene. Specifically, the first scene is a "company name" part (company name part) that displays the name and slogan of the company involved in the development, manufacture, sales, etc. of the company (Fig. 88 (A) ( B)).

The second scene is composed of "model introduction 1" to "model introduction 3" parts (model introduction 1 to 3 parts) in which the story of the performance performed in the pachinko game machine is introduced. In the "model introduction 1" part (model introduction 1 part), ally characters appearing in the presentation and their names are displayed (see FIGS. 88(C)-(F)). In the "model introduction 2-1" part (model introduction 2-1 part), a confrontation scene between friendly characters and enemy characters and narration characters are displayed (see FIGS. 88(G) and (H)). -2" part (model introduction 2-2 part) displays a confrontation scene between a friend character and an enemy character and narration characters (see FIGS. 88(J) and (K)), and a "model introduction 2-3" part. In (model introduction part 2-3), a confrontation scene between a friendly character and an enemy character and narration characters are displayed (see FIGS. 89(M) to (O)). In the "Model introduction 3-1" part (Model introduction 3-1 part), the "Model introduction 2-1" part (Model introduction 2-1 part) and the "Model introduction 2-2" part (Model introduction 2-2 part) ), the cut-in display of the friendly character is displayed without characters (see FIG. 89 (I)), and in the "model introduction 3-2" part (model introduction 3-2 part), "model introduction 2- 2" (model introduction 2-2 part) and the "model introduction 2-3" part (model introduction 2-3 part), the cut-in display of the friendly character is displayed without characters (Fig. 89 ( L)).

The third scene consists of a "model name main title name" part (main title part) and a "model subtitle name" part (subtitle parts 1 and 2) in which the main title name of the pachinko machine is displayed ( See FIGS. 89(P) to (V)). In addition, in the "model main title name" part (main title part), the main title name "FEVER POWERFUL" is displayed, and in the "model subtitle name" part, the subtitle name "II/All members meeting Ver." Is displayed.

The "machine model main title name" is the theme of the pachinko machine 1, and expresses the theme of the machine in one word. and any supplementary information added to the model main title name (for example, "II" indicating that it is the second work of this title, the headline "All members set Ver.", etc.), and the content can be various. Can be changed.

The fourth scene is composed of a "caution 1" part (caution 1 part) and a "caution 2" part (caution 2 part) that call the player's attention (Fig. 89 (W) to (X)). In addition, in the "Attention 1" part (Attention 1 part), a warning display is displayed to prevent addiction to the game, and in the "Attention 2" part (Attention 2 part), the pachinko machine A caution display is displayed to prevent physical accidents.

As shown in FIG. 86, in the demonstration movie display, various demonstration images are displayed in order of the first scene, the second scene, the third scene, and the fourth scene after the start condition is established. The display period tb2a of the first scene is about 10 seconds (tb2a=10 seconds), the display period tb2b of the second scene is about 30 seconds (tb2b=30 seconds), and the display period tb2c of the third scene is about 10 seconds (tb2c=10 seconds). 10 seconds), the display period tb2d of the fourth scene is about 10 seconds (tb2d=5 seconds), and the display period tb of one demo movie display is about 55 seconds (tb2=55 seconds). Then, as shown in FIG. 87, when end conditions E2 to E4 are not met during display of the demo movie and the first demo movie display ends, that is, when any one of the start conditions S1 to S5 is met. When the first demo movie display that has been started ends under the end condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) is entered. After that, when 30 seconds, which is the sixth time, has passed since the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) has passed, it is assumed that the start condition S6 is satisfied, and the demonstration movie display is started again. Thereafter, the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demonstration movie period) are repeatedly executed until the end conditions E2 to E4 of the demonstration movie display are completed.

While the demo movie display is being displayed on the image display device 5, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the sound volume/light quantity guidance display 004SG402 are not displayed, and the display of the reserved memory number and the small pattern is maintained (Fig. 88, See Figure 89). In this embodiment, the number of pending memories and the small symbols are displayed while the demo movie is being displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The numbers and small patterns may be hidden.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the board lamps (attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f) and frame lamps (main lamp 9a) during the period in which the image display device 5 displays the demo movie. and side lamps 9b), light emission control is performed based on a brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration to be described later), while button lamps 9e are white lighting that does not correspond to demonstration movie display. Light emission control is performed based on a brightness data table for use (for default) (a lamp data table to be described later: button white lighting). Also, BGM is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R, but music for displaying a demo movie may be output.

The luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration to be described later) is composed of a plurality of luminance data tables (grandchild tables to be described later).

Specifically, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the company name part is used as a brightness data table (grandchild table to be described later) of the main lamp 9a constituting a brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (a lamp data table to be described later: customer waiting demo). , luminance data table corresponding to model introduction part 1 to model introduction 2-3 part period, luminance data table corresponding to main title part period, luminance data table corresponding to subtitle part 1 period, subtitle part 2 period , and a brightness data table corresponding to the periods of alert 1 part to alert 2 part, and light emission control is performed based on the corresponding brightness data table in each period.

Also, as a brightness data table (grandchild table to be described later) of the side lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the decoration lamp 9f, which constitutes the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (the lamp data table to be described later: the customer waiting demo). , brightness data table corresponding to the period of the company name part, brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 1 part, brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 2-1 part, model introduction 3-1 part period Corresponding brightness data table, brightness data table corresponding to model introduction 2-2 part period, brightness data table corresponding to model introduction 3-2 part period, brightness data table corresponding to model introduction 2-3 part period , Luminance data table corresponding to the period of the main title part, Luminance data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 1, Luminance data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 2, Corresponding to the period of alert 1 part to alert 2 part In each period, light emission control is performed based on the corresponding luminance data table.

The control using the brightness data table while the demo movie display is being displayed will be described in detail later.

(Operation example of demo movie display)
Next, an operation example of displaying a demo movie will be described with reference to FIGS. 88, 89, and 176-178. In FIG. 176, (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing operation examples of character display and light emission mode in each scene. FIG. 177 is a diagram showing an operation example of (A) the first scene, (B) the third scene, and (C) the fourth scene. FIG. 178 is a comparison table showing character animation display.

In addition, an example of expression indicating a display mode used in the following description will be described.
"Fade-out display" is a display that increases the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image as time elapses, while "fade-in display" increases the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image as time elapses. It is a display that decreases the transparency).

"Animation display" is, for example, dynamic display (moving image display) that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the image one frame (one frame) before. , and at least one of the position, size, color, and transmittance of the display image may be changed from the image of one frame before so that the visibility can be changed. In other words, "animation display" includes not only displays involving image displacement such as "moving display", "rotating display", "enlarged display", "reduced display", "frame-in display" and "frame-out display", but also " It also includes displays such as fade-out display and fade-in display, which do not involve image displacement but change the display mode such as color tone. In this embodiment, the number of still images (the number of frames) displayed in one-second moving images is 30, that is, the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Still display" is the opposite of animation display, and is a non-dynamic display (still image) that does not change the visibility of the image in comparison with the image one frame before. display).

In addition, an example of the expression indicating the light emission mode used in the following description will be described.
"Wave lighting" is a light emission pattern that sequentially changes the luminance of luminance data. It is a pattern in which the color changes at a predetermined cycle, or light is emitted in such a manner that a predetermined color moves within the light emitting area. Also, it is used when simply keeping the lamp lit is boring as a performance element, or when the image display device 5 or the like is to be emphasized rather than the lamp as in the following flash, and the lamp is not too conspicuous.

“Flash (flashing)” is a light emission pattern that alternately uses high luminance data and low luminance data (including extinguishment). This is a light emission pattern used for emphasizing, which can greatly change the brightness visually recognized by the player depending on the intensity of the light.

"Rainbow" is a pattern commonly used when the display of FIG. 83(B) is executed in the low base state or when the effect of FIG. 84(D) is executed in the high base state. In this embodiment, a rainbow wave pattern is used in which wave lighting is performed by sequentially changing luminance data of seven colors. A rainbow flash pattern may be used by alternating luminance data.

As shown in FIGS. 88A and 88B, when the conditions for starting the demo movie display are established, the display of the first scene is started. As will be described later, depending on the start condition, the switching display may be displayed before the display of the first scene is started. In the first scene, a company name background display 004SG301 consisting of white characters is displayed, and a company name display 004SG302 mainly consisting of a blue corporate slogan display 004SG302A and a blue corporate logo display 004SG302B is displayed at the center of the screen. After being displayed in size, it is gradually enlarged and faded in while decreasing the transmittance (transparency), so that the company name display 004SG302 appears to move from the back side of the display screen toward the front side. can be shown to It should be noted that the display area 5S in the upper left portion of the display screen maintains the number of pending memories and the small symbols displayed. In this way, the small symbols are displayed even when the decoration symbols are not displayed, so that the player can be made to recognize that the variable display is in a stopped state.

Also, in the first scene, the board lamp and the frame lamp (except for the button lamp 9e), for example, are linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the company name display 004SG302 in a light-emitting manner (for example, lighting, blinking, extinguishing, color, brightness, etc.) change. For example, as the transmittance of the company name display 004SG302 decreases, the brightness of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) may increase or the color may change.

To explain in detail using FIG. 177(A), first, after the company name display 004SG302 is displayed at the center of the screen in the “small” size, the transmittance (transparency) is reduced while gradually enlarging for about 3 seconds. (See FIG. 177 (A1)), and when displayed at the specified position, the company name display 004SG302 collides with the wall and bounces back, and then bounce display is displayed at the specified position. (See FIG. 177 (A2)). After being statically displayed at a prescribed position in the center of the screen for about 4 seconds (see FIG. 177 (A3)), it is faded out for 1 second (see FIG. 177 (A4)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 176A1, the board lamp and the frame lamp (except for the button lamp 9e) flash white when the company name display 004SG302 is displayed, and then light white. In this way, white flashing at the start of the demo movie display emphasizes that the display of the company name display 004SG302 is started. As the company name display 004SG302 expands and fades in, the brightness increases (white fade-in lighting), and after the white flashes in conjunction with the bounce display of the company name display 004SG302, it turns to white lighting. , and the luminance decreases in conjunction with the fade-out display (white fade-out lighting).

Next, when the display of the "Model Introduction 1" part of the second scene is started, friendly characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D appearing in various effects and character displays 004SG501A to 004SG501D showing the names of each character are sequentially faded in ( 88(C)-(F)). As shown in FIG. 176(A2), the board lamps and frame lamps (except for the button lamp 9e) light up in a color corresponding to the character according to the appearance of each character and the fade-in display of the name, and then light up in white. do.

Next, when the display of the "Introduction of Models 2-1" part of the second scene is started, an animation of the enemy character 004SG510A appearing in various effects is displayed, and the text "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" Display 004SG511A is faded-in (animated) (see FIGS. 88(G) and (H)). Next, when the display of the "model introduction 3-1" part is started, the background display 004SG503 showing the town and the friend character 004SG500A are displayed, and a cut-in display showing the situation where the friend character is flying and rushing in the town is displayed. is displayed (see FIG. 88(I)).

Next, when the display of the "Introduction of models 2-2" part of the second scene is started again, the ally character 004SG500A, the enemy character 004SG510A, and the character display 004SG511B reading "Protect the city from the enemy!" ) (see FIGS. 88(J) and (K)). After that, when the display of "model introduction 3-2" is started, the friendly character 004SG500A is enlarged and a cut-in display is displayed in which the effect display 004SG504 is displayed in the background (see FIG. 88(L)). .

Next, when the display of the "Introduction of Models 2-3" part of the second scene is started again, the image of friendly character 004SG500A and enemy character 004SG510A fighting and character display 004SG511C reading "Don't lose!" are faded in. (animation display) (see FIGS. 89(M) to (N)). After that, all of the ally characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and the character display 004SG511D reading "All together!" are faded in (animated) (see FIG. 89(O)).

In addition, the animation display of the friend characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and the enemy character 004SG510A in the second scene is an animation display accompanied by actions such as expansion and contraction of the friend characters and fighting. , 004SG511A to 004SG511D, for example, fade-in display is performed at the start of display, and the degree of change in visibility is lower than that of the animation display accompanied by movement such as that of teammate characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D.

Also, as shown in FIG. 176(A2), in the second scene, the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) display "model introduction 3-1" and "model introduction 3-2". Sometimes it flashes green, but basically it is lit in white waves, and in conjunction with the animation display (fade-in display) of various character displays 004SG501A to 004SG501D, 004SG511A to 004SG511D, the lighting mode (for example, lighting, blinking, light-off, color, brightness, etc.) change little (or not at all), and basically, it emits light in conjunction with dynamic animation display such as friendly characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and enemy character 004SG510A running, jumping, and punching. The mode (for example, lighting, blinking, turning off, color, luminance, etc.) often changes.

Specifically, for example, board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) light up or blink (flash) in accordance with the movements of the friendly characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and the enemy character 004SG510A, such as running, jumping, and punching. Color may change.

In the second scene, the main lamp 9a is controlled to be turned off, but the main lamp 9a may also be changed in light emission mode in the same manner as the other board lamps and frame lamps (except for the button lamp 9e). good.

Next, when the display of the third scene is started, the effect display 004SG505 is displayed in the background, and the model main title display 004SG520A consisting of characters "FEVER POWERFUL" and a cloud-shaped background is displayed at the center position of the display screen. After being displayed in the “small” size at (the specified display position), the main title name of the model 004SG520A is displayed by fading in (animated display) while gradually enlarging and decreasing the transmittance (transparency). It is possible to make it appear as if the image is displayed moving from the back side of the screen toward the front side (see FIGS. 89(P) to (R)).

Next, the model subtitle name display 004SG520B consisting of the characters "II" is displayed on the right side of the model main title name display 004SG520A (prescribed display position) in the "extra-large" size, and then the transmittance (transparency) is changed while being slightly reduced. It fades in while being lowered, and is bounded to the right of "FEVER POWERFUL" (regular display position) in a "large" size (see FIGS. 89(S) to (T)).

Furthermore, after the model subtitle name display 004SG520C consisting of the characters "Everyone Gathered Ver." POWERFUL" (prescribed display position) and bounded in the "Large" size (see FIGS. 89(U) to (V)).

Also, in the third scene, the board lamps and frame lamps (except for the button lamp 9e) are basically illuminated in a rainbow wave, interlocking with the animation display of the model subtitle name display 004SG520C and 004SG520C. Then, the light emission mode changes. In particular, in the "model subtitle name" part, when the model subtitle name display 004SG520C, 004SG520C is moved and displayed bounding at the specified display position, the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) flash. .

Referring to FIG. 177(B), the display of the model subtitle name display 004SG520C consisting of the characters "Everyone Gathered Ver." will be described in detail. After being displayed in size (see Fig. 177 (B1)), it moves to the lower side (regular display position) of "FEVER POWERFUL" while shrinking slightly for about 0.5 seconds, and is displayed bounding in "Large" size. (See FIG. 177 (B2)), and is statically displayed at the specified display position for 0.5 seconds (See FIG. 177 (B3)). After that, the entire model title name display 004SG520 consisting of the model main title name display 004SG520A and the model subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C is gradually enlarged and displayed (animated display) over about 1.5 seconds (FIG. 177 (B4 )reference).

Also, as shown in FIG. 176 (A3), the board lamps and frame lamps (except for the button lamp 9e) are lit rainbow (rainbow wave) when the model main title display 004SG520A is displayed, and the model subtitle name is displayed. When display 004SG520B and model subtitle name display 004SG520C are displayed, white flashes in conjunction with enlargement/reduction (animation) display, and then rainbow lighting (rainbow wave lighting) is performed.

Next, when the display of the "Attention 1" part of the fourth scene is started, a dark green warning background display 004SG311 is displayed, and a immersion prevention display 004SG312 is faded in (animated display) at the center of the screen. ) (see FIG. 89(W)). Next, when the "Attention 2" part starts to be displayed, it is switched to a black warning background display 004SG321, and an accident prevention display 004SG322 is displayed (see FIG. 89(X)).

Referring to FIG. 177C, the display of the "Attention 1" part will be described in detail. When the display of the "Attention 1" part of the fourth scene is started, a dark green attention background display 004SG311 is displayed. At the same time, the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is displayed at the specified display position in the center of the screen, and is faded in (animated) for 0.5 seconds (see FIGS. 177(C1) and (C2)). Next, the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is still displayed for two seconds after the transmittance becomes 0% (see FIG. 177(C3)) (see FIG. 177(C4)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 176 (A4), the board lamp and the frame lamp (except for the button lamp 9e) are interlocked with the fade-in display of the immersion prevention display 004SG312 in the "Caution 1" and "Caution 2" parts. In the fourth scene, white wave lighting is continuously performed without white flashing.

Also, in the fourth scene, the board lamps and frame lamps (except for the button lamp 9e) emit light (for example, lighting, blinking, extinguishing, color, brightness, etc.) does not change, the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is prevented from being displayed with more emphasis than the company name display 004SG302, model main title display 004SG520A, and model subtitle display 004SG520C and 004SG520C. .

(Comparison of display modes of each scene)
Next, based on FIG. 85(B) and referring to FIGS. 88 and 89, the display modes of the image display device 5 for each scene during the demonstration movie display will be compared.

<Display mode at the start of character display> 1st scene (company name), 2nd scene (model introduction 1, 2), 3rd scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), 4th scene (call for attention 1) While various characters are faded-in (animated) in the second scene (model introduction 3) and fourth scene (attention 2), the various characters are not faded-in (animated).

<Character animation display (degree of change in visibility)> In the first scene (company name) and the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the degree of visibility change is “large” and animation is displayed. Therefore, in the second scene (model introduction 1 and 2), the animation display with the degree of change in visibility being "medium" is performed, and in the second scene (model introduction 3) and the fourth scene (attention 1), visual recognition While animation display is performed with the degree of change in sex being "small", character display is not animated in the second scene (model introduction 3) and the fourth scene (attention call 2).

<Character size> In the 1st scene (company name) and 3rd scene (model main title name), the characters are displayed in "small" size and then enlarged to "large" size, while in the 4th scene In (Reminders 1 and 2), characters are displayed in a fixed size from the beginning in the "small" size or the "medium" size. Also, in the second scene (model introduction 1 and 2), the text is displayed in "medium" size, and in the third scene (model subtitle name), the subtitle text is displayed in "extra large" size and then reduced to "large" size. to display.

<Background color> In the 1st scene (company name), the background color is white, in the 2nd scene (model introduction 1-3), the color according to the story, and in the 3rd scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the title In the fourth scene (attention 1), the attention 1 part is dark blue and the attention 2 part is black.

In addition, with respect to character display, for example, the degree of emphasis is higher (emphasized) when animation display is performed than when animation display is not performed, and when the visibility change in animation display is large, The degree of emphasis is higher (emphasized mode) than when the change in visibility is small. becomes).

As shown in FIG. 85B, the animation display of the company name display 004SG302 consisting of the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B displayed in the first scene (company name) is shown after the character display is faded in. , is bounded and enlarged in size, whereas the animation display of the immersion prevention display 004SG312 displayed in the fourth scene (Caution 1) is faded in, but the size is "medium". , the animation display of the company name display 004SG302 is emphasized more than the animation display of the immersion prevention display 004SG312, that is, the degree of change in visibility of character display is high.

In the animation display of the model main title name display 004SG520A and the model subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C displayed in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the character display is faded in at the specified display position. After that, the size is enlarged, reduced, and moved, whereas in the animation display of the immersion prevention display 004SG312 displayed in the fourth scene (Caution 1), the character display fades in to the specified display position. The animation display of the company name display 004SG302 is emphasized more than the animation display of the immersion prevention display 004SG312 because it is only displayed and does not change in size thereafter without being enlarged, reduced or moved. That is, the degree of change in visibility of character display is high.

Here, based on FIGS. 177 and 178, character animation displays of the first scene (company name), the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), and the fourth scene (attention 1) are compared.

As shown in FIG. 178, in the first scene (company name), the company name display 004SG302 is enlarged and faded-in at the start of display (see FIG. 177 (A1)), and bounded at the specified position display (FIG. 177). (A2)), and after displaying the specified position, it is displayed still (see FIG. 177 (A3)). In the third scene (model main title name), after the model main title display 004SG520A is enlarged and faded-in at the start of display, it is still displayed when it is displayed at the specified position (see FIGS. 89(P) to (R)). ), and after the specified position is displayed, the display is enlarged (see FIG. 177 (B4)). In the third scene (model subtitle name), the model subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C are displayed in reduced size after being enlarged at the start of display (see Figs. 177 (B3)), and after the specified position is displayed, the display is enlarged (see FIG. 177 (B4)). In the fourth scene (Caution 1), the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is faded in at the start of display (see FIGS. 177(C1) and (C2)), and is still displayed when and after the specified position is displayed. (See FIGS. 177(C3) and (C4)).

In other words, the degree of emphasis in the display has a relationship of company name≧model title (main, sub)>attention. The attention calling is only fade-in display at the start of display, and there is no animation display at the time of display of the specified position and after the display of the specified position, so the degree of emphasis is low. On the other hand, the company name uses animation display in two places, at the start of display and at the specified position, so the degree of emphasis is higher than the attention call. Since animation display is used in two places such as , the degree of emphasis is higher than that of calling attention.

In this way, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by character display in the demo movie display, but since we want to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model titles, and alerts, we emphasize them by displaying them with dedicated display animations. However, among them, by emphasizing the animation display of the display scene of the company name and model title compared to the scene of alert 1, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, it is suitable for customers. Wait control can be performed.

Also, in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the character display of the model main title name display 004SG520A and the model subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C are faded in at the specified display positions, and then enlarged or reduced in size. On the other hand, in the fourth scene (Caution 1), after the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is faded-in to the specified display position, an animation display of enlarging or reducing the size or moving is performed. displayed without

In this way, by giving the display of the model title name a reverberant movement, it gives a sense of attention to the title, and by not using a reverberating movement in the call for attention, the characters can be read firmly. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

(Comparison of display format of company name and alert)
Here, based on FIGS. 90 and 91, the display modes of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (calling attention 1 and 2), the number of retained memories, and the small patterns will be compared.

As shown in FIG. 90A, in the first scene (company name), a company name background display 004SG301 is displayed, and a company name display consisting of a company slogan display 004SG302A and a company logo display 004SG302B is displayed in the center of the screen. 004SG302 is displayed. A display area 5S provided on the upper left of the display screen displays the number of pending memories and small symbols.

As shown in FIG. 90B, in the fourth scene (caution 1), a warning background display 004SG311 is displayed, and an immersion prevention display 004SG312 is displayed in animation at the center of the screen. The addiction prevention display 004SG312 is composed of a headline display 004SG313 consisting of characters "Pachinko/Pachislot is a game to be enjoyed moderately."

As shown in FIG. 90(C), in the fourth scene (caution 2), the display is switched to the warning background display 004SG321 and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is displayed. The accident prevention display 004SG322 is composed of a first accident prevention display 004SG322A and a second accident prevention display 004SG322B.

The first accident prevention display 004SG322A includes an illustration display 004SG323A showing a situation in which the player hits the head against the upper protruding portion of the gaming machine frame 3, a headline display 004SG324A consisting of characters "Caution above the head", and "The upper part protrudes." Please be careful not to bump your head." attention mark display 004SG327A.

The second accident prevention display 004SG322B includes an illustration display 004SG323B showing a situation in which the player's fingers are caught in the gap between the stick controller 31A and the housing, a headline display 004SG324B consisting of characters "Beware of pinching fingers", It will move. Be careful not to get your hands or fingers caught." attention mark display 004SG327B.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the first scene (company name), the size of the corporate slogan display 004SG302A is medium and the color is chromatic (blue), and the corporate logo display 004SG302B is of the size "Large", the color is chromatic (blue), and the background display for company name 004SG301 is achromatic (white).

In the fourth scene (Caution 1), the size of the caption display 004SG313 is medium and the color is achromatic (white), and the caption frame display 004SG314 is chromatic (dark blue). The caution background display 004SG311 has a chromatic color (pale blue). Also, the frame line of the heading frame display 004SG314 is achromatic (black).

Note that the text display background of the headline display 004SG313 includes not only the warning background display 004SG311, which is the entire display screen, but also the headline frame display 004SG314 provided in part of the display screen.

In the fourth scene (Caution 2), illustration display 004SG323A has a size of "large" and color is achromatic (white). ), the size of the caution detail display 004SG325A is "small" and the color is achromatic (white), and the caution mark 004SG326A is "medium" in size and chromatic (yellow). The mark display 004SG327A has a size of "small" and a chromatic color (red), and the caution background display 004SG321 has an achromatic color (black).

The "caution mark 004SG326A, 004SG326B" is a mark that assists the headline character to attract the player's attention so that it stands out, and the "attention mark display 004SG327A, 004SG327B" indicates a place that the player should pay attention to. These are marks that assist illustrations, and unlike characters, they are displayed as a single mark. Therefore, they are preferably chromatic so that they stand out more than character display in achromatic headings.

As for the reserved memory number and the small pattern, the size is "small" and the color is achromatic (black).

As shown in FIGS. 90A and 91, when comparing the display modes of the company name display 004SG302 in the first scene (company name) with the number of retained memories and small patterns, the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B are compared. , The character size is larger than the number of retained memories and small patterns, the number of display colors used is large, and the saturation and brightness that make up the color tone (tone) are also high. It can be displayed more emphasized than the reserved memory number and the small pattern.

In the present embodiment, the number of retained memories and the small pattern are illustrated in achromatic color (black), but they may be chromatic colors. 004SG302B is a corporate slogan display if at least one of the following is satisfied: the character size is larger than the number of reserved memories and the small pattern, the number of display colors used is large, and the saturation and brightness are high. The 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B can be displayed in a more emphasized manner than the number of reserved memories and small symbols.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 90B, 90C, and 91, the immersion prevention display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (caution 1) and the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (caution 2) are displayed. By comparison, the caution background display 004SG311 is chromatic (light blue), and the headline frame display 004SG314, which is the background of the headline display 004SG313, is chromatic (dark blue), while the caution background display 004SG321 is achromatic (black). ).

In this way, the background display color of the character display of the caution is different between the caution 1 part and the caution 2 part, which is different. Since it is possible to increase the sense of attention when switching from the callout 1 part to the attention callout 2 part, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control as a result.

Next, when comparing the company name display 004SG302 in the first scene (company name) with the immersion prevention display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (caution 1) and the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (caution 2), the company The company name background display 004SG301 of the name display 004SG302 is achromatic (white), while the caution background display 004SG311 of the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is chromatic (light blue), and the heading frame display 004SG314 is chromatic (dark blue). ), and the caution background display 004SG321 of the accident prevention display 004SG322 is achromatic (black).

In this way, the background display color of the character display is different between the first scene (company name) and the different fourth scene (Alert 1, Alert 2), so that the display of the company name and the alert are different. By making the background color different, it is possible to increase the sense of attention at the time of switching, and as a result it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Further, in the present embodiment, the background display colors for the company name background display 004SG301, the caution background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the caution background display 004SG321 are all different from each other. The invention is not limited to this, and the background display color of at least one of the caution background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the caution background display 004SG321 is the same as the background display color of the company name background display 004SG301. It is sufficient if it is different from the background display color.

(Comparison of light emission modes in each scene)
Next, based on FIG. 85(B) and referring to FIGS. 88 and 89, the light emission modes of the lamps in each scene during the demonstration movie display will be compared.

<Interlocking with character animation display> In the 1st scene (company name), the 3rd scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), and the 4th scene (Attention 1), the character animation display (fade-in display) While the board lamp and frame lamp (except for the button lamp 9e) are interlocked to emit light, in the second scene (model introduction 1, 2), the character animation display (fade-in display) is not interlocked (non-interlocked). , the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are illuminated in conjunction with the animation display of the character.

<Level of emphasis> In the first scene (company name) and the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are displayed with a high degree of emphasis. In the second scene (model introductions 1 to 3), the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are illuminated in the mode of "medium" emphasis, and in the fourth scene (attention 1, 2 ), the board lamps and the frame lamps (except the button lamp 9e) are illuminated with the degree of emphasis being "low".

The "emphasis degree" is the degree of emphasis in the lighting mode of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). For example, flashing (blinking), that is, when the interval between color transitions of luminance data is short, has a higher degree of emphasis than when the interval between color transitions of luminance data is long, such as wave lighting. ), when the number of lamps lit is large, the degree of emphasis is higher than when the number of lamps lit is small (it becomes a mode of being emphasized), and when the number of lighting colors is large, the lighting color is small. When the ratio of chromatic colors is high, the degree of emphasis is higher (becomes emphasized) than when the ratio of chromatic colors is small (becomes emphasized). In the case of lighting, the degree of emphasis is higher (emphasized) than in the case of not lighting with rainbow, and when the brightness is high, the degree of emphasis is higher than when the brightness is low (emphasized). mode).

Specifically, referring to FIG. 176 based on FIG. 85(B), the first scene (company name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display, so the degree of emphasis is The second scene (model introduction 1 to 3) has a green flash but is not linked to the character animation display, so the degree of emphasis is "medium", and the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display, so the degree of emphasis is set to "high", and the fourth scene (Attention 1, 2) is not associated with character animation display. The degree of emphasis is "small" because there is no

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the lamp is higher in the light emission mode for the company name than in the light emission mode for calling attention. The degree of emphasis is higher than that of mode. Since the company name has more lamp switching linked to the animation display than the model title, the lighting mode for the company name is more emphasized than the lighting mode for the model title. Therefore, the degree of emphasis of the lamp has a relationship of company name>model title (main, sub)>attention call.

In addition, since a plurality of board lamps and frame lamps are provided at a plurality of positions, when comparing the degree of emphasis between the light emission of the first lamp consisting of a plurality of lamps and the light emission of the second lamp consisting of a plurality of lamps, Instead of comparing the degree of enhancement of one first lamp and one second lamp, the light emission mode when the overall first lamp is averaged and the light emission mode when the overall second lamp is averaged are compared. Just compare.

<Rainbow> Of the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), in the "model subtitle name" part (for example, Figures 89 (P) to (V)), board lamps and frame lamps emit rainbow mode. Let The brightness data table (grandchild table to be described later) used at this time is common to the rainbow brightness data table used in the step-up effect (see FIG. 83(B)) and the cut-in effect (see FIG. 84(D)). is a rainbow luminance data table (a common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01) to be described later).

<Specific light emission> The board lamp and frame lamp emit white flash (specific mode) only in a predetermined frame of the model subtitle name in the third scene (title name) (for example, Fig. 89 (S), (U)) . The brightness data table (grandchild table to be described later) used at this time is a brightness data table for subtitle 1 and a brightness data table for subtitle 2 which are different from the brightness data table for the main title used in the model main title name, and are used for character display. It is a white flash (specific mode) that emits light in conjunction with character animation display.

As shown in FIG. 85B, in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), the brightness data table for introduction 2 (model introduction 2-1) is different from the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part). -1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see FIG. 86) are used, and the second scene (model introduction 2-2) is common to the second scene (model introduction 2-1). The brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see FIG. 86) is used, and the brightness data table for company (grandchild table corresponding to company name part) is used. table) includes luminance data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the company name display 004SG302 displayed in the first scene (company name), and the luminance data table for introduction 2 (model introduction 2-1, 2- The grandchild table corresponding to parts 2 and 2-3) is linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the character display 004SG511A indicating "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-1). and the luminance data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the character display 004SG511B "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-2).

In this way, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by character display in the demonstration movie display, but since we particularly want to convey the information of the company name, by using luminance data linked to the display animation, it is possible to compare with other character displays. can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

As shown in FIG. 85B, in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), the luminance data table for main title (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the luminance data table for subtitle 1, the luminance data table for subtitle 2, and the luminance data table for subtitle 2 are shown. The brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2 and 2-3 parts) (see FIG. 86) different from the data table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) is In the second scene (model introduction 2-2), the brightness data table for introduction 2 common to the second scene (model introduction 2-1) (model introduction 2-1, 2-2, 2-3 parts The corresponding grandchild table) (see FIG. 86) is used, and the brightness data table for main title (grandchild table corresponding to main title part), brightness data table for subtitle 1, brightness data table for subtitle 2 (subtitle 1 and 2 parts) are used. The grandchild table corresponding to ) is interlocked with the fade-in display (animation display) of the model main title name display 004SG520A and the model subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C displayed in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name). The brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts), which includes brightness data, is the second scene (model introduction 2-1) "The enemy is in the city Luminance data interlocking with the fade-in display (animation display) of the character display 004SG511A indicating "Raging!" and the fade of the character display 004SG511B indicating "Protect the city from enemies!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-2). Does not include luminance data linked to in display (animation display).

In this way, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by character display in the demonstration movie display, but since we particularly want to convey the model name information, by using brightness data linked to the display animation, it is possible to compare with other character displays. can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the mode of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) controlled by using the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) (see FIG. 86) is the caution brightness data table. (Grandchild table corresponding to alert 1 and alert 2 parts) (see FIG. 86) is used to control the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). main title luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to main title part), subtitle 1 luminance data table, subtitle 2 luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) (Fig. 86) is used to control the board lamps and frame lamps (except for the button lamp 9e), the luminance data table for caution (grandchild table corresponding to the caution 1 and caution 2 parts) is used. This mode has a higher degree of emphasis (emphasized) than the mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) to be controlled.

Specifically, the first scene (company name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display, so the degree of emphasis is set to "high", and the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle ) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display, so the degree of emphasis is "high", whereas the fourth scene (Alerts 1 and 2) is associated with character animation display. The degree of emphasis is "low" because it does not.

In this way, in the demo movie display, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed by character display, but since it is desired to emphasize each information such as company name information, model title, and alert, it is possible to emphasize each information by emitting light exclusively for each. Among them, by emphasizing the lighting mode of the display scene of the company name and model title compared to the scene calling attention, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved. It can be carried out.

In addition, the aspect of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) controlled by using the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is the caution brightness data table (Alert 1, mode of board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) controlled by using a grandchild table corresponding to the alert 2 part), and a luminance data table for the main title (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), Note that the mode of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) controlled by using the subtitle 1 luminance data table and the subtitle 2 luminance data table (grandchild tables corresponding to the subtitles 1 and 2 parts) is Modes that are emphasized more than modes of board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) that are controlled using brightness data tables (grandchild tables corresponding to alerting 1 and alerting 2 parts) are (1) Emphasize the company name and model title by using one of the following: (2) many flashing colors; (3) many light emitting means; and (4) high brightness. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Also, the aspect of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) controlled by using the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is the brightness data table for the main title (main title part (grandchild table corresponding to ), brightness data table for subtitle 1, brightness data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts). ), the company name can be emphasized more, and it is possible to appeal to the player in an easy-to-understand manner which company the gaming machine is related to, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved. It can be performed.

In addition, during execution of the demonstration movie display, the effect control CPU 120 uses the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1 and 2 parts) to display the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). ), and when step-up effects (see FIG. 83(B)) and cut-in effects (see FIG. 84(D)) are executed, the luminance data table for rainbow (corresponding to step-up effects and cut-in effects A grandchild table for controlling the board lamps and frame lamps (except for the button lamp 9e), and a rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1 and 2 parts) used during the execution of the demo movie display. table), and a rainbow luminance data table (corresponding to step-up effects and cut-in effects) used when step-up effects (see FIG. 83(B)) and cut-in effects (see FIG. 84(D)) are executed. grandchild table) is a common brightness data table (common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01)).

Thus, by setting the light emission mode to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made gorgeous, and the brightness data table for setting the light emission mode to rainbow is executed during the game. By sharing the brightness data table used for specific effects (for example, step-up effects and cut-in effects), the capacity is not increased, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, a rainbow brightness data table (title part , grandchild table corresponding to subtitles 1 and 2 parts), and a demo movie execution period (second period ) used for the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1 and 2 parts), and the step-up effect that can be executed in the low base state (normal state) (see FIG. 83 (B)) (specified effect) and a cut-in effect (see FIG. 84(D)) that can be executed in the high base state (special state) is executed. table) is a common brightness data table (common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01)).

Thus, by setting the light emission mode to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made gorgeous, and the luminance data table for setting the light emission mode to rainbow can be executed in the normal state. By sharing the brightness data table with the luminance data table used corresponding to the special effects that can be executed in the specific effects and special states, the capacity is not increased, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, a step-up effect (see FIG. 83B) that can be executed in the low base state (normal state) (specific effect) and a cut-in effect that can be executed in the high base state (special state) (see FIG. 84D) ) is an effect that definitely notifies that it will be controlled to the jackpot game state, and the brightness data table (common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01 )) is also used for the demonstration display, and as a result, a suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the luminance data table for subtitle 1 and the luminance data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to parts 1 and 2 of subtitles) use a plurality of luminance data to create a lighting mode linked to the animation display of model subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C. This is a brightness data table for causing the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) to emit light.

In this way, the main title name and the subtitle name are displayed in order, and the subtitle name is displayed to complete the title name of the game machine. The title of the game machine can be emphasized by emitting light (except for the button lamp 9e), and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of luminance data constituting the company name luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) are composed of the main lamp 9a (second light emitting means), the board lamp and the side lamp 9b. (first light emitting means) is luminance data configured to emit light; A plurality of luminance data constituting the grandchild table corresponding to the -2 part) are luminance data configured so that the side lamp 9b and the board lamp emit light and the main lamp 9a does not emit light.

As described above, there are a plurality of scenes in which information is conveyed by character display. In the scene where a company name is displayed, both the main lamp 9a (second light emitting means) and the board lamp and the side lamp 9b (first light emitting means) emit light. In the model introduction scene, the board lamp and the side lamp 9b (first light emitting means) emit light, but the main lamp 9a (second light emitting means) does not emit light, so that the company name is relatively displayed. The first scene to be displayed can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In this embodiment, the board lamp and the side lamp 9b are used as the first light emitting means, and the main lamp 9a is used as the second light emitting means. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the frame lamps may be applied as the second light emitting means that does not emit light in the scene, and at least one of the board lamps may be applied as the first light emitting means.

In addition, as a modification, the effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table for introduction 1 corresponding to the model introduction part 1 (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction part 1) in the model introduction part of the second scene. Control the light emitting means (for example, board lamp), and in the model introduction part 2, use the brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction parts 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3) to perform the first Control the light emitting means (e.g., board lamp), and control the second light emitting means (e.g., frame lamp) using one brightness data table (first grandchild table) in model introduction part 1 and model introduction part 2 You may do so.

In this way, while the demonstration movie is being displayed, there are a plurality of scenes where information is conveyed by character display. In the introduction part 1 and the model introduction part 2, the first light emitting means is made to emit light in a dedicated light emission mode, but the second light emission means is made to emit light in a common light emission mode. The name display scene can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, in the model introduction part 1 of the second scene, the effect control CPU 120 controls the brightness data table for company (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) and the brightness data table for model main title (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part). ), brightness data table for model subtitle (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts), brightness data table for alert 1, brightness data table for alert 2 (grandchild table corresponding to alert 1 and 2 parts), and is a different brightness data table for model introduction 1 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction part 1) to control the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e), and in the model introduction part 2 of the second scene Alternatively, the one luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction part 1) may be used to control the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e).

In this way, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed by text display, but since we want to emphasize information such as company name information, model titles, and alerts, we made it possible to compare with other text displays by emitting light exclusively for each. , can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Execution period of model introduction scene including model introduction part 1 and model introduction part 2 (30 sec) > execution period of company name display scene (10 sec), model introduction scene including first model introduction part and second model introduction part Execution period (30 sec) > Execution period of the caution display scene (5 sec). The character display of the company name and the character display of the caution are displayed at a display timing other than during the demonstration movie display. may be In this way, by emphasizing the model introduction scene and the title name display scene that are displayed only during the demonstration movie display, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

It should be noted that it is possible to display the character display of the company name and the character display of the warning even when the demo movie is not being displayed. For example, the character display of the company name and the character display of the warning may be displayed during the ending period after the jackpot round ends, or the same display as that displayed during the demo movie display may be displayed. may In this case, the display time may be set shorter than during the demonstration movie display so as not to disrupt the tempo of the big win and the high base state.

(Lamp emission mode corresponding to gaming state)
Next, the lighting mode of the lamp corresponding to the game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the light emission mode of the lamp corresponding to the game state. Figure 93, (A) is a diagram showing the arrangement position of the lamp in the pachinko game machine, (B) is a schematic diagram of (A).

As shown in FIG. 92, the board lamps and frame lamps arranged in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are controlled to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, when initialization notification is performed due to a cold start, and to a low base state. Light is emitted in different modes depending on whether the display is on, when controlled to the high base state, when the demo movie display is displayed, or when an error notification is being made, which will be described later.

Specifically, during the execution period of the initialization notification, an initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification) is used, and the board lamp, main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e are "red ' blinks.

In the low base state, a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) is used, and the board lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b are lit in waves with "blue" as the main color, and the button lamp 9e is " lights up white.

In the low-precision high base state (time saving state), the time saving background luminance data table (lamp data table: background time saving) is used, and the board lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b are lit in waves with “green” as the main color. , the button lamp 9e lights up in "white". In addition, in the high probability high base state (probability variation state), the probability variation background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variation) is used, and the board lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b are waved with “purple” as the main color. The button lamp 9e lights up in "white". In the following description, the time-saving background luminance data table and the probability-variable background luminance data table may be collectively referred to as a high-base background luminance data table (or a high-B background luminance data table).

During the execution period of the demonstration production (demonstration movie display), a luminance data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) is used, and the board lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b use "white" as the main color. The light emission mode changes, and the button lamp 9e lights in "white".

During the execution period of the error notification, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) is used, and the board lamp and side lamp 9b are changed to "color according to the state (low base state, high base state, demonstration effect)". On the other hand, the main lamp 9a blinks in "red" and the button lamp 9e lights in "white".

In addition, the "primary color" is the color that forms the base tone of the overall color in each period, for example, it may be the color that has the highest occupancy rate of the light emitting time and the light emitting area (number of lamps) in each period. Light may be emitted in colors other than the colors described above. Moreover, a plurality of colors having different brightness, brightness, saturation, etc. may be included in a predetermined hue.

For example, based on FIG. 179, similar colors will be described. Color has three attributes: hue (tint), lightness (luminance, brightness), and saturation (vividness). 2. A combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same luminance, lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividity)) and that are adjacent to each other in terms of hue; 2. combinations of the same hue but different tones; Color combinations that differ only in lightness or saturation are included.

An example of the above "1. Combination of colors (neighboring colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same lightness (luminance, brightness) and saturation (vividity)) and that are adjacent to each other in terms of hue" is shown in FIG. (B), the three primary colors of light, red (R) [F00], green (G) [0F0], and blue (B) [00F] are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees, each of the three colors is dissimilar to each other. Colors having a hue difference within the range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue circle are "similar colors", and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors adjacent to each other on the hue circle.

For example, when red (R) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees toward yellow (Y) and 30 degrees toward light blue (C) (total of 60 degrees) are colors similar to red (R). When green (G) is used as the reference color, colors that fall within the range of 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (total of 60 degrees) are similar colors to green (G). When (B) is the reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees to the light blue (C) side and 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to blue (B). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the color wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, a combination of colors having a hue difference within an angle of 30 to 60 degrees on the color wheel may be defined as "similar colors".

In addition, similar colors include warm colors such as red and yellow that give a feeling of warmth, cold colors that give a feeling of coldness such as blue and purple, and green and purple. It preferably includes a combination of colors included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors positioned between warm and cool colors.

As shown in FIG. 93(A), the board lamps are the attacker lamp 9c built in the special variable winning ball device 7 provided in the lower right part of the game board 2, and the movable body provided in the upper part of the image display device 5. 32 and a decorative lamp 9f built in a decorative body provided on the left side of the image display device 5 are included. Note that the lamps provided on the game board 2 may include lamps other than those described above (for example, lamps built into the winning device).

The frame lamps include a main lamp 9a provided on the top of the gaming machine frame 3, side lamps 9b provided on the left and right sides, and button lamps 9e provided on the push buttons 31B. Note that lamps other than those described above (for example, lamps built into the ball hitting operation handle 30 and the speakers 8L and 8R, etc.) may be included as long as the lamps are provided on the gaming machine frame 3 .

In addition, the attack lamp 9c of the board lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the movable body lamp 9d is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the decoration lamp 9f is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the main lamp 9a is composed of a plurality of LEDs, The side lamp 9b is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the button lamp 9e is composed of a plurality of LEDs.

Also, FIG. 93B is a schematic diagram showing an arrangement mode of various lamps shown in FIG. 93A. There is something to express.

(Start of customer waiting demo production, fluctuation stop Ver.)
Next, the flow from when the variable display is stopped to when the customer waiting demonstration effect is started will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 99 and 180. FIG. 94, (A1) to (A8) are diagrams showing an operation example in the case where the customer waiting demonstration effect is interposed after the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state is finished. 95, (A4) to (A5) are diagrams showing the main part of FIG. 94; FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demonstration effect in the low base state. FIG. 97 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demonstration effect in the low base state. FIG. 98 shows (B1) to (B8) an operation example of the customer waiting demonstration effect in the high base state. FIG. 99 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demonstration effect in the high base state. FIG. 100 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demonstration effect in the high base state. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an operation example when the customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko gaming machine is activated by cold start (power-on with initialization). FIG. 102 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko gaming machine is activated by cold start. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing an operation example when the customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko gaming machine is activated by hot start (power-on without initialization) in the low base state. FIG. 104 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko gaming machine is activated by the hot start in the low base state. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an operation example when the customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko gaming machine is activated by the hot start in the high base state. FIG. 106 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko gaming machine is activated by the hot start in the high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an operation example when the customer waiting demonstration effect is started when the game state is the low base state will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 97. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 96, in the low base state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, although not shown, if the execution of a notice effect, a ready-to-win effect, etc. is determined, these effects is executed (see FIG. 94(A1)). During the variable display, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light quantity guidance display 004SG402 are not displayed.

Also, the board lamp and the frame lamp start blue wave lighting based on the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the button lamp 9e continues white lighting based on the default luminance data table. . In addition, normal background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when the notice effect and the reach effect are executed, the brightness data table for the notice effect and the reach effect (lamp data table corresponding to the notice effect and the reach effect) is set, and the light emission control of the mode according to the effect BGM is output.

Next, when the variable display ends and the combination of the finalized symbols (for example, "326") is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 94(A2)), the CPU 103 has transmitted a customer waiting demonstration designation command. Based on this, the demonstration movie start waiting timer (120 seconds) is started by the effect control CPU 120, and the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins. Although the output of the BGM is stopped, it may be faded out when a predetermined time has passed since the end of the variable display.

When 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start wait timer started and the demo end condition was not satisfied, the menu guidance display 004SG401 was framed in from the lower left side of the display screen (see FIG. 94 (A3)). , moving to the right to a specified position and displaying an animation, the sound volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 94A4).

90 seconds have passed since then, and when 120 seconds have passed since the timer for waiting for the start of the demo movie started counting, and the condition for ending the demonstration has not been satisfied, it is determined that the condition for starting the demonstration effect S1 has been satisfied. Based on this, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the sound volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demonstration effect period) is started. (See FIGS. 94(A5) to (A8)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the luminance data table for normal background (lamp data table: normal background) to the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration, and the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). , and the button lamp 9e continues lighting in white based on the default luminance data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

In starting the demonstration movie display in this manner, the effect control CPU 120 switches the combination of the first background display 004SG081 displayed on the display screen and the fixed symbols (decorative symbols) out of the display to the demo movie display for the demonstration effect. Before switching from the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demonstration luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) Light emission control is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 95(A4), during the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period), the display screen displays a combination of deviated confirmed patterns (decorative patterns) in the background of the first background display 004SG081. Stopped is displayed. In addition, the board lamp and the frame lamp (except for the button lamp 9e) are illuminated in blue waves based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal).

Next, when the demonstration effect start condition S1 is established, before the first background display 004SG081 is switched to the demonstration movie display, the fade-out display of the combination of the first background display 004SG081 and the out-of-place confirmed pattern (decoration pattern) is started. , the transmittance of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of the finalized pattern (decorative pattern) is gradually increased, and the luminance data table for normal background (lamp data table: normal background) is changed from the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the board lamps and frame lamps (except the button lamp 9e) switch from blue wave lighting to white-based lighting (see FIGS. 95 (A41) and (A42)). Then, after the transmittance of the combination of the first background display 004SG081 and the out-of-order confirmed pattern (decorative pattern) approaches 100% and the display screen is whited out (see FIG. 95 (A42)), the demonstration movie display is started. (See FIG. 95 (A5)).

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 in the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the low base state is finished (the variable display is stopped), and the first customer waiting is displayed. A demo movie display is displayed during a second customer waiting period (second period) after the end of the period. Then, before switching the first background display 004SG081 and the decoration pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demonstration effect, the luminance data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) is changed to the luminance data table for the customer waiting demonstration. Switching to the luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration), the light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started.

Therefore, by adopting a step-by-step design in which the control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (except for the button lamp 9e) is first switched, and then the demo movie display is started, the change is greater than starting all at once. It is possible to draw the attention of the customer to the start of the demo movie display, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 first outputs a command designating a demonstration movie display to the display control section 123 when the condition S1 for starting the demonstration effect is satisfied. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits the extension command BF01 corresponding to the demonstration movie display to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 which received the extension command BF01 sends the extension command BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display. Light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the luminance data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) is started. On the other hand, after the extension command BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display is transmitted, the display control unit 123 displays the first background displayed on the display screen after a predetermined period of time tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed. The display 004SG081 and the decoration pattern are switched to the demonstration movie display for demonstration production. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 96, after a predetermined period of time tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has passed since the condition S1 for starting the demonstration effect is established, the fade-out display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decoration pattern ( After the display screen is whited out, the company name display 004SG302 is started to be displayed. That is, when the demonstration effect start condition S1 is established, the effect control CPU 120 converts the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demonstration luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). ) to start light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), while changing the display contents from the normal background display to the demo movie display including fade-out display (switching display) of the normal background display. Switching control is started, but the fade-out display (switching display) as the demonstration movie display is started after a predetermined period of time tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has passed since the demonstration start condition S1 is satisfied.

Therefore, the demo movie display is started after a predetermined period of time tf has passed since the light emission modes of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched. (See FIG. 94 (A5)) is started after the predetermined period tf and the switching display period have passed. Light emission control for the customer waiting demonstration of the lamps and the frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started.

In this way, the switching display by the fade-out display as described above is not performed, and the light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched first, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. can be prevented (see FIGS. 95(A31), (A32), and FIG. 96).

In this embodiment, the predetermined period tf for delaying the start of the demo movie display is about 0.3 seconds, but it may be 0.3 seconds or more, and may be changed in various ways. be. In addition, although the fade display is performed as the switching display, a scene change display other than the fade display may be performed, or even if the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decoration pattern is maintained without performing the fade display or the like. good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 96, when 55 seconds have elapsed since the demonstration movie display started without the demonstration end condition being satisfied, the first time display is performed based on the determination that the demonstration effect end condition E1 has been satisfied. display of the demo movie ends. Then, on the display screen, the first background display 004SG081 and the combination (decorative pattern) of the finalized symbols that have been lost are displayed, along with the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402. A waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) is started (see FIG. 94 (A4)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp are switched from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background, and to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: normal background). The button lamp 9e is controlled to emit light based on the default luminance data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

In this way, after the display of the demonstration movie is completed by satisfying the end condition E1 of the demonstration effect, the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) continues until one of the end conditions E2 to E4 of the demonstration effect is satisfied. And the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) is repeated from the second time onwards. From the second time onward, the first background display 004SG081 and the decoration pattern are displayed based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period), and the first background display 004SG081 and the decoration pattern are displayed. is displayed, animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light quantity guidance display 004SG402 is started, and 30 seconds have passed since the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) started. , the demo movie display is started (see FIG. 180).

The animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 from the second time onwards is the same as the animation display (frame-in display) of the first menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402. It is a common animation display (see FIG. 94 (A3)).

When the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) changes to the second customer waiting period (demonstration movie period), as described with reference to FIG. Before switching the first background display 004SG081 and the decoration pattern to the demo movie display for demonstration production, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is changed to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and control of light emission of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 in the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the low base state ends (the variable display is stopped), and the first customer waiting period After the end of the second customer waiting period (second period), the demo movie display is displayed, and in the first customer waiting period, the board lamp and The light emission of the frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is controlled, and the board lamp and the frame lamp (button lamp 9e) are controlled using the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) during the second customer waiting period. ), during the first customer waiting period and the second customer waiting period, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: Light emission control of the button lamp 9e is performed using one default luminance data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) different from the customer waiting demo).

In this way, by switching the mode of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in accordance with the start of the demonstration movie display, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the operation of the push button 31B is prompted. Therefore, by setting the button lamp 9e in a certain manner, misunderstanding can be prevented, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Specifically, as described above, when using the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), the display mode of the demonstration movie display is Since the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are lit and blinked in conjunction with each other, for example, when an operation prompting display prompting the operation of the push button 31B is displayed in the effect introduction scene, the button When the lamp 9e lights up, the player may misunderstand and perform a useless operation.

Also, as shown in FIG. 97, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started due to an irregular winning or the like in the low base state, the flow of starting the demo movie display after the variable display is finished is as follows. As shown in FIG. 96, since it is the same as the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the low base state, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

<High base state>
Next, an operation example of the customer waiting demonstration effect when the game state is the high base state will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, in the high base state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, although not shown, if execution of a notice effect, a ready-to-win effect, etc. is determined, these effects is executed (see FIG. 98(B1)). During the variable display, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 are not displayed.

In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp are purple (or green) waves based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) for probability change (or time saving) Lighting is started, and the button lamp 9e continues lighting in white based on the default luminance data table (lamp data table: button white lighting). BGM for the high-B background is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when the notice effect and the reach effect are executed, the brightness data table for the notice effect and the reach effect (lamp data table corresponding to the notice effect and the reach effect) is set, and the light emission control of the mode according to the effect BGM is output.

Next, when the variable display ends and the combination of the finalized symbols (for example, "326") is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 98(B2)), the CPU 103 has transmitted a customer waiting demonstration designation command. Based on this, the demonstration movie start waiting timer (120 seconds) is started by the effect control CPU 120, and the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins. Although the output of the BGM is stopped, it may be faded out when a predetermined time has passed since the end of the variable display.

When 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start wait timer started and the demo end condition was not satisfied, the menu guidance display 004SG401 was framed in from the lower left side of the display screen (see FIG. 98 (B3)). , moving to the right to a specified position and displaying an animation, the sound volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 98(B4)).

90 seconds have passed since then, and when 120 seconds have passed since the timer for waiting for the start of the demo movie started counting, and the condition for ending the demonstration has not been satisfied, it is determined that the condition for starting the demonstration effect S1 has been satisfied. Based on this, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the sound volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demonstration effect period) is started. (See FIGS. 98(B5) to (B8)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the luminance data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration, and the luminance data for customer waiting demonstration Based on the table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration), control of the lighting mode based on white is started, and the button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default luminance data table (lamp data table: button white lighting). continues.

In starting the demonstration movie display in this way, the effect control CPU 120 demonstrates the combination of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) displayed on the display screen and the out-of-order confirmed pattern (decoration pattern). Before switching to the demo movie display for production, change the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting) demo) to control the light emission of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e).

More specifically, during the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period), the combination of confirmed symbols (decoration symbol) that is out of place is displayed still on the background of the third background display 004SG083 on the display screen. In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background time reduction, or lamp data table: background probability change) for probability variation (or time saving) Lights up in purple (or green) waves.

Next, when the demonstration effect start condition S1 is satisfied, before the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is switched to the demo movie display, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the The fade-out display of the combination of confirmed patterns (decorative patterns) is started, and the transmittance of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG084) and the combination of the confirmed patterns (decorative patterns) that are out of is gradually increased. B Background luminance data table (Lamp data table: Background probability change (or Lamp data table: Background time reduction)) Switches to customer waiting demonstration luminance data table (Lamp data table: Customer waiting demo), board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e) switches from purple or green wave lighting to white-based light emission mode (see FIGS. 95 (A41) and (A42)). Then, after the transmittance of the combination of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the deviated fixed pattern (decorative pattern) approaches 100% and the display screen is whited out, the demonstration movie display is started. (See FIG. 98 (B5)).

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG0833 (or the second background display 004SG082) in the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state is finished (the variable display is stopped). is displayed, and the demo movie display is displayed during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period ends. Then, before switching the third background display 004SG0833 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decoration pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demonstration effect, the luminance data table for high B background (lamp data table) : Change background probability (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and start light emission control of board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) do.

Therefore, by adopting a step-by-step design in which the control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (except for the button lamp 9e) is first switched, and then the demo movie display is started, the change is greater than starting all at once. It is possible to draw the attention of the customer to the start of the demo movie display, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 first outputs a command designating a demonstration movie display to the display control section 123 when the condition S1 for starting the demonstration effect is satisfied. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits the extension command BF01 corresponding to the demonstration movie display to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 which received the extension command BF01 sends the extension command BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display. Light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the luminance data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) is started. On the other hand, the display control unit 123 transmits the extended command BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display, and after a predetermined period of time tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has passed, the display control unit 123 displays the third background displayed on the display screen. The display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decoration pattern are switched to the demo movie display for demonstration effects. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98, the effect control CPU 120 controls the third background display 004SG083 ( Alternatively, the second background display 004SG082) and the fade-out display (switching display) of the decoration pattern are started, and after the display screen is whited out, the display of the company name display 004SG302 is started. That is, when the demonstration effect start condition S1 is established, the effect control CPU 120 selects the luminance for the customer waiting demonstration from the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). While switching to the data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and starting light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), the display content is faded out from the high base background display to the high base background display. Switching control to switch to the demo movie display including the display (switching display) is started, but the fade-out display (switching display) as the demo movie is displayed for a predetermined period tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) after the demonstration start condition S1 is satisfied. ) has elapsed before starting.

Therefore, the demo movie display is started after a predetermined period of time tf has passed since the light emission modes of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched. (See FIG. 98 (B5)) is started after the predetermined period of time tf and the switching display period have elapsed. Before switching to the movie display, light emission control for the customer waiting demonstration of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started.

In this way, the switching display by the fade-out display as described above is not performed, and the light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched first, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. can be prevented (see FIGS. 95(A31), (A32), and FIG. 99).

In this embodiment, the predetermined period tf is about 0.3 seconds, but it may be 0.3 seconds or more, and can be changed in various ways. In addition, although fade display is performed as switching display, scene change display other than fade display may be performed. The display of the design may be maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 99, when 55 seconds have elapsed since the demonstration movie display started without the demonstration end condition being satisfied, the first time display is performed based on the determination that the demonstration effect end condition E1 has been satisfied. display of the demo movie ends. Then, on the display screen, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the combination of the finalized symbols (decoration patterns) are displayed, as well as the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guidance display 004SG402. Then, the second first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) is started (see FIG. 94 (A4)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp are changed from the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the luminance data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) , light emission control is performed based on the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the button lamp 9e is the default luminance data table (lamp data table: Light emission control is performed based on the button white lighting).

In this way, after the display of the demonstration movie is completed by satisfying the end condition E1 of the demonstration effect, the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) continues until one of the end conditions E2 to E4 of the demonstration effect is satisfied. And the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) is repeated from the second time onwards. From the second time onward, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decoration pattern are displayed based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period). Along with the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decoration pattern, the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 is started, and the first customer waiting period (demonstration After 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the movie start waiting period), the demo movie display starts (see FIG. 180).

The animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 from the second time onwards is the same as the animation display (frame-in display) of the first menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402. It is a common animation display (see FIG. 98 (B3)).

Also, when the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) changes to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), the effect control CPU 120 changes the third background display 004SG083 ( Or, before switching the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern to the demo movie display for demonstration production, wait for customers from the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) Switching to the luminance data table for demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration), light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) in the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state ends (the variable display is stopped). In the second customer waiting period (second period) after the end of the first customer waiting period, the demo movie display is displayed, and in the first customer waiting period, the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: The background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) is used to control the light emission of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), and in the second customer waiting period, the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table : customer waiting demo) is used to control the light emission of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), while the luminance data table for the high B background (lamp Data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), one default luminance data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) ) is used to control light emission of the button lamp 9e.

In this way, by switching the mode of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in accordance with the start of the demonstration movie display, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the operation of the push button 31B is prompted. Therefore, by setting the button lamp 9e in a certain manner, misunderstanding can be prevented, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, by setting the button lamp 9e in a constant state in both the low base state and the high base state, misunderstanding can be prevented in both the low base state and the high base state. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, during the first customer waiting period, the effect control CPU 120 uses a board lamp and a frame lamp (button lamp 9e) is controlled, and in the first scene (for example, the first scene (company name), etc.) in the second customer waiting period, the brightness data table for the company corresponding to the first scene (corresponding to the company name part grandchild table) to control the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), and in the second scene (for example, the second scene (model introduction 1 to 3), etc.) in the second customer waiting period, the second Board lamps and frames using the brightness data table for introduction 1 to 3 corresponding to the scene (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2 parts) By controlling the lamps (except for the button lamp 9e), in the first scene during the second customer waiting period, the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) and the brightness data table for introduction 1 to 3 (model introduction 1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, and 3-2 using one default luminance data table (lamp data table: white button lighting) different from grandchild tables corresponding to parts 1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, and 3-2 The button lamp 9e is controlled, and in the second scene during the second customer waiting period, the button lamp 9e is controlled using the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

In this way, by switching the mode of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the operation of the push button 31B is prompted. By placing it, misunderstanding can be prevented, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, one default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light) is brightness data for promotion effect used when the promotion effect (see FIG. 83(G)) for prompting the operation of the push button 31B is executed. The luminance data table is different from the table (lamp data table: button blinking white, lamp data table: button blinking red). The change in luminance is less than that of the luminance data (lamp data table: button blinking white, lamp data table: button blinking red) that constitutes the luminance data table for use.

By doing so, the default luminance data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) is composed of luminance data for making the mode less emphasized than when the operation of the push button 31B is urged. , it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the operation of the push button 31B is prompted, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Also, the default luminance data table may be composed of luminance data for turning off the button lamp 9e. Misunderstanding can be prevented, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Also, the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B is provided in the gaming machine frame 3, but is not managed by the same brightness data table as the other main lamps 9a and side lamps 9b provided in the gaming machine frame 3. By performing separate management, it is possible to suitably design for preventing the player from misunderstanding that the operation of the push button 31B is prompted, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 96, in the low base state, after the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the effect control CPU 120 displays a menu guidance display 004SG401 and a sound volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) relating to the effect adjustment. is not displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed (see FIG. 94A2), and then the demo movie display is displayed. After the demo movie is displayed, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the sound volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 99, in the high base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the effect control CPU 120 displays a menu guidance display 004SG401 and a sound volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) relating to the effect adjustment. is not displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed (see FIG. 98B2), and then , to view the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 ( Alternatively, the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, in either the low base state or the high base state, the guide display is not displayed immediately after the end of the variable display. After the display ends, there is a possibility that the player has left their seat. A game can be urged, and as a result, a suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 100, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started due to an irregular winning or the like in the high base state, the flow of starting the demo movie display after the variable display is finished is as follows. As shown in FIG. 99, since it is the same as the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the high base state, detailed description here is omitted.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97, in the low base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol is completed due to irregular winning or the like, the effect control CPU 120 displays a menu guidance regarding effect adjustment. 004SG401 and volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) are not displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed (see FIG. 94A2), and then the demo movie is displayed. display. After the demo movie display ends, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081.

Further, as shown in FIG. 100, in the high base state, after the variable display of the first special symbol is completed due to irregular winning or the like, the effect control CPU 120 displays the menu guide display 004SG401 and the sound volume/light quantity guide display related to the effect adjustment. 004SG402 (guidance display) is not displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed (FIG. 98 (B2 )), then display the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 ( Alternatively, the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, even after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol in either the low base state or the high base state or after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol, immediately after the end of the variable display By not displaying the guidance display, it is possible to prevent the player from being prompted to adjust the performance more than necessary, and once the demo movie is displayed, there is a possibility that the player has left the seat. By prompting the performance adjustment immediately after the demo movie display is switched to the background display, it is possible to prompt the player to play in a suitable game environment, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

<Cold start>
Next, an operation example when the customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start (power-on with initialization) will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 101(C1) and 102, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started, the image display device 5 starts to display the start preparation display 004SG600 from the start timing. When 3 seconds have passed since the activation timing, the lighting of the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is started, and the effect control CPU 120 outputs a power-on designation command from the CPU 103. , at the timing when the first game state background designation command is received, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the initializing display 004SG610 is started in place of the startup preparation display 004SG600 (FIG. 101). (C2)), an operation for confirming the movable body 32 or the like is started as initial operation control (not shown). In addition, the board lamp and the frame lamp start blinking in red based on the brightness data table for initialization notification (lamp data table: initialization notification), and the output of initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. . In addition, the demo movie start waiting timer starts counting (60 seconds), and the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins.

Then, when 10 seconds have passed since the power-on designation command and the first game state background designation command were received, the display of the display during initialization 004SG610 ends with the end of the initialization process, and the display of the first background display 004SG081 ends. Display is started (see FIG. 101 (C3)). At this time, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guidance display 004SG402 are not displayed. In addition, the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) start blue wave lighting based on the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the button lamp 9e starts the default luminance data table ( White lighting is started based on the lamp data table: button white lighting). Also, the output of BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped.

Next, when 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start waiting timer started counting without satisfying the demonstration end condition, the menu guidance display 004SG401 is framed in from the lower left side of the display screen (Fig. 101 (C4) (see FIG. 101(C5)), and when the animation is displayed by moving rightward to the specified position, the sound volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 101 (C5)).

Thirty seconds have passed since then, and when 60 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started counting without the demonstration end condition being satisfied, it was determined that the demonstration effect start condition S2 was satisfied. Based on this, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the sound volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demonstration effect period) is started. (See FIGS. 101(C6) to (C9)). Also, the board lamps and frame lamps (except for the button lamp 9e) are switched from the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demonstration luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). Based on the luminance data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration), control of the lighting mode based on white is started, and the button lamp 9e continues lighting in white based on the luminance data table for default.

Since the subsequent flow is the same as the low base state flow of FIGS. 94 to 96, detailed description of each will be omitted.

<Hot start (low base state)>
Next, an operation example when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start (power-on without initialization) in the low base state and then the customer waiting demonstration effect is started will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. do.

As shown in FIGS. 103(D1) and 104, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start in the low base state, the image display device 5 starts to display the activation preparation display 004SG600 from the activation timing. When 3 seconds have passed since the start timing, the lighting of the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is started, and the effect control CPU 120 is a power failure recovery designation command from the CPU 103. , At the timing of receiving the first game state background designation command, the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are lit in blue waves based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) The button lamp 9e starts lighting in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting), and the output of BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. Also, the demo movie start waiting timer starts counting (90 seconds), and the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins.

Next, two seconds after the effect control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command and the first game state background designation command from the CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the first background display 004SG081. is started (see FIG. 103 (D2)), and an operation for confirming the movable body 32 or the like is started as initial operation control (not shown). Next, when 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start waiting timer started counting without satisfying the demonstration end condition, the menu guidance display 004SG401 is framed in from the lower left side of the display screen (FIG. 103 (D3) (see FIG. 103 (D4)), and when the animation is displayed by moving to the right to the specified position, the sound volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 103 (D4)).

60 seconds have passed since then, and when 90 seconds have passed since the timer for waiting for the start of the demonstration movie started counting, and the condition for ending the demonstration has not been satisfied, it is determined that the condition for starting the demonstration effect S3 has been satisfied. Based on this, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the sound volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demonstration effect period) is started. (See FIGS. 103(D5) to (D8)). In addition, the board lamp and the frame lamp (except for the button lamp 9e) are switched from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp Based on the data table: Customer Waiting Demo), control of the lighting mode based on white is started, and the button lamp 9e continues lighting in white based on the default brightness data table (Lamp Data Table: Button White Lighting).

Since the subsequent flow is the same as the low base state flow of FIGS. 94 to 96, detailed description of each will be omitted.

<Hot start (high base state)>
Next, an operation example when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start (power-on without initialization) in the low base state and then the customer waiting demonstration effect is started will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. do.

As shown in FIGS. 105(E1) and 106, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot-started in the high base state, the image display device 5 starts to display the startup preparation display 004SG600 from the startup timing. When 3 seconds have passed since the start timing, the lighting of the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is started, and the effect control CPU 120 is a power failure recovery designation command from the CPU 103. , at the timing of receiving the second and third game state background designation commands, the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are set to the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: Purple (or green) wave lighting is started based on the background time reduction)), and the button lamp 9e starts white lighting based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting), and the speaker 8L, 8R The output of the BGM is stopped, and the demo movie start waiting timer (90 seconds) is started to enter the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period).

Then, two seconds after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command and the second and third game state background designation command from the CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 in the image display device 5 ends, and the third background The display of the display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is started (see FIG. 105 (E2)), and at the same time, an operation for confirming the movable body 32 or the like is started as initial operation control (not shown). Next, when 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started counting without satisfying the demonstration end condition, the menu guidance display 004SG401 is framed in from the lower left side of the display screen (FIG. 105 (E3)). ), and when it is moved to the right to the prescribed position and displayed as an animation, the sound volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 105 (E4)).

60 seconds have passed since then, and when 90 seconds have passed since the timer for waiting for the start of the demonstration movie started counting, and the condition for ending the demonstration has not been satisfied, it is determined that the condition for starting the demonstration effect S3 has been satisfied. Based on this, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the sound volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demonstration effect period) is started. (See FIGS. 105(E5) to (E8)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are changed from the luminance data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demonstration luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and based on the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), control of the light emission mode based on white is started, and the button lamp 9e is the default luminance data White lighting continues based on the table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

Since the subsequent flow is the same as the flow in the high base state shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, detailed description of each will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 104 and 106, when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off and then hot-started, the effect control CPU 120 displays a menu guidance display 004SG401 and a sound volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) is not displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082). ) is displayed (see FIG. 103 (D2) and FIG. 105 (E2)), and then the demo movie display is displayed. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082). The first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 102, when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off and then cold-started, the effect control CPU 120 displays a menu guidance display 004SG401 and a volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to effect adjustment. ) is not displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed (see FIG. 101(C3)), and then the demo movie display is displayed. After the demo movie display ends, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081.

As described above, as a start-up situation before the amusement arcade opens, either a hot start (power-on without initialization) or a cold start (power-on with initialization) can be considered. However, the game clerk can check the background display after the power is turned on, check the demo movie display, and check the guide display, so that the efficiency of confirmation can be improved. Furthermore, when the background display is displayed when the amusement store opens and welcomes players, the background display will be a guide display, so the guidance for the production adjustment will be provided from the start of the game. A suitable gaming environment can be provided to the player, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In this embodiment, after a hot start or a cold start, after the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed, the menu guide display 004SG401 and volume/light amount guide display are displayed. 004SG402 is displayed and then the demo movie display is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. After is displayed, the demo movie display may be started without displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 104, when power is cut off in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the low base state, and then the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 displays a menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume related to effect adjustment. The first background display 004SG081 is displayed without displaying the light amount guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081 (see FIG. 101 (C3) and FIG. 103 (D2)), and then, View the demo movie display. After the demo movie is displayed, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the sound volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 105, when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off in the high base state and then turned on, the effect control CPU 120 displays a menu guidance display 004SG401 and sound volume/light amount guidance related to effect adjustment. The display 004SG402 (guidance display) is not displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed (FIG. 105 ( D2)), and then display the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 ( Alternatively, the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, before the opening of the amusement arcade, it can be considered that there are two possible states of startup: low base state and high base state. If the background is displayed again after that, there is a high possibility that you have already confirmed the status, so you can display the guide display from the start of the background display. , When the background display is displayed when the amusement store opens and welcomes players, the background display will be a guide display, so it is possible to properly guide the production adjustment from the timing of the start of the game. A suitable game environment can be provided for the player, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Further, after the variable display is finished, the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed without displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402, and the display is continued for a predetermined period of time. After (for example, 30 seconds) has passed, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the sound volume/light quantity guidance display 004SG402 are displayed with specific animation (fade-in display) to display the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG083). Display 004SG082) so as to be superimposed on display 004SG082), then display a demo movie display, and after the display period of the demo movie display has passed, menu guidance display 004SG401 and sound volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 are displayed for the first time. The animation display (frame-in display) common to the animation display (frame-in display) of the display 004SG401 and the sound volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 enables the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082). displayed so as to be superimposed on the

In this way, by not displaying the guide display immediately after the end of the variable display, it is possible to prevent unnecessarily prompting for adjustment of the presentation, and once the demo movie display ends, the background display is changed from the demo movie display. By prompting the production adjustment immediately after switching to , it is possible to prompt the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, and furthermore, even when the guide display is displayed immediately after the demo movie display is switched to the background display, the fluctuation ends. By performing guidance display by animation display common to the case where guidance display is performed later, it is possible to appeal that the guidance display has been displayed without spending a cost, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control. .

In the present embodiment, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light guide display 004SG402 are displayed as animations by frame-in display, but the present invention is not limited to this. , moving speed, display position, etc. are not limited to those described above. Further, as the animation display, other forms of animation display such as fade-in display, moving display, and enlarged display may be used.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 96, 99, 104, 106 and 180, the effect control CPU 120 determines that 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed after the variable display ends in the low base state. After 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed after the variable display is completed in the high base state, the demo movie display is displayed, and the pachinko machine 1 is displayed in the low base state. After 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) have passed after receiving a power failure restoration designation command based on the hot start, the demo movie display is displayed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is hot in the high base state. After 90 seconds (the third specific period tc5) have passed since the power failure restoration designation command was received based on the activation at the start, the demo movie display is displayed. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific periods tc1, tc2) is longer than 90 seconds (third specific periods tc4, tc5).

In this way, if the demo movie display is displayed immediately after the end of the variable display, there is a possibility that the players have not changed hands, which is troublesome. On the other hand, after the hot start, not the player but the game clerk will be present, so by setting tc4 and tc5 = 90 seconds, which are rather short, the game clerk can confirm the display of the demo movie. This can be done immediately, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 96, 99, 102 and 180, the effect control CPU 120 determines that 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed after the variable display ends in the low base state. After 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed after the movie display is displayed and the variable display is completed in the high base state, the demo movie display is displayed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started in the low base state. After 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on designation command was received based on the fact that the pachinko machine 1 was started, the demo movie display is displayed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started in the high base state. After 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on designation command was received based on the activation, the demo movie display is displayed. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific periods tc1, tc2) is longer than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

In this way, if the demo movie display is displayed immediately after the end of the variable display, there is a possibility that the players have not changed hands, which is troublesome. After setting the seconds and turning on the power with initialization, this is the start method that must be performed first when a game machine is installed in a game arcade, so the demo movie display is displayed immediately. By setting tc3 = 60 seconds, which is a short time, the game clerk can immediately check the demonstration movie display and become more familiar with the introduced machine. Customer waiting control can be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 102, 104, 106 and 180, the effect control CPU 120 receives a power failure restoration designation command based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 has been activated by hot start in the low base state. After 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) have elapsed, the demo movie display is displayed, and a power failure restoration designation command is received based on the hot start of the pachinko game machine 1 in the high base state. After 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) have passed since then, the demo movie display is displayed, and the power-on designation command is received based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by cold start in the low base state. After 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed, the demo movie display is displayed, and 60 seconds have passed since the power-on designation command was received based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 was activated by cold start in the high base state. A demo movie display is displayed when seconds (the second specific period tc3) have elapsed. In this case, 90 seconds (third specific periods tc4, tc5) is longer than 60 seconds (second specific period tc3).

In this way, a cold start (turning on power with initialization) is a start method that must be performed first when a game machine is installed in a game arcade. By doing so, the game clerk can immediately confirm the demonstration movie display and can have them become more familiar with the introduced machine, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 96, 99 and 102, the effect control CPU 120 starts the demonstration movie display after 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed after the variable display ends in the low base state. After 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed after the demo movie display is completed, the demo movie display is displayed again, and 120 seconds (the first specific When the period tc2) has elapsed, the demo movie display is displayed, and after 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed after the demo movie display is completed, the demo movie display is displayed again, and the pachinko machine is played in the low base state. When 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on designation command was received based on the fact that the gaming machine 1 was activated by a cold start, the demonstration movie display is displayed, and the demonstration movie display ends. After 30 seconds (predetermined period) have passed, the demo movie display is displayed again, and a power-on designation command is received based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been cold-started in the high base state. After 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed, the demo movie display is displayed, and after 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed after the demo movie display is completed, the demonstration movie is displayed again. indicate. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific periods tc1, tc2) is longer than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

In this way, if the demo movie display is displayed immediately after the end of the variable display, there is a possibility that the players have not changed hands, which is annoying. Specific periods tc1, tc2) are set, and a cold start (turning on power with initialization) is a start method that must be performed first when a game machine is installed in a game arcade. By setting tc3 = 60 seconds, which is a short time, as shown in , the game clerk can immediately check the demo movie display and get more detailed about the introduced machine. , after the variable display in the low base state, after the fluctuation in the high base state, or after a cold start, the demo movie is displayed once, and then the demo movie is displayed again. By sharing, it is possible to show the demo movie display stably, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 106, after being activated by hot start, a activation preparation display 004SG600 indicating that activation is in progress is displayed (see FIG. 103 (D1) and FIG. 105 (E1)), Control the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) at the timing related to displaying the display indicating that it is running. , the button lamp 9e is controlled using one default luminance data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) at timing associated with displaying the startup preparation display 004SG600.

In this way, by using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to emit light before the background display is displayed, the board lamp and frame lamp are normal at the time of startup. After that, it is possible to seamlessly switch to the light emission mode during customer waiting, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

(End of customer waiting demo production Time lapse Ver.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demonstration effect ends with the lapse of time will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. FIG. FIGS. 107A to 107E are diagrams showing an operation example when the demonstration movie display ends after a lapse of time in the low base state. FIG. 108 is a timing chart showing how the demonstration movie display ends over time in the low base state. FIG. 109 is a timing chart showing how the demonstration movie display ends over time in the high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an operation example when the customer waiting demonstration effect ends after the passage of time when the game state is the low base state will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, in the low base state, the first demo movie display started when any one of the start conditions S1 to S5 is satisfied, and the end condition E1 is satisfied, that is, the demonstration movie display is started. If it ends after 55 seconds have passed since then, it shifts to the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period). After that, when 30 seconds, which is the sixth time period, has passed since the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) has passed, it is determined that the start condition S6 is satisfied, and the demonstration movie display is started again. Thereafter, the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demonstration movie period) are repeatedly executed until the end conditions E2 to E4 of the demonstration movie display are completed.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107(A), when the last 4th scene of the demo movie is displayed, the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are Based on the luminance data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration), the button lamp 9e is lit in a white-based light emission mode, and the button lamp 9e is based on the luminance data table for default (lamp data table: button white lighting). White lighting is performed.

Then, when the end condition E1 for displaying the first demo movie is established, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: normal background), Blue wave lighting of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started (see FIG. 107(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period of time tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has passed since the end condition E1 was satisfied, the accident prevention display 004SG322 of the caution 2 part of the fourth scene gradually changes to black, and the black caution is displayed. A fade-out display (switching display) that assimilates with the background display 004SG321 is started (see FIG. 107(C)). After the display screen turns black and blacks out, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decoration pattern is started, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 is displayed in the frame from the lower left side of the display screen (FIG. 107 ( D)), when it moves to the right to the prescribed position and is displayed in animation, the sound volume/light quantity guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 107(E)).

That is, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: normal background) when the end condition E1 is satisfied. While the light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started, the switching control of switching the display contents from the demo movie display to the normal background display including the fade-out display (switching display) is started. , the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as the normal background is started after a predetermined period of time tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has passed since the termination condition E1 is satisfied (see FIGS. 107(C) and 108). .

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 first outputs a command designating the normal background display to the display control unit 123 when the end condition E1 is satisfied. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command corresponding to the normal background display: B10E to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the extended command: B10E sends a normal command corresponding to the normal background display. Light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) is started. On the other hand, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display after a predetermined period of time tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extension command B10E corresponding to the normal background display.

Therefore, the background display is started after a predetermined period of time tg has passed since the light emission modes of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched. Since the display is started after the predetermined period tg and the switching display period have passed, it appears that the board lamp and The normal background light emission control of the frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started.

That is, the effect control CPU 120 converts the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) to the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table) before switching the display from the demonstration display to the normal background display. : background normal) to control the board lamp and the frame lamp (except the button lamp 9e).

In this way, by adopting a step-by-step design in which the control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched first, and then the normal background display is started, the aftertaste of the end of the demonstration display is left. It is possible to prevent the situation from becoming worse, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 turns the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period after the variable display in the low base state ends. Control is performed using the luminance data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration), and in the first customer waiting period after the second customer waiting period in the high base state ends, the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background), and before switching the display from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG081, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is changed to the normal background Before switching to the brightness data table and controlling the display from the demo movie display to the first background display 004SG081, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is changed to the brightness data table for normal background. (Lamp data table: background normal) to control.

In this way, by adopting a step-by-step design in which the control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is first switched, and then the background display is started, the aftertaste of the demo movie display is left behind. It is possible to prevent the situation from becoming worse, and furthermore, it is possible to quickly inform the player of which state the lamp is in by means of the lighting mode of the lamp, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Further, when the demonstration movie display is started based on the fulfillment of any one of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the sound volume/light amount guide display are displayed after a predetermined time has passed since the background display was switched to the demo movie display. While the display of 004SG402 is started, if the display of the demo movie ends based on the fulfillment of the end condition E1, the display of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the sound volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 are displayed when the demo movie display is switched to the background display. be started.

<High base state>
First, an operation example when the customer waiting demonstration effect ends after the passage of time when the gaming state is the high base state will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 109. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 109, in the high base state, the first demonstration movie display started when any one of the start conditions S1 to S5 is satisfied, and the end condition E1 is satisfied, that is, the demonstration movie display is started. If it ends based on the fact that 55 seconds have passed since then, it shifts to the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period). After that, when 30 seconds, which is the sixth time, has passed since the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) has passed, it is assumed that the start condition S6 is satisfied, and the demonstration movie display is started again. Thereafter, the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demonstration movie period) are repeatedly executed until the end conditions E2 to E4 of the demonstration movie display are completed.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107(A), when the last 4th scene of the demo movie is displayed, the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are Based on the luminance data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration), the button lamp 9e is lit in a white-based light emission mode, and the button lamp 9e is based on the luminance data table for default (lamp data table: button white lighting). White lighting is performed.

Then, when the end condition E1 of the first demonstration movie display is satisfied, the luminance data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is changed to the luminance data table for the high B background (lamp data table: variable background (or lamp data table: background time saving)), and purple (or green) wave lighting of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started (see FIG. 107(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period of time tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has passed since the termination condition E1 was satisfied, and when a predetermined period of time tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has passed since the termination condition E1 has been satisfied. Then, a fade-out display (switching display) is started in which the accident prevention display 004SG322 of the caution 2 part of the fourth scene gradually changes to black and merges with the black warning background display 004SG321 (FIG. 107(C)). reference). After the display screen is blacked out, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decoration pattern is started, and the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed from the lower left side of the display screen. When the frame-in display (see FIG. 107(D)) is displayed and the animation is displayed by moving toward the right side to the specified position, the volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 107(E) )reference).

That is, when the end condition E1 is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 converts the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) to the luminance data table for high B background (lamp data table: variable background probability (or Lamp data table: background time saving))) and start light emission control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), while changing the display content from the demo movie display to the fade-out display (switching display). 3 Background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and switching control for switching to the background display of the decorative pattern are started, but the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as the background of the high-B music is predetermined from the establishment of the termination condition E1. It starts after the period tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed (see FIG. 107(C) and FIG. 109).

Specifically, when the end condition E1 is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 first issues a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decoration pattern. Output. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the extended command corresponding to the decorative pattern background display: B11D (or B121) to the effect control CPU 120, The effect control CPU 120 that has received the extended command: B11D (or B121) displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table : Start light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). On the other hand, after the display control unit 123 transmits the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the extended command corresponding to the background display of the decorative pattern: B11D (or B121), the display control unit 123 waits for a predetermined period of time tg (tg1=0). 3 seconds), the demo movie display is switched to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative design background display.

Therefore, the background display is started after a predetermined period of time tg has passed since the light emission modes of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched. Since the display of the background display 004SG082) and the decoration pattern is started after the predetermined period tg and the switching display period have passed, the demo movie display ends and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) appears. 004SG082) and display of the decoration pattern, light emission control of the high-B music background of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started.

That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: demo) to the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: variable background (or lamp data table: reduced background time)) to control the board lamps and frame lamps (except the button lamp 9e).

In this way, the control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched first, and then the high B background display is started. deteriorating, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 turns the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period after the end of the variable display in the high base state. Control using the waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and in the first customer waiting period after the second customer waiting period in the high base state ends, the high B background brightness data table ( Before switching the display from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), the customer waits Switch from the luminance data table for demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the luminance data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and control it, from the demonstration movie display to the second Before switching the display to the 3-background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), the luminance data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is converted to the luminance data table for the high B background (lamp data table: Control by switching to background variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)).

In this way, by adopting a step-by-step design in which the control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched first, and then the background display is started, the aftertaste of the end of the demonstration movie display is left. It is possible to prevent the situation from becoming worse, and furthermore, it is possible to promptly inform the player of which state the lamp is in by means of the lighting mode of the lamp, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Further, when the demonstration movie display is started based on the fulfillment of any one of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the sound volume/light amount guide display are displayed after a predetermined time has passed since the background display was switched to the demo movie display. While the display of 004SG402 is started, if the display of the demo movie ends based on the fulfillment of the end condition E1, the display of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the sound volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 are displayed when the display of the demo movie is switched to the background display. be started.

(End of customer waiting demo production, start winning ver.)
Next, the flow when the customer-waiting demonstration effect ends with the starting winning will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 115. FIG. FIGS. 110A to 110E are diagrams showing an operation example when the demonstration movie display ends with the start winning in the low base state. 111, (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the details of the display mode of FIG. 110. FIG. FIG. 112 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demonstration movie display ends with the first start winning in the low base state. FIG. 113 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demonstration movie display ends with the second start winning in the low base state. FIG. 114 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demonstration movie display ends with the second start winning in the high base state. FIG. 115 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demonstration movie display ends with the first start winning in the high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an operation example when the customer waiting demonstration effect ends with the first start winning when the game state is the low base state will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 112. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, in the low base state, the demonstration movie display started when any one of the start conditions S1 to S6 is met is satisfied when the end condition E2 is met. When the game ends based on the occurrence of the start winning (the start of the variable display of the first special symbol), the display of the demo movie ends and the variable display of the decoration symbol starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(A), during the demo movie, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is illuminated in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the first starting prize is generated while the first part of the introduction of the second scene in the demonstration movie display is being displayed and the end condition E2 is satisfied, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer Waiting demo) is switched to the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal), and blue wave lighting of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) starts (see FIG. 110(B)). . Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) elapses after the end condition E2 is established, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decoration pattern is started, and the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. (See FIGS. 110(C)-(E)).

That is, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the luminance data table for normal background (lamp data table: normal background) when the end condition E2 is satisfied. While starting the light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), the switching control for switching the display content from the demo movie display to the normal background (variable display) display and the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. However, the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns are started at least after a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has passed since the termination condition E2 is established (see FIGS. 110(C) and 112).

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 first outputs to the display control unit 123 a command designating the normal background display and the variable display of the decoration pattern when the end condition E2 is satisfied. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits the extended command B10E corresponding to the variable display of the normal background display and the decorative pattern to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 that received the extended command: B10E Light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to the variable display of the background display and decorative pattern is started. On the other hand, the display control unit 123 transmits the extended command B10E corresponding to the variable display of the normal background display and decorative pattern, and after a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed, the display control unit 123 displays the demo movie. Switch to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 111(A), when the first start prize is generated while the first part of the introduction of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed and the end condition E2 is satisfied, the customer waiting demo The brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave lighting of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) starts. On the other hand, until the predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) elapses after the termination condition E2 is established, the demonstration movie display is maintained and the variable display of the small symbols is started (FIG. 111(B)). reference).

Then, when a predetermined period of time th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was established, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decoration pattern is started, and the second in the special figure reservation storage display area 5U After the 1 pending display 004SG101 is displayed, shift display is started in which the first pending display 004SG101 moves to the active display area 5F (see FIGS. 111(C) and 111(D)).

In addition, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C are displayed in the special figure pending storage display area 5U, as shown in FIGS. 1 Until the pending display 004SG101 moves to the active display area 5F, that is, until the shift display of the pending display is completed, the scroll display is not started while being temporarily stopped in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C, and each character is displayed. performs a variable start action. The variable start action includes, for example, the character displayed in the character display section 004SG052 moving in a manner different from the scroll display, such as moving the face and body or changing the facial expression on the pedestal display section 004SG054.

Then, when the shift display of the pending display is completed, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C start scrolling in the order of left, right, and center (see FIG. 109(F)). When the scroll display starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and fade-out display starts, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. It gradually increases, and when the speed becomes high, the transmittance becomes almost 90% (see FIGS. 109(G) and 112). In addition, in the low base state (first production mode), the mode shown in FIG. 111 is obtained even when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the scrolling display of the decorative pattern are started after a predetermined period of time th has passed since the light emission modes of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched. Visually, before the demo movie display ends and the scrolling display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns appears, the light emission control for the normal background of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started. It will be.

That is, the effect control CPU 120 converts the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) to the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table) before switching the display from the demonstration display to the normal background display. : background normal) to control the board lamp and the frame lamp (except the button lamp 9e).

In this way, by first switching the control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), the switching of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) quickly satisfies the first starting condition. It is possible to inform the end of the demonstration movie display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed, with a wider range than the display screen. is easily visible to the player, it is possible to quickly inform the player that the first start condition has been satisfied and the demonstration movie display has ended.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 113, in the low base state, the demo movie display ends due to the start of the variable display of the second special symbol due to an irregular winning or the like. Since it is the same as the flow in which the demonstration movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the base state, the detailed description is omitted here.

<High base state>
First, an operation example when the customer waiting demonstration effect ends with the second start winning when the game state is the high base state will be described based on FIG. 114 with reference to FIGS. 110 and 181. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 114, in the high base state, the demonstration movie display started when any one of the start conditions S1 to S6 is satisfied is followed by the satisfaction of the end condition E2, that is, the second start winning ( When it ends based on the occurrence of the start of the variable display of the second special symbol), the demonstration movie display ends and the variable display of the decoration symbol starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(A), during the demo movie, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is illuminated in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the second start winning occurs while the first part of the introduction of the second scene in the demonstration movie display is being displayed and the end condition E2 is satisfied, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer Waiting demo) to high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the purple (or green) color of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) Wave lighting is started (see FIG. 110B. Blue wave lighting is shown in FIG. 110B). Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has passed since the termination condition E2 was established, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decoration pattern is started. , the variable display of decorative patterns is started (see FIGS. 110(C)-(E)).

That is, when the end condition E2 is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 converts the luminance data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) to the luminance data table for the high B background (lamp data table: variable background probability (or Lamp data table: background time reduction))) and start light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), while changing the display content from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative design is started, but the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative design are maintained at least for a predetermined period of time th ( th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed (see FIG. 110(C)).

More specifically, when the end condition E2 is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 first sends a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decoration pattern. to output Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the extension command corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern: B11D (or B121) to the effect control CPU 120, The effect control CPU 120 that has received the extended command: B11D (or B121) displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the board lamp based on the high B background brightness data table corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern. And the light emission control of the frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started. On the other hand, the display control unit 123 transmits the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the extended command corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern: B11D (or B121), and then for a predetermined period of time th (th1=0). 3 seconds), the demo movie display is switched to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 181(A), when the second start prize is generated while the first part of the introduction of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed and the end condition E2 is satisfied, the customer waiting demo Switching from the brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e ) is started, while the demonstration movie display is maintained until a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) elapses after the termination condition E2 is satisfied. Variable display of patterns is started (see FIG. 181(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) elapses after the termination condition E2 is satisfied, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decoration pattern is started, and After the second reserved display 004SG102 is displayed in the reserved storage display area 5U, shift display is started in which the second reserved display 004SG102 moves to the active display area 5F (see FIG. 181(C)).

In addition, the decorative design that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the second displayed in the special design reservation storage display area 5U, as shown in FIGS. 2 Suspended display 004SG102 is moved to the active display area 5F, that is, until the shift display of the suspended display is completed, the scroll display is not started while being temporarily stopped in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C, but the high base In the state, the variation start action of each character is not executed (see FIG. 82(B)).

Then, when the shift display of the pending display is completed, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C start scrolling all at once on the left, right, and center (see FIG. 181(E)). When the scroll display starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and fade-out display starts, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. It gradually increases, and when the speed becomes high, the transmittance becomes almost 90% (see FIGS. 181(F) and (G)).

In addition, in the high base state (second production mode, third production mode), the mode shown in FIG. 181 is obtained even when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

Therefore, the scrolling display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern is started for a predetermined period of time th , the board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e ) is started.

In other words, the effect control CPU 120 controls the board lamp and the frame lamp (except the button lamp 9e) to be lowered from the demonstration movie display when the first start condition is satisfied while the demonstration movie is being displayed in the low base state. Before switching the display to the variable display of the first special symbol in the base state, the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is changed to the luminance data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) , and when the second start condition is satisfied while the demo movie display is being displayed in the high base state, before the display is switched from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state. Then, the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) is switched to the luminance data table for high B background (lamp data table: variable background (or lamp data table: short background time)).

In this way, in the high base state, by first switching the control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), by switching the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), the second It is possible to notify that the starting condition is established and the demonstration movie display is finished, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Also, in the low base state and high base state, by switching the control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) first, by switching the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), It is possible to notify that the first start condition or the second start condition is established and the demonstration movie display is finished, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In particular, the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demonstration movie display is displayed, with a wider range than the display screen. is easily visible to the player, it is possible to quickly inform the player that the second start condition has been met and the demonstration movie display has ended.

Also, as shown in FIG. 115, in the high base state, the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol is started due to an irregular winning or the like. Since it is the same as the flow in which the demonstration movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the base state, the detailed description is omitted here.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) to the first special symbol from the demo movie display when the first start winning occurs while the demo movie is being displayed. Before switching the display to the variable display, switch from the luminance data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) and control it to display the demo movie. is displayed, before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special pattern, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: variable background (or lamp data table: reduced background time)) for control.

In this way, even if any start winning prize occurs, by switching first from the control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) By switching to , it is possible to quickly notify that the starting prize has been generated and the display of the demonstration movie has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the transmittance of the decoration pattern from a first value (for example, 0%) to a When the scrolling display of decorative patterns is displayed so that the second value (for example, 90%) is higher than the value, and the first start winning or the second starting winning occurs while the demo movie is being displayed, Before the transmittance of the decorative pattern reaches 90%, the display is switched from the demonstration movie display to the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Thus, by completing the switching from the demo movie display before the transmittance of the decoration pattern increases, it is possible to notify that the start winning has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, and as a result, it is possible to inform the customer that the demo movie display has ended. Wait control can be performed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the transmittance of the decorative pattern from a first value (for example, 0%) to a A scrolling display of decorative patterns is displayed so as to have a second value (for example, 90%) higher than the value, and when the demo movie display is displayed in the low base state, the first start prize and the second start prize are displayed. If this occurs, the display is switched from the demonstration movie display to the variable display of the decoration pattern before the transmittance of the decoration pattern reaches 90%, and when the demonstration movie display is displayed in the high base state, the first When a start winning prize or a second starting winning prize occurs, the display is switched from the demonstration movie display to the variable display of the decorative pattern before the transmittance of the decorative pattern reaches 90%.

In this way, in both the low base state and the high base state, by completing the switching from the demo movie display before the transmittance of the decoration pattern increases, the first start prize and the second start prize are generated. Then, it is possible to inform the end of the demonstration movie display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, even if the variable display of the small pattern is started with the occurrence of the first start prize or the second start prize, the transparency of the decorative pattern is not changed when the decorative pattern is performing the fluctuation start action. Before the rate changes from the first value, the demo movie display is switched to the background display for variable display of decorative patterns.

In addition, when the first start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the first special symbol from the demo movie display before the transmittance of the decoration symbol reaches 90%. If the display is switched to the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the demo movie display will start before the transmittance of the decorative pattern reaches 90%. The display is switched to the variable display of the decoration pattern corresponding to the second special pattern.

In this way, regardless of whether the first start-up prize or the second start-up prize occurs, the start-up prize can be achieved by completing the switching from the demo movie display before the transmittance of the decoration pattern increases. It is possible to notify that the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

(End of customer waiting demonstration, steering wheel operation Ver.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demonstration effect is terminated by the steering wheel operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. FIGS. 116A to 116C are diagrams showing an operation example in the case where demonstration movie display is terminated by steering wheel operation in the low base state. FIG. 117 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the display of the demonstration movie is terminated by operating the steering wheel in the low base state.

<Low base state>
116 and 117, an operation example when the customer waiting demonstration effect is terminated by operating the steering wheel when the game state is the low base state will be described. In the following, an operation example will be described in which the customer waiting demonstration effect is terminated by operating the steering wheel in the low base state. However, since the operation example is almost the same except that the background display and the lamp data are changed to those for the high base, the explanation is omitted here.

As shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, in the low base state, the demo movie display started when any one of the start conditions S1 to S6 is met ends when the end condition E3 is met, that is, when the steering wheel is operated. , the display of the demo movie ends and the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decoration pattern is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116(A), during the demo movie, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is illuminated in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the steering wheel operation is detected while the first part of the introduction of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed and the end condition E3 is established, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration ) to the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background), and blue wave lighting of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started (see FIG. 116B). Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) elapses after the termination condition E3 is established, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decoration pattern is started, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 is displayed on the screen. is displayed in the frame from the lower left side of , and is moved to the right to a specified position and animated, the sound volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 116(C)).

That is, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: normal background) when the end condition E3 is satisfied. While starting the light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), the switching control to switch the display content from the demo movie display to the normal background (pattern stop) display is started, but the normal background display and The decorative pattern is started after a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since at least the termination condition E3 was established (see FIGS. 116(C) and 117).

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 first outputs a command designating the normal background display to the display control unit 123 when the end condition E3 is satisfied. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command corresponding to the normal background display: B10E to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the extended command: B10E sends a normal command corresponding to the normal background display. Light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) is started. On the other hand, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display after a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extension command B10E corresponding to the normal background display.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the display of the decorative pattern are started after a predetermined period of time th has passed since the light emission modes of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched. Visually, before the demo movie display is finished and the display is switched to the first background display 004SG081, the decorative pattern and the guide display, the light emission control for the normal background of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started. will be

In other words, when the operation of the ball-hitting operation handle 30 is detected while the demo movie display is being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 sets the brightness for customer waiting demonstration before switching the display from the demonstration display to the normal background display. The data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to control the board lamps and frame lamps (except the button lamp 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) first, the hitting operation handle 30 is quickly operated by switching the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). For example, it is possible to notify that the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demonstration movie display is displayed, with a wider range than the display screen. is easy for the player to see, it is possible to quickly inform the player that the end condition E3 has been satisfied and the demonstration movie display has ended.

(End of Customer Waiting Demonstration, Menu Operation Ver.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demonstration effect is terminated by menu operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. FIG. FIGS. 118A to 118C are diagrams showing an operation example when the demonstration movie display is terminated by the menu operation in the low base state. FIG. 119 is a timing chart showing the flow of ending the demonstration movie display by menu operation in the low base state. FIG. 120 is a timing chart showing the flow of ending demo movie display by menu operation in the high base state.

<Low base state>
118 to 120, an operation example when the customer waiting demonstration effect ends by opening the menu display when the game state is the low base state will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, in the low base state, the demo movie display started when any one of the start conditions S1 to S6 is met is completed when the end condition E4 is met, that is, an operation to open the menu display 004SG410 (hereinafter referred to as , menu operation), the display of the demo movie ends, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decoration pattern starts, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of it. The operation to open the menu display 004SG410 is performed by operating the push button 31B while the menu guidance display 004SG401 is being displayed, but other operations such as the stick controller 31A may be performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(A), during the demo movie, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is illuminated in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when a menu operation is detected while the first part of the introduction of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed and the termination condition E4 is established, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration ) to the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal), and blue wave lighting of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started (see FIG. 118(B)). Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has passed since the termination condition E4 was established, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decoration pattern is started, and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is turned off. The menu display 004SG410 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and in front of the first background display 004SG081 (see FIG. 118(C)).

That is, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the luminance data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) when the end condition E4 is satisfied. While the light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started, the switching control of switching the display content from the demo movie display to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 is started, but the normal background display is started. And the menu display 004SG410 starts at least after a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E4 was satisfied (see FIGS. 118(C) and 119).

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 first outputs a command designating the normal background and the menu display 004SG410 to the display control unit 123 when the end condition E4 is established. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits the extension command B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the extension command: B10E sends the normal background and menu. Light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to display 004SG410 is started. On the other hand, after the extension command B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 is transmitted, the display control unit 123 displays the demo movie after a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has passed. Switch to menu display 004SG410.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the menu display 004SG410 is started after a predetermined period of time th has passed since the light emission modes of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched. At the top, before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081, the decorative pattern and menu display 004SG410, the normal background light emission control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started. will be

In other words, the effect control CPU 120 switches the display from the demonstration display to the normal background display and the menu guide display 004SG401 when an operation to display the menu display 004SG410 is detected by the push button 31B while the demo movie display is being displayed. Before this, switch from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: normal background) and switch the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e ).

In this way, by switching the control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) first, the menu guidance display 004SG401 is quickly displayed by switching the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). Therefore, by operating the push button 31B, it is possible to inform the end of the demonstration movie display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demonstration movie display is displayed, with a wider range than the display screen. is easily visible to the player, it is possible to quickly inform the player that the end condition E4 has been satisfied and the demonstration movie display has ended.

<High base state>
118 and 120, an operation example when the customer waiting demonstration effect ends by opening the menu display when the game state is the high base state will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 118 and 120, in the high base state, the demo movie display started when any one of the start conditions S1 to S6 is met is completed when the end condition E4 is met, that is, an operation to open the menu display 004SG410 (hereinafter , menu operation), the display of the demo movie ends and the display of the third background display 004SG083 (the first background display 004SG081 in FIG. 118) and the decoration pattern is started. , the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of it. The operation to open the menu display 004SG410 is performed by operating the push button 31B while the menu guidance display 004SG401 is being displayed, but other operations such as the stick controller 31A may be performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(A), during the demo movie, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is illuminated in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when a menu operation is detected while the first part of the introduction of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed and the termination condition E4 is established, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration ) to the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and purple (or green) wave lighting of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) is started (in blue in FIG. 118(B)). Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has passed since the termination condition E4 was satisfied, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decoration pattern is started. , the volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see FIG. 118(C)). ).

That is, when the end condition E4 is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 selects a high value from the customer waiting demonstration luminance data table B background luminance data table and a high B background luminance data table from the customer waiting demonstration luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration). Switch to B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and start light emission control of board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while regarding the display content , the switching control for switching from the demo movie display to the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is started, but the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 are at least terminated. It starts after a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the condition E4 was established (see FIG. 118(C) and FIG. 120).

Specifically, when the termination condition E4 is established, the effect control CPU 120 first outputs a command designating the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 to the display control unit 123. . Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits the extension command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 to the effect control CPU 120, and the extension command : The effect control CPU 120 that has received B11D (or B121) creates a high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change ( Alternatively, the light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the lamp data table: background time saving) is started. On the other hand, after the display control unit 123 transmits the extension command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410, the display control unit 123 waits for a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3). seconds), the demo movie display is switched to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410.

Therefore, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) or the menu display 004SG410 is started for a predetermined period of time th , the board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e ), light emission control for the high B background is started.

In other words, when an operation to display the menu display 004SG410 by the push button 31B is detected while the demonstration movie display is being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display from the demonstration display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082). ) and menu display 004SG410, the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is changed to the luminance data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table : background time saving)) to control the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) first, the menu guidance display 004SG401 is quickly displayed by switching the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). Therefore, by operating the push button 31B, it is possible to inform the end of the demonstration movie display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demonstration movie display is displayed, with a wider range than the display screen. is easily visible to the player, it is possible to quickly inform the player that the end condition E4 has been satisfied and the demonstration movie display has ended.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: variable background (or lamp data table: short background )) is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the luminance data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: lamp data table: A brightness data table with a different light emission mode from background time saving)) may be set.

(End of customer waiting demonstration effect when interrupt condition is satisfied)
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120, when the interrupt condition is satisfied while displaying the demo movie display, that is, end condition 2 (start winning), end condition 3 (handle operation), end When any of the conditions E4 (menu operation) is satisfied, the normal background display and the background display are changed from the demo movie display without displaying a fade-out display or the like that is displayed as a switching display when the termination condition E1 (elapsed time) is satisfied. 3 The display is switched to the background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082).

In this way, when the demo movie display ends due to the passage of time, the switching display is interposed to prevent it from appearing to have suddenly switched. By showing the abrupt switching, it is possible to highlight the interrupted end by comparing the events, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

More specifically, when the demonstration movie is displayed in the low base state, the effect control CPU 120 satisfies an interrupt condition, ie, end condition 2 (start winning), end condition 3 (steering wheel operation). , end condition E4 (menu operation) is satisfied, and the normal background display is switched from the demo movie display without displaying a fade-out display or the like that is displayed as a switching display when the end condition E1 (elapsed time) is satisfied. , and when the demo movie is displayed in the high base state and the interrupt conditions are satisfied, that is, end condition 2 (start winning), end condition 3 (steering wheel operation), end condition E4 (menu operation) is established, the fade-out display displayed as a switching display when the end condition E1 (elapsed time) is established is not displayed, and the third background display 004SG083 ( Alternatively, the display is switched to the second background display 004SG082).

In this way, when the demo movie display ends due to the passage of time, the switching display is interposed to prevent it from appearing to have suddenly switched. By showing the abrupt switchover, it is possible to highlight the fact that the process ended due to an interruption by comparing those events, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the interrupt conditions are satisfied while the demo movie is being displayed, that is, end condition 2 (start winning), end condition 3 (steering wheel operation), end condition E4 (menu operation) is established, the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display is changed from the demo movie display without displaying a fade-out display or the like that is displayed as a switching display when the end condition E1 (elapsed time) is established. Although the form in which the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and ends when the demo movie display is displayed. If any one of the conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied, the menu display 004SG410 may be displayed as the background display without displaying the switching display.

(End of Customer Waiting Demonstration, Error Occurrence Ver.)
Next, the case where an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 124. FIG. FIG. 121A is a timing chart showing an example of normal operation of the payout device associated with winning, and FIG. 121B is a timing chart showing an example of error operation of the payout device associated with winning. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a dead ball error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration effect. FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the priority layer. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration effect started in the low base state. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration effect started in the high base state.

First of all, one of the errors, ie, the bulb-out error, will be described. The out-of-ball error is an error that occurs when a game ball is not detected by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 even though the payout device 004SG031 is operated by the payout control unit.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(A), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are paid out by the payout device 004SG031 on the basis that the payout condition for the prize balls is satisfied due to the occurrence of a prize or the like. When a payout operation (for example, rotation of a sprocket (not shown)) is performed, game balls are paid out to the payout passage. When all five game balls are detected by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 after the payout operation is started, the CPU 103 terminates the payout process assuming that the payout was performed normally. Therefore, the error display 004SG700 (see FIG. 122(B)) consisting of the mark and the characters "ball out error" is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the main lamp 9a will also be described later. No error flashing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(B), a payout operation (for example, rotation of a sprocket (not shown)) for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls is performed by the payout device 004SG031 in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. action) is performed, the CPU 103 detects the game ball by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 in a state where there are unpaid balls (for example, a state in which the remaining three game balls out of five are not detected). is not detected continues for a first determination period tl (for example, tl=5 seconds). When it is determined that the game ball is not detected within the first determination period tl, that is, the period in which the game ball is not detected while the unpaid ball exists continues for the first determination period tl. , Payout operation of paying out 5 game balls and game balls within the first determination period tl until the game balls of the number of unpaid balls (for example, 5) are detected assuming that the payout was not performed normally The retry operation for repeatedly executing the detection judgment of is continuously executed.

In this retry operation period, if five game balls are not detected even after the third retry operation is completed, that is, there is a period in which no game balls are detected while there are unpaid balls. If it continues over the second determination period tm (for example, 15 seconds, including the first determination period tl), the CPU 103 determines that there is insufficient supply of game balls to the payout device 004SG031, failure of the payout device 004SG031, ball clogging in the payout passage, etc. Assuming that there is a possibility that one of the above problems has occurred, an error designation command indicating the occurrence of a dead ball error is transmitted, and the retry operation is continued.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches the main lamp 9a to red flashing for error notification based on the reception of the error designation command, while the board lamp and the side lamp 9b maintain the control of the light emission mode up to that point. do. Also, when a predetermined period of time tk (for example, tk=3 seconds) has elapsed after receiving the error designation command, the error display 004SG700 (see FIG. 122B) is displayed on the display screen to notify the error.

Further, when the CPU 103 detects the first game ball by a retry operation after transmitting an error designation command indicating a ball-out error, the CPU 103 sends an error designation command for designating that the ball-out error has been canceled. Send to the CPU 120 . That is, even if there are two or more unpaid balls, a specific period shorter than the first determination period tl or the second determination period tm (for example, 1 Seconds) has passed, an error designation command designating cancellation of the ball-out error is transmitted, so the error notification can be promptly terminated without waiting until all undistributed balls are detected. Also, when a predetermined period of time tk (for example, tk=3 seconds) has elapsed after receiving the error cancellation designation command, the error display 004SG700 is erased from the display screen to end the error notification.

In addition, after sending an error designation command that designates cancellation of the error, if there are still undistributed balls remaining, the retry operation is started again, and even if the third retry operation is completed after restarting, the undistributed When the number of game balls is not detected, an error designation command designating a ball-out error is transmitted again, and the effect control CPU 120 resumes the above-described error notification.

<Low base state>
122 to 124, an example of operation when the out-of-ball error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol started in the low base state continues even after the demonstration movie display has started will be described. to explain.

As shown in FIGS. 122 to 124, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the low base state, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background (see FIG. 122(A)). Also, the board lamp and the frame lamp start blue wave lighting based on the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the button lamp 9e maintains white lighting based on the default luminance data table. .

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 receives an error designation command indicating a ball out error during variable display, the board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e) is continued, while for the main lamp 9a, error luminance data (lamp data table: error) is set as luminance data corresponding to the main lamp 9a of the priority layer, as shown in FIG. In order to make the setting, the light emission control is switched to blinking red (see FIG. 122(B)).

Here, as shown in FIG. 123, basically, a normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the board lamp and the frame lamp is set in the normal layer according to the state. On the other hand, in the priority layer that has priority over the normal layer, a luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) is set when an error occurs as described above. Then, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) is preferentially used over the brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, etc.) set in the normal layer to output the brightness data to the LED driver. Then, the main lamp 9a blinks in red. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the value of the timer without stopping the timing of light emission control using the luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal, etc.) set in the normal layer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(C), when a predetermined period of time tk (tk1=3 seconds) elapses after the ball-out error occurs and the main lamp 9a switches to blinking in red, the decorative pattern display area 5L of the display screen is displayed. , 5C, and 5R, an error display 004SG700 is displayed on the priority display layer.

After that, when the variable display ends and the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guidance display 004SG401 is framed in from the lower left side of the display screen and turned to the right until it reaches a specified position. 122(D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the red flashing of the main lamp 9a continue to be executed.

When the demo movie display start condition S1 is satisfied, the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to the board lamp and the side lamp 9b is changed to the customer waiting demonstration luminance data table (lamp data table: customer (waiting demonstration), and control of the light emission mode based on white is started. Even if the demo movie display is started, the error display 004SG700 and the red flashing of the main lamp 9a continue (see FIG. 122(E)). After that, when a predetermined period of time tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) elapses after the demonstration movie display start condition S1 is established, the demonstration movie display is started (see FIG. 122(F)).

After that, when the bulb out error is canceled at a predetermined timing during the demonstration movie display, the light emission control of the main lamp 9a is switched to based on the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) of the normal layer. , the main lamp 9a also starts emission control based on the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) corresponding to the demonstration movie display (see FIG. 122(G)). At this time, light emission control based on the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) was also performed in the normal layer, so from a predetermined point in the demonstration movie display Luminance data table Light emission control based on the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) can be started from the middle. Further, when a predetermined period of time tk (tk1=3 seconds) has passed since the dead ball error was canceled, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see FIG. 122(G)).

Also, although not shown in detail, in the low base state, when the error that occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol that is started due to irregular winning etc. continues even after the demonstration movie display is started. 122, as shown in FIG. 122, the running out error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol started in the low base state continues even after the demonstration movie display is started. Since they are the same, detailed description is omitted here.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when a ball-out error (specific error) occurs during variable display, uses the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the ball-out error to control the main lamp 9a. After that, if the bulb out error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the control of the main lamp 9a using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and then the second During the period, if the blown bulb error is not resolved, the control of the main lamp 9a using the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) is continued.

In this way, the notification by the lamp of a specific error (for example, a dead ball error) that occurs during the game is inherited and executed during both the background display and the demo movie display, so that stable It is possible to notify the user of the ball running out error, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the ball-out error when a ball-out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol. After that, if the blown bulb error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the control of the main lamp 9a using the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) is continued. After that, during the second period, if the ball-out error is not resolved, the control of the main lamp 9a using the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) is continued, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. If a ball-out error (specific error) occurs during the ball-out error, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the ball-out error, and then the first customer waiting period If the blown bulb error is not resolved during the second period, the control of the main lamp 9a using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and then the blown bulb error is resolved during the second period. If not, the control of the main lamp 9a using the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) is continued.

In this way, the notification by the lamp of the specific error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol and during the variable display of the second special symbol is inherited and executed during both the background display and the demo movie display. By doing so, it is possible to stably notify of a dead ball error, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

<High base state>
Next, an operation example in which the out-of-ball error that occurred during the variable display of the second special symbol started in the high base state continues even after the demonstration movie display has started will be described with reference to FIG. 122 for explanation.

As shown in FIG. 125, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the high base state, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background (FIG. 122 (A )reference). In addition, the board lamp and the frame lamp start purple (or green) wave lighting based on the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), button lamp 9e maintains white lighting based on the default luminance data table.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 receives an error designation command indicating a ball out error during variable display, the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) 123, the light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (except for the button lamp 9e) is continued based on the data, and the main lamp 9a is set to the luminance data corresponding to the main lamp 9a of the priority layer for error use, as shown in FIG. In order to set the luminance data (lamp data table: error), the light emission control is switched to red blinking (see FIG. 122(B)).

Here, as shown in FIG. 123, basically, a high B background brightness data table corresponding to the board lamp and the frame lamp (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction) corresponding to the board lamp and the frame lamp) ), etc. are set according to the state, while the priority layer, which has priority over the normal layer, has a luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error) when an error occurs as described above. set. Then, the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) is used preferentially over the luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction) etc.) set in the normal layer By outputting luminance data to the LED driver, the main lamp 9a blinks in red. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction), etc.) set in the normal layer. keeps updating the value of

Next, when a predetermined period of time tk (tk1=3 seconds) elapses after the ball-out error occurs and the main lamp 9a switches to blinking in red, the priority display layer in front of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the display screen is displayed. , an error display 004SG700 is displayed (see FIG. 122(C)).

After that, when the variable display ends and the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the lower left side of the display screen, and turned to the right until it reaches a specified position. 122(D), the sound volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the red flashing of the main lamp 9a continue to be executed.

Also, when the condition S1 for starting the demo movie display is met, the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: variable background (or lamp data table: short background time)) corresponding to the board lamp and the side lamp 9b is displayed for the customer waiting demo. The display is switched to the display brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration), and control of the light emission mode based on white is started. Even if the demo movie display is started, the error display 004SG700 and the red flashing of the main lamp 9a continue (see FIG. 122(E)). After that, when a predetermined period of time tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has passed since the demonstration movie display start condition S1 was satisfied, the demonstration movie display is started (see FIG. 122(F)).

After that, when the bulb out error is canceled at a predetermined timing during the demonstration movie display, the light emission control of the main lamp 9a is switched to based on the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) of the normal layer. , the main lamp 9a also starts emission control based on the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) corresponding to the demonstration movie display (see FIG. 122(G)). At this time, light emission control based on the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) was also performed in the normal layer, so from a predetermined point in the demonstration movie display Luminance data table Light emission control based on the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) can be started from the middle. Further, when a predetermined period of time tk (tk1=3 seconds) has passed since the dead ball error was canceled, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see FIG. 122(G)).

In addition, although not shown in detail, in the high base state, when the ball running out error that occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol that is started due to irregular winning etc. continues even after the demonstration movie display is started. 125, as shown in FIG. 125, the ball running out error that occurred during the variable display of the second special symbol started in the high base state continues even after the demonstration movie display is started. Since they are the same, detailed description is omitted here.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when a ball-out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state, an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is used to control the main lamp 9a, and after that, if the bulb out error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is used to control the main lamp 9a. Control is continued, and thereafter, if the blown bulb error is not resolved during the second period, the control of the main lamp 9a using the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) is continued, and the high base state When a ball-out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol in , the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the ball-out error. After that, if the blown bulb error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the control of the main lamp 9a using the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) is continued, and then during the second period , if the blown bulb error has not been resolved, the control of the main lamp 9a using the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) is continued.

In this way, in both the low base state and the high base state, the notification by the lamp of the blown bulb error that occurred during the variable display is inherited and executed during the background display and during the demo movie display. By doing so, it is possible to stably notify of a dead ball error, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the ball-out error when a ball-out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol. After that, if the blown bulb error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the control of the main lamp 9a using the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) is continued. After that, during the second period, if the ball-out error is not resolved, the control of the main lamp 9a using the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) is continued, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. If a ball-out error (specific error) occurs during the ball-out error, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the ball-out error, and then the first customer waiting period If the blown bulb error is not resolved during the second period, the control of the main lamp 9a using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and then the blown bulb error is resolved during the second period. If not, the control of the main lamp 9a using the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) is continued.

In this way, the notification by the lamp of the specific error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol and during the variable display of the second special symbol is inherited and executed during both the background display and the demo movie display. By doing so, it is possible to stably notify of a dead ball error, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, the color that accounts for a large proportion of the luminance data that constitutes the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the luminance data that constitutes the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) is different. Specifically, white is the predominant color in the brightness data that constitutes the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error ) is red, which accounts for a large proportion of the luminance data (see FIG. 92).

In this way, the luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) are configured so that the main colors in the luminance data are different. By doing so, it is possible to suggest the occurrence of a dead ball error by the light emission mode during display of the demo movie, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that constitutes the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the luminance data that constitutes the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is different. . Specifically, blue is the dominant color in the luminance data that makes up the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal), while the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is The color that occupies a large percentage of the constituent luminance data is red (see FIG. 92).

In this way, the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) and the luminance data table for normal background (lamp data table: normal background) are configured so that the main colors in the luminance data are different. , it is possible to suggest the occurrence of a dead ball error by the light emission mode during the background display, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that constitutes the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the luminance data that constitutes the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is different. , Brightness data that makes up the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). , the color that accounts for the majority is different. Specifically, blue is the dominant color in the luminance data that makes up the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal), while the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is The color that occupies a large proportion of the constituent luminance data is red (see FIG. 92). In addition, the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that makes up the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) is green (for time saving) or purple (for probability change) On the other hand, the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) is red (see FIG. 92).

In this way, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: normal background) are configured so that the main colors in the brightness data are different. Make the main color in the luminance data different between the luminance data table (lamp data table: error) and the luminance data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) With this configuration, it is possible to suggest that a ball-out error has occurred due to the light emission mode during background display even during any background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Also, during the background display, if the bulb out error does not occur, the main lamp 9a using the background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: short background, lamp data table: variable background) And the side lamp 9b and the board lamp are controlled, and if a blown-out error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), and the demo movie If no error occurs during the display period, the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, and the board lamp are controlled using the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to display the demo movie. If a ball-out error occurs during the period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), and the customer waiting demonstration luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) is displayed. and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) are different in the color that accounts for the majority (see FIG. 92).

In this way, by configuring the error luminance data (lamp data table: error) and the customer waiting demonstration luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) so that the main colors in the luminance data are different. In addition, it is possible to suggest that the bulb has run out due to the lighting mode during display of the demo movie, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Also, during the background display, if the bulb out error does not occur, the main lamp 9a using the background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: short background, lamp data table: variable background) And the side lamp 9b and the board lamp are controlled, and if a bulb out error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), and the demo movie If no error occurs during the display period, the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, and the board lamp are controlled using the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to display the demo movie. If a bulb-out error occurs during the period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), and the background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table : background time reduction, lamp data table: variable background probability) and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error), the colors occupying a large proportion are different (see FIG. 92).

In this way, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for background (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: short background, lamp data table: variable background) By making the main colors different, it is possible to indicate that the bulb has run out due to the lighting mode during the background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when an error is reported, a mode in which red blinking light emission control is performed based on the error luminance data table set in the priority layer has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, light emission control may be performed based on dedicated error luminance data (grandchild data) for blinking a lamp dedicated to error reporting in red when performing error reporting.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when performing an error notification, the main lamp 9a of the frame lamps is used to control light emission for error notification. Therefore, the main lamp 9a is arranged in the frame lamp at the highest position that is not hidden by the player and is most easily noticed by the game clerk, but the side lamp 9b or other lamps may be used.

In addition, when the bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, and the board lamp are controlled using the luminance data table for normal background (lamp data table: normal background). , when a blown-out error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error), and the variable display in the low base state ends. If no ball-out error has occurred during the subsequent demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, and the board lamp are controlled using the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), If a blown-out error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), and the high base state is displayed. If no ball-out error has occurred during the background display in the state, the main lamp 9a and the side lamp 9b using the luminance data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) If a bulb out error occurs during background display in the high base state by controlling the or board lamp, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), and the high base state If no bulb out error occurs during the demo movie display period after the end of the variable display, the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is used to display the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and When the board lamp is controlled and a dead ball error occurs during the demonstration movie display period after the end of the variable display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is displayed using the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error). is controlled, and the color that accounts for the majority in the luminance data table for normal background (lamp data table: normal background) and the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) are different, and the luminance data table for high B background (lamp Data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) have different colors that occupy a large proportion (see FIG. 92).

In this way, the luminance data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) and the luminance data table for the error (lamp data table: error) are made to have different main colors in the luminance data. The brightness data table (Lamp data table: Background probability change (or Lamp data table: Background time reduction)) and the error brightness data table (Lamp data table: Error) are configured so that the main colors in the brightness data are different. Therefore, it is possible to suggest that the bulb has run out due to the light emission mode during the background display, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, the brightness data constituting the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the brightness data constituting the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) are displayed on the board visually recognized by the player. The lamps and the frame lamps (except for the button lamp 9e) are configured to have different light emitting operation modes. Specifically, in the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), the light emission mode is based on white, while in the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error), red flashes. (See Figure 92).

In this way, the board lamps and frame lamps (button lamps 9e) to be shown to the player are made up of the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) and the customer waiting demonstration luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration). ) can be configured to have different movements, it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred due to the light emission mode during the demonstration movie display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed. can.

Also, during the background display, if the bulb out error does not occur, the main lamp 9a using the background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: short background, lamp data table: variable background) And the side lamp 9b and the board lamp are controlled, and if a bulb out error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), and the demo movie If no error occurs during the display period, the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, and the board lamp are controlled using the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to display the demo movie. If a bulb-out error occurs during the period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), and the background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table : background time reduction, lamp data table: background probability change), brightness data that composes the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error), and board lamps and frame lamps (button lamps) that are visually recognized by the player. 9e) are configured to have different light emitting operation modes. Specifically, in the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal), blue wave lighting, in the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) In response to purple (or green) wave lighting, red flashes in the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) (see FIG. 92).

In this way, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for background (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: short background, lamp data table: variable background), the player By configuring the movement of the board lamp and the frame lamp (except for the button lamp 9e) to be different, it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred due to the lighting mode during the demonstration movie display, As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the brightness data constituting the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data constituting the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error), and the board lamp and the Frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are configured to have different light emitting operation modes, and luminance data constituting a luminance data table for high B background (lamp data table: variable background (or lamp data table: short background)) The brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is configured so that the light emission operation modes of the board lamps and the frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) visually recognized by the player are different. Specifically, in the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal), for blue wave lighting, high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction) ), it flashes in red in the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) (see FIG. 92).

In this way, the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) are used to display the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) to the player. ) are configured to have different movements, and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and By configuring the movement of the board lamp and the frame lamp (except for the button lamp 9e) to be shown to the player differently, it is suggested that a dead ball error has occurred due to the lighting mode during the display of the demo movie. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, when the bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, and the board lamp are controlled using the luminance data table for normal background (lamp data table: normal background). , when a blown-out error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error), and the variable display in the low base state ends. If no ball-out error has occurred during the subsequent demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, and the board lamp are controlled using the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), If a blown-out error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), and the high base state is displayed. If no ball-out error has occurred during the background display in the state, the main lamp 9a and the side lamp 9b using the luminance data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) If a bulb out error occurs during background display in the high base state by controlling the or board lamp, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), and the high base state If no bulb out error occurs during the demo movie display period after the end of the variable display, the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is used to display the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and When the board lamp is controlled and a dead ball error occurs during the demonstration movie display period after the end of the variable display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is displayed using the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error). is controlled, and the brightness data that composes the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: normal background) and the brightness data that composes the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) are displayed on the board that the player visually recognizes. The lamps and the frame lamps (except for the button lamp 9e) are configured to have different light emitting operation modes, and the brightness that constitutes the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: variable background (or lamp data table: short background time)) The data and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the lighting operation modes of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) visually recognized by the player are different. . Specifically, in the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal), for blue wave lighting, high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction) ), it flashes in red in the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) (see FIG. 92).

In this way, the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) are used to display the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) to the player. ) are configured to have different movements, and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) By making the movement of the board lamp and the frame lamp (except for the button lamp 9e) different for the player, it is suggested that the ball out error has occurred due to the lighting mode during the demonstration movie display. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) are used to describe the lighting operation mode of the main lamp 9a and the board lamp and It is configured to differ from the light emitting operation mode of the side lamp 9b. Specifically, in the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration), the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) light up in a white-based light emission mode, and the error luminance is In the data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a blinks in red, and the board lamp and side lamp 9b light up in a manner corresponding to the state (see FIG. 92).

In this way, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) are used to display the board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e) to the player. ), it is possible to suggest that an error has occurred due to the lighting mode during the demonstration movie display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the player can visually recognize the luminance data table for background (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: short background, lamp data table: variable background) and luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error). The light emitting operation mode of the main lamp 9a and the light emitting operation mode of the board lamp and the side lamp 9b are configured to be different. Specifically, in the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: short background, lamp data table: variable background), the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are blue wave lighting , green wave lighting or purple wave lighting, and in the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a blinks red, and the board lamp and the side lamp 9b light in a manner corresponding to the state (FIG. 92). reference).

In this way, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for background (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: short background, lamp data table: variable background), By configuring the movement of the board lamp and the frame lamp (except for the button lamp 9e) to be shown differently, it is possible to suggest that a ball-out error has occurred due to the lighting mode during the background display, and as a result Appropriate customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, when the bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, and the board lamp are controlled using the luminance data table for normal background (lamp data table: normal background). , when a blown-out error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error), and the variable display in the low base state ends. If no ball-out error has occurred during the subsequent demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, and the board lamp are controlled using the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), If a blown-out error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), and the high base state is displayed. If no ball-out error has occurred during the background display in the state, the main lamp 9a and the side lamp 9b using the luminance data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) If a bulb out error occurs during background display in the high base state by controlling the or board lamp, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), and the high base state If no bulb out error occurs during the demo movie display period after the end of the variable display, the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is used to display the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and When the board lamp is controlled and a dead ball error occurs during the demonstration movie display period after the end of the variable display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is displayed using the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error). is controlled, and the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) are used to determine the lighting operation mode of the main lamp 9a and the board lamp and Unlike the light emitting operation mode of the side lamp 9b, the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), The light emitting operation mode of the main lamp 9a visually recognized by the player is different from the light emitting operation mode of the board lamp and the side lamp 9b. Specifically, in the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background), the board lamp and the frame lamp (except for the button lamp 9e) light up in a blue wave, and the high B background luminance data table (lamp data Table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), purple (or green) wave lights, error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), main lamp 9a blinks red, board lamp And the side lamp 9b lights up in a manner corresponding to the state (see FIG. 92).

In this way, the board lamps and frame lamps (except the button lamp 9e) to be shown to the player are displayed by the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) and the luminance data table for normal background (lamp data table: normal background). configured to make the movement different, with the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) and the luminance data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), By making the movements of the board lamps and frame lamps (except for the button lamp 9e) different for the player, it is possible to suggest that a dead ball error has occurred due to the lighting mode during the background display. As a result, it is possible to perform a suitable customer waiting control.

The above-described light emitting operation mode is a light emitting mode that allows the player to see some kind of movement. Modes (changing from RGB: 700 to RGB: 400, etc.) are included, and lighting and extinguishing with no change in luminance are not included in the light emitting operation modes. For example, in the case of shaking (moya), the specific light emitting means is set to the first luminance (RGB is 100) for the first luminance data x ms (or the combination of the luminance of each of the first, second, and third colors is the first combination), the second luminance data between yms, the specific light emitting means is set to the second luminance (RGB is A00) (or the luminance of each of the first, second, and third colors are used as the second combination), etc., on the premise that the second luminance data is used after the first luminance data, the previous luminance data is the luminance of the specific light emitting means are preferably different.

In addition, when the game ball payout condition is established, the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect the game ball, and an unpaid game ball occurs, a ball running out error occurs, and the effect control CPU 120 waits for the second customer waiting period. game balls exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the payout device 004SG031 (payout unit) when an out-of-ball error occurs during the game, and game balls not exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the payout device 004SG031. In either case, the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error ) to the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) to control the board lamp and the frame lamp.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls distributed to the payout device 004SG031, at the timing when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball, the lighting mode of the board lamp and the frame lamp is demonstrated. By switching to the light emission mode corresponding to the movie display, it is possible to show the demo movie display without discomfort, and it is possible to share the processing, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, when the game ball payout condition is established, the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect the game ball, and an unpaid game ball occurs, a ball running out error occurs, and the effect control CPU 120 waits for the first customer. game balls exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the payout device 004SG031 (payout unit) when an out-of-ball error occurs during the game, and game balls not exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the payout device 004SG031. In either case, the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error ) to the background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: short background, lamp data table: variable background) to control the board lamp and the frame lamp.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls distributed to the payout device 004SG031, at the timing when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball, the light emission mode of the board lamp and the frame lamp is displayed in the background. By switching to the light emission mode corresponding to the display, it is possible to make the background display look natural and to share the processing, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Also, during the second customer waiting period, when the game ball payout condition is satisfied and the period during which the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect the game ball continues for the second determination period tm (or the first determination period tl). , switch from the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error), control the board lamp and frame lamp, and control the ball during the second customer waiting period When a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the second determination period tm (or the first determination period tl) has passed since the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detected the game ball when a run-out error occurred. Then, the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is switched to the customer waiting demonstration luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) to control the board lamp and the frame lamp.

In this way, in the state where the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect, there is a possibility of a ball running out error, but there is also a possibility of a ball delay, etc. Therefore, the light emission mode of the board lamp and the frame lamp is immediately switched However, when a game ball is detected, by immediately switching the light emission mode of the board lamp and the frame lamp to the light emission mode corresponding to the demonstration movie display, the demo movie display can be displayed without any sense of incongruity. Wait control can be performed.

Also, during the first customer waiting period, when the game ball payout condition is satisfied and the period during which the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect the game ball continues for the second determination period tm (or the first determination period tl). , Background luminance data table (Lamp data table: Background normal, Lamp data table: Background time reduction, Lamp data table: Background probability change) to error luminance data table (Lamp data table: Error) to switch the board lamp and frame lamp When the ball running out error occurs during the first customer waiting period, the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the game ball and specifies a period shorter than the second determination period tm (or the first determination period tl). When a period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) is changed to the brightness data table for background (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: short background, lamp data table: background probability change) to control the board lamp and frame lamp.

In this way, in the state where the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect, there is a possibility of a ball running out error, but there is also a possibility of a ball delay, etc. Therefore, the light emission mode of the board lamp and the frame lamp is immediately switched However, when a game ball is detected, the luminescence mode of the board lamp and the frame lamp is immediately switched to the luminescence mode corresponding to the background display, so that the background display can be made to look natural, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control is achieved. It can be performed.

[Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 sets the brightness data for lighting/flashing/extinguishing one or more of the plurality of LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9, Output to an LED driver (also called a lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting / blinking / light extinction performed with respect to lamps, such as LED, by CPU120 for production|presentation control is also called lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the effect control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp in order to light/blink/extinguish each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 to be lamp controlled. Each game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/lights off based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores a lamp data table storing luminance data for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 . The lamp data table includes an error lamp data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach lamp data table used during super reach, and a background lamp data table.

Further, the background lamp data table includes a normal background lamp data table (background normal shown in FIG. 134) used in a normal state, a fanfare background lamp data table used in a fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, and a big win. A jackpot background lamp data table used during the round of the game state, an ending background lamp data table used in the ending state in which an ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability variable used in the probability variable state. Background lamp data table (background probability change shown in FIG. 134), time saving background lamp data table used in the time saving state (background time saving shown in FIG. 134), and customer waiting lamp data table used in the customer waiting state (Figure customer waiting demo shown at 134);

Each of the background lamp data tables described above is used without overlapping, and any of a plurality of types of game states such as normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, variable probability state, time saving state, and customer waiting state Either one of the background lamp data tables is used depending on whether the game state is controlled. That is, the effect control CPU 120 uses one of the background lamp data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs luminance data based on the background lamp data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Further, the error lamp data table, the SP reach lamp data table, and the background lamp data table are each given a priority when used. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 126, the priority is higher when the lamp data table for error, the lamp data table for SP reach, and the lamp data table for background are used in this order.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 develops into a super reach effect while outputting luminance data based on the normal background lamp data table in a normal state, the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach effect is generated. The SP reach lamp data table is used preferentially over the normal background lamp data table, and luminance data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach lamp data table. As a result, when the game effect lamps 9 are lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background lamp data table, when the super ready-to-win effect develops, the SP ready-to-win lamp data table of the game effect lamps 9 is used. Lamps for which brightness data based on SP reach are not set are controlled in a mode based on the background lamp data table. is lamp-controlled in a mode corresponding to the super reach effect based on the SP reach lamp data table. In addition, while the brightness data based on the lamp data table for SP reach is being output to the LED driver, the brightness based on the lamp data table for background is set for the lamp for which the brightness data based on the lamp data table for SP reach is set. No data is output to the LED driver, and luminance data based on the normal background lamp data table is output to the LED driver when the normal state is restored after the super reach effect is completed. After the super ready-to-win effect is completed, when a big hit results in a fanfare state, luminance data based on the fanfare background lamp data table is output to the LED driver, and the fanfare background lamp data table is output to the LED driver for any lamp. The lamp is controlled in a manner based on

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses a background lamp data table corresponding to the game state under control while timing the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control with a timer. However, if it develops into a super reach effect, etc., the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach effect is used preferentially over the background lamp data table, and the luminance data is output to the LED driver. do. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the value of the timer without stopping the clocking of the lamp control time using the background lamp data table. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the luminance data included in the background lamp data table even while the game effect lamp 9 is under lamp control based on the SP reach lamp data table. Since the luminance data contained in the data table has a lower priority than the luminance data contained in the SP reach lamp data table, the luminance data contained in the background lamp data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. After the end of the super ready-to-win effect, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the background lamp data table again to the LED driver from the continuation of the continuously updated luminance data. Of the game effect lamps 9, lamps for which luminance data based on the lamp data table for SP reach is not set continue to output luminance data contained in the lamp data table for background to the LED driver.

Further, for example, the production control CPU 120 outputs luminance data based on the normal background lamp data table in a normal state, or outputs luminance data based on the SP reach lamp data table during the super reach production. When an error occurs, lamps for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table are not set among the game effect lamps 9 are lamp controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table. However, among the game effect lamps 9, for lamps for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is set, the error lamp data table corresponding to the error is set to the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data. The table is used preferentially, and luminance data is output to the LED driver based on the error lamp data table. As a result, of the game effect lamps 9, lamps for which luminance data based on the error lamp data table is not set are lamp-controlled in a mode based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table. Of the effect lamps 9, lamps for which luminance data based on the error lamp data table are set are lamp-controlled in a mode corresponding to the error based on the error lamp data table. During the period in which the luminance data based on the error lamp data table is output to the LED driver, the lamps for which the luminance data based on the error lamp data table are set will not be displayed in the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp. The luminance data based on the data table is not output to the LED driver, and when the error is canceled and the game returns to the normal state or the game state during the super reach effect, the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table Based luminance data is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 measures the time of the lamp control corresponding to the normal state and the lamp control corresponding to the super reach effect under control with a timer, while the normal background lamp corresponding to the normal state Luminance data is output to the LED driver using the data table and the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach effect. and the SP reach lamp data table are used preferentially to output luminance data to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the value of the timer without stopping the clocking of the lamp control time using the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the luminance data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table even while the game effect lamp 9 is under lamp control based on the error lamp data table. However, since the luminance data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table has a lower priority than the luminance data contained in the error lamp data table, the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table have a lower priority than the luminance data contained in the error lamp data table. Luminance data included in the lamp data table for use is not output to the LED driver. Then, after the error is canceled, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the luminance data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated. start. Of the game effect lamps 9, for lamps for which luminance data based on the lamp data table for error is not set, the luminance data contained in the lamp data table for background and the lamp data table for SP reach continues to be output to the LED driver. .

[Lighting Mode of Game Effect Lamp]
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting luminance data to the LED driver by the performance control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, as terms relating to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9, "extinguishing", "substantially extinguishing", "lit", and "blinking" are used. Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "lights out" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and has a brightness of zero. The term "almost extinguished" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" to be described later).

For example, when RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as luminance data is "000", the corresponding LED is "turned off". Further, when the luminance data (RGB data) is "111", the corresponding LED lights in white with extremely low luminance. In this embodiment, such an LED state in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for convenience.

The term "lighting" includes constant lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is always lit, wave lighting, in which a plurality of lined lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are sequentially switched from off to on, and lighting when the game effect lamp 9 is on. It also includes haze lighting that dimly lights while changing the luminance. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the luminance data is any one of "2" to "F". The brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F", where "0" is no brightness, "1" is the lowest brightness, and "F" is the highest brightness. becomes higher.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode other than the above-described "turning off" or "turning on" of the game effect lamp 9, in which the lighting luminance of each lamp is a first luminance and a second luminance higher than the first luminance. including alternately switching between For example, "blinking" includes repeating turning on and off or almost off. This includes switching between the case where the luminance data is "0" and "1" with the lapse of time. As described above, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is haze lighting. Blinking is different in that the entire lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and extinguishing or substantially extinguishing.

[Description on game effect lamp]
Next, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 133. FIG.

[Lamp control of game effect lamps using lamp data table]
The effect control CPU 120 uses the lamp data table stored in the ROM 121 to light/blink/extinguish one or more lamps among the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 . The sub-fluctuation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 in one frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. The display control unit 123 controls the display of the image display device 5 based on the image data (moving image data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121 when the sub-variation time reaches the timing for starting the display corresponding to each part. I do. The display control unit 123 provides an extended command (for example, an extended command BXXX (where "X" is an arbitrary value (0 to F)) is set, and the extension command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 is based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123, and the display control is performed by the display control unit 123. The address of the parent table corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) to be executed is specified.

FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. As shown in FIG. 127, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs predetermined display control, it transmits an extension command (BXXX) for designating the display control to the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table (XXX (parent)) corresponding to the predetermined display control based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123 .

In the parent table, information specifying a lamp (lighting position or extinguished position) to be subjected to lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 and lamp control information corresponding to the lamp to be subjected to lamp control are stored. Information specifying a child table to be referred to at that time and information specifying the maximum time during which lamp control is performed are stored. Note that the parent table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 129, the side lamp 9b is specified as the object of lamp control. Also, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX is specified corresponding to the side lamp 9, 600000 ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and lamp control is carried out by this child table. A maximum time of 600000 ms (600000/10) is specified. In the parent table, among the game effect lamps 9, lamps for which corresponding information is not stored (in FIG. 129, main lamp 9a, movable body lamp 9d, decoration lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, button lamp 9e), The lamp control based on the last set parent table information is continued.

As shown in FIG. 127, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp specified in the parent table by the specified child table, for example, when 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum 1 is subtracted from the counter every 10 ms to count this 600000 ms (10 minutes). That is, the effect control CPU 120 counts 600000 ms (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60000 times. The effect control CPU 120 controls the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes) is clocked. In addition, the effect control CPU120, after receiving the extension command, before timing a maximum of 600000ms (10 minutes), if another extension command is newly received, the lamp control being executed is canceled, Using the child table specified by the parent table specified by the extended command received in the second step, lamp control of the target lamp is performed. Although it is not assumed that the effect display (effect scene) requires 600,000 ms, the maximum time for lamp control by the child table is set to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the effect display (effect scene). Even if the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, it is possible to continue the lamp control under execution for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

In the child table, for each lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, information designating a grandchild table to be referred to during lamp control and lamp control is performed. Information specifying the execution time is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed. The child table stores only information about lamps to be controlled, and does not store information about lamps that are not to be controlled.

For example, in the child table shown in FIG. 130, in correspondence with the side lamp 9b (XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX), the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_1 and this grandchild table perform lamp control. Execution time for lamp control: 500 ms, execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_3 and this grandchild table: 230 ms, execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_2 and this grandchild table: 600000 ms. are specified in the order in which the lamp control is executed by the grandchild table of Of the game effect lamps 9 on the child table, lamps for which corresponding information is not stored (in FIG. 130, the main lamp 9a, the movable body lamp 9d, the decoration lamp 9f, the attacker lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e) are The lamp control based on the information of the last set child table is continued.

As shown in FIG. 127, the effect control CPU 120 controls the target lamp using the grandchild table specified by the child table, for example, using the first specified grandchild table. After measuring the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, the process of performing lamp control of the target lamp using the next specified grandchild table is performed for all the specified grandchild tables, It is supposed to be done in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in FIG. 130, for the side lamp 9b, lamp control is first performed by the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 until 500 ms is clocked, and then ramp control is performed by the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until 500 ms is clocked. Then, ramp control is performed by the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 until 230 ms is clocked, and then ramp control is performed by the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until 600000 ms is clocked. Although it is not assumed that the effect display (effect scene) requires 600,000 ms, the maximum time for lamp control by the grandchild table specified last is 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the effect display (effect scene). By setting , even if the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, it is possible to continue the lamp control being executed for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

Further, in the child table, when the side lamp 9b is to be subjected to lamp control, as a grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, for example, one grandchild table as shown in FIG. :XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 is specified, and two grandchild tables, not shown, are specified: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 and XD___LWU_2_XXX_1. When one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the effect control CPU 120 uses this one grandchild table to display the left side lamp. The same lamp control is performed for both 9b and the right side lamp 9b. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are designated as grandchild tables corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the effect control CPU 120 uses one of the two grandchild tables. lamp control of the left side lamp 9b is performed using the other grandchild table, and lamp control of the right side lamp 9b is performed using the other grandchild table. Therefore, when one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b have common While lamp control is performed, when two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b.

In the grandchild table, for each lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, luminance data to be referred to during lamp control and execution time for lamp control are specified. Information to be performed is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed. It should be noted that the grandchild table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in FIG. 131, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000 corresponding to the side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1), and execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 100 ms , Luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000, Execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 120ms, Luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000, ramp with this luminance data Execution time for control: 120ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, execution time for lamp control by this brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA , 0x5AA, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 40 ms is specified in the order in which lamp control based on these brightness data is performed. In the grandchild table, among the game effect lamps 9, lamps for which corresponding information is not stored (in FIG. 131, main lamp 9a, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, button lamp 9e) are Lamp control based on the information in the grandchild table that was last set before that is continued.

In the luminance data of the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1) of the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. indicates the RGB value of the first lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the values of the lower first to third digits of the data corresponding to the first and second lamps are two from the top of both side lamps 9b. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to the 3rd and 4th lamps indicate the values of the 3rd lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. , 3 and 4, the lower first to third digit values indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the corresponding data indicate the RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to the 5th and 6th. The value of the digit indicates the RGB value of the 6th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to the 7th and 8th lamps are the values of both side lamps 9b. The RGB value of the 7th lamp from the top of the side lamp 9b is shown, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to the 7th and 8th lamps are the 8th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The values of the lower fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to the 9th and 10th indicate the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the 9th, The lower first to third digits of the data corresponding to number 10 indicate the RGB values of the 10th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the lower one digit of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 11. The values of the third to third digits indicate the RGB values of the 11th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b.

Also, although not shown, when different grandchild tables are specified for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the brightness data for the left side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_~) is the first , 2 indicates the RGB value of the first lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the lower 1 of the data corresponding to 1 and 2. The values of the 4th to 3rd digits indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to the 3rd and 4th. The value indicates the value of the third lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the value of the lower first to third digits of the data corresponding to the third and fourth lamps is the fourth from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the 5th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values of the lower first to third digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and Nos. 7 and 8. indicates the RGB value of the seventh lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The 3rd digit value indicates the RGB value of the 8th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the lower 4th to 6th digit values of the data corresponding to 9th and 10th indicate the left side lamp. The RGB value of the 9th lamp from the top of 9b is shown, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to 9b and 10th are the RGB values of the 10th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. and the lower first to third digit values of the data corresponding to number 11 indicate the RGB values of the eleventh lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the right side lamp 9b In the luminance data (XD___LWU_2_~), the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, The values of the lower first to third digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and correspond to Nos. 3 and 4. The value of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to the right side lamp 9b indicates the value of the 3rd lamp from the top, and the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to the 3rd and 4th The value indicates the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. Indicates the RGB value of the 5th lamp from the top, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to 5th and 6th are the RGB values of the 6th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b The values of the lower fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to the 7th and 8th digits indicate the RGB values of the 7th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to No. 8 indicate the RGB values of the 8th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and the lower 4 digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 9 and 10. The values of the 1st to 6th digits indicate the RGB values of the ninth lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to the 9th and 10th are indicated on the right side. The RGB value of the 10th lamp from the top of the side lamp 9b is shown, and the value of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to the 11th is the RGB value of the 11th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. value.

Also, although not shown, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LMAIN_~) specifying the main lamp 9a, the values of the first to third lower digits indicate the RGB values of the main lamp 9a. Further, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LLOGO_~) specifying the movable lamp 9d, the values of the lower fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to the first and second numbers are 1 from the left of the movable lamp 9d. The values of the lower first to third digits of the data corresponding to the first and second lamps indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d. Yes, the values of the lower fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 indicate the value of the second lamp from the left of the movable body lamp 9d, and the lower order of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4. The values of the first to third digits indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d. Also, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LSLMP_~) that specifies the decorative lamp 9f, the values of the lower fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to the first and second are the first from the top of the decorative lamp 9f. The values of the first to third digits of the data corresponding to the first and second numbers indicate the RGB values of the lamp, and the values of the second to third digits from the top of the decorative lamp 9f indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top. The value of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 4 and 4 indicates the value of the third lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, and the lower 1st digit to the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4. The value of the third digit indicates the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, and the value of the first to third lowest digits of the data corresponding to the fifth is the fifth from the top of the decorative lamp 9f. It shows the RGB values of the lamp. In the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LATAK_~) that specifies the attack lamp 9c, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to the 1st and 2nd are the values of the 1st from the left of the attacker lamp 9c. The values of the first to third digits of the data corresponding to the 1st and 2nd digits indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the left of the attacker lamp 9c. The value of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 indicates the value of the third lamp from the left of the attacker lamp 9c, and the lower 1st digit of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 to The third digit value indicates the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the left of the attacker lamp 9c. In the brightness data of the grandchild table (XD___LPUSH_~) specifying the button lamp 9e, the values of the lower first to third digits indicate the values of the button lamp 9eRGB.

The luminance data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the object of lamp control. The main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, the attack lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e are composed of LEDs composed of three elements "R", "G", and "B". The luminance data for each element corresponds to the current value output to each element. Specifically, the luminance data is divided into 16 levels of current values from 0 to F. When the luminance data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the luminance data is F The current value becomes the maximum value. For example, when luminance data “A” is output to the element “R”, a current corresponding to the luminance data “A” flows through the element “R”, and an element “G” receives “1”. When the luminance data is output, the current corresponding to the luminance data of "1" flows through the element of "G", and when the luminance data of "F" is output to the element of "G", the current corresponding to the luminance data of "F" is output. A current corresponding to the luminance data of 'G' flows through the element 'G'.

The main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, the attack lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e can emit light in various colors by applying a current corresponding to the luminance data to each element of RGB. . Also, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can be illuminated in colors corresponding to each effect and character by emitting light based on luminance data. . As an example, data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and the current corresponding to the data flows, thereby lighting the LED in red. In addition, data "F0F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light reddish purple. In addition, the data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, thereby lighting the LED in yellow.

As shown in FIG. 127, the effect control CPU 120, when performing lamp control with reference to the luminance data of the grandchild table for the target lamp, for example, first outputs the designated luminance data to the LED driver, After measuring the execution time corresponding to this luminance data, the step of outputting the next designated luminance data to the LED driver is performed for all the designated luminance data in the designated order. For example, in the child table shown in FIG. 130, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000 are sent to the LED driver for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b until the first 100 ms is measured. 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000 to the LED driver until the next 120ms 0x000000, 0x000000 , output 0x000 to the LED driver, then until 120ms is clocked Luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA to the LED driver, then 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, until 40ms is clocked, Output 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA to the LED driver. Then, based on the received luminance data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the luminance data to flow through the designated LED. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can lamp-control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, the child table, and the grandchild table. Lamp control is performed based on the table, child table, and grandchild table.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data from the first specified location of the grandchild table, and when the output of the luminance data is completed up to the last specified location of the grandchild table, the grandchild table is output. If the value of the timer corresponding to the specified child table still remains, output of luminance data is started again from the first specified location of the corresponding grandchild table. On the other hand, when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table designating the grandchild table becomes 0 while the luminance data is being output based on the grandchild table, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after switching.

The timer management of the child table by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of the child table. As shown in FIG. 128, in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, 500 ms is specified as the time at which the side lamp 9b is first subjected to lamp control, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 is specified, and the lamp control is secondly specified. 500 ms is specified as the time to perform, the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified, the third is 230 ms as the time to perform lamp control, the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 is specified, and the fourth is 600000 ms is specified as the time for lamp control, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified. Second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2, for the side lamp 9b, "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x499" as luminance data (RGB data) 5AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA , 0x499", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x499" is specified to be executed at 100 ms intervals. For convenience of explanation, the brightness data in the first 100 ms is called data 1, the brightness data in the second 100 ms is called data 2, the brightness data in the third 100 ms is called data 3, and the brightness data in the fourth 100 ms is called data 4. .

The effect control CPU 120 measures 500 ms specified by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms when performing lamp control for the second specified grandchild table: XD_J_LWU_1_XXX of the child table XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, and measures the time. Until reaches 500ms: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 outputs data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 at intervals of 100ms to the LED driver. If it has not reached , the luminance data are output to the LED driver in order from the first data 1 again. The effect control CPU 120 eventually stops outputting luminance data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 at that point when the clock reaches 500 ms, and outputs luminance data based on the next grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 specified by the child table. to start.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 measures 600000 ms specified by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms when performing lamp control for the fourth specified grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, Until the time reaches 600000 ms: Based on XD___LWU_1_XXX_2, the luminance data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 are output to the LED driver at intervals of 100 ms, but after data 1 to data 4 are output, the time is still measured. has not reached 600000 ms, the luminance data are output to the LED driver in order from the first data 1 again. When the time count reaches 600000 ms, the effect control CPU 120 stops outputting luminance data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2. At this time, since the next grandchild table is not specified in the child table, the output of luminance data based on the first grandchild table specified in the child table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 will start, but some kind of abnormality must occur. By receiving the next extended command from the display control unit 123 before the measured time reaches 600000 ms, the parent table, child table, and table designated by the newly received extended command are displayed. Output of luminance data based on the grandchild table is started.

As in the parent table shown in FIG. 129, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum lamp control time by the child table. . That is, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the effect control command from the main board 11, but some trouble occurs while the lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table, and the effect occurs. Even if the control CPU 120 does not receive the effect control command from the main board 11, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so different lamp controls are performed one after another from the point where a problem occurs. You can prevent it from being lost.

Also, as in the child table shown in FIG. 130, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the lamp control execution time by the last specified grandchild table. To prevent lamp control by a grandchild table designated first of a child table from being performed again because the timer of the parent table still remains when the value of the timer corresponding to the table becomes 0. play a role.

Further, in the grandchild table, 600000 ms (10 minutes) may be specified as the execution time of the lamp control that refers to the brightness data specified last. In the minute data, when the value of the timer corresponding to the grandchild table becomes 0, lamp control is again performed using the luminance data specified first in the grandchild table because the timer of the child table still remains. It will play a role in preventing it from being put away. In this way, by setting the brightness data specified at the end of the grandchild table to be 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with the determined single light emission, thereby preventing the problem that the lighting of the lamp continues to change. can be done. Furthermore, if the luminance data for 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem that the lighting of the lamp continues to change. can.

[Regarding the lamp data table used during non-game 1]
FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a lamp data table used during non-game (only button blinking white and button blinking red are used during game).

The background normal shown in FIG. 134 is a lamp data table of game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the normal background image, and the effect control CPU 120, after power failure recovery (when controlled to the normal state), After the end of the initialization notification accompanying the initialization of the game state, after the end of the fluctuation in the normal state, after the end of the last game fluctuation in the time saving state, after the end of the jackpot game state (when controlled to the normal state), normal state After the demo movie ends in , and after the menu display in the normal state ends, when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B10E transmitted along with the control to display the normal background image, the background normal is used. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed.

The background time saving shown in FIG. 134 is a lamp data table of game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the time saving background image, and the effect control CPU 120, after power failure recovery (when controlled to the time saving state), After the fluctuation in the time saving state ends, after the big win game state ends (when controlled in the time saving state), after the demo movie in the time saving state ends, after the menu display in the time saving state ends, the display control unit 123 displays the time saving background image. When receiving the extension command: B11D transmitted along with the control to cause the game effect lamp 9 to be controlled using the normal background.

The background probability variation shown in FIG. 134 is a lamp data table of game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the probability variation background image. After the fluctuation in the probability variation state is completed, after the jackpot gaming state is completed (when controlled to the probability variation state), after the demo movie in the probability variation state is completed, and after the menu display is completed in the probability variation state, the display control unit 123 displays the probability variation background image. When receiving the extension command: B121 transmitted along with the control to cause the game effect lamp 9 to be controlled using the normal background.

The customer waiting demo shown in FIG. 134 is a lamp data table of game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration effect. When the part 123 receives the extension command: BF01 transmitted along with the control for displaying the image corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the customer waiting demonstration.

The button white lighting shown in FIG. 134 is a lamp data table of the button lamp 9e corresponding to non-game except during initialization notification. After the completion of the change notification and after the completion of the operation promotion presentation, when the extension command: B001 transmitted from the display control unit 123 is received, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using the white lighting of the button.

The button white blinking shown in FIG. 134 is a lamp data table of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the operation promoting effect, and the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the operation promoting effect of blinking the display control unit 123 button lamp 9e in white during the game. When receiving the extension command: B002 transmitted along with the control to display the image to be played, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using button white blinking.

The button red flashing shown in FIG. 134 is a lamp data table of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the operation promotion effect, and the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to red blink the button lamp 9e during the game for the operation promotion effect. When receiving the extension command B003 transmitted along with the control to display the corresponding image, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using the white blinking of the button.

It should be noted that the button lamp 9e is not specified in the lamp data table used except during the initialization notification, the error notification and the operation promotion effect. , button white lighting is used to control the game effect lamp 9 . Since the game effect lamp 9 other than the button lamp 9e is not specified for the button white lighting, the button white blinking, and the button red blinking, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the button white lighting, the button white blinking, and the button red blinking. Even when the command is received, the game effect lamps 9 other than the button lamp 9e continue lamp control based on the previous lamp data table.

The initialization notification shown in FIG. 134 is a lamp data table corresponding to the initialization notification. Extended command: When BFFF is received, initialization is used to control the game effect lamp 9 .

The error shown in FIG. 134 is the lamp data table of the main lamp 9a corresponding to the error notification. , the error is used to control the game effect lamp 9 .

In addition, since the game effect lamp 9 other than the main lamp 9a is not designated as an error, the effect control CPU 120 does not specify the game effect lamp 9 other than the main lamp 9a even when it receives an extension command designating an error. Continue lamp control based on the previous lamp data table.

[Lamp data table: Normal background]
FIG. 135 shows the setting contents of the lamp data table: background normal parent table used when the extended command B10E is received. FIG. 136 shows the setting contents of the lamp data table: background normal child table. 137 and 138 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: normal background grandchild table.

When the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B10E transmitted along with the display control unit 123 performing control to display the normal background image, the effect control CPU 120 creates the normal background parent table based on the extended command: B10E. specify. Background In the normal parent table, as shown in FIG. 135, it is set to repeatedly perform lamp control referring to the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP for a maximum of 600000 ms for the main lamp 9a. When B10E is received, the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP specified by the background normal parent table is referenced to perform lamp control of the main lamp 9a.

In the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 136, the grandchild table of the main lamp 9a to be referenced and the execution time are set.

The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO (FIG. 137) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP over a maximum of 600000 ms.

In the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO, as shown in FIG. 137, the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced are set. Then, the effect control CPU 120 switches the control based on the luminance data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO every execution time of the luminance data. The luminance data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO is set with luminance based on blue, and the main lamp 9a has a lighting mode in which the luminance changes based on blue.

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP is specified, the effect control CPU 120 repeats the lamp control by the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO until 600000 ms has passed, and when 600000 ms has passed, sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP again, and performs the same operation. Repeat control. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives an extension command before 600000 ms has elapsed after the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extension command. .

As shown in FIGS. 135 to 138, the normal background parent table includes child tables that also refer to the side lamp 9b, the movable body lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, and the attack lamp 9c. In the child table, a grandchild table or the like to be referred to is set, and in these grandchild tables, brightness data or the like to be referred to is set in the order of execution. By referring to the child table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the luminance data specified by the grandchild table, the side lamp 9b, the movable body lamp 9d, the decoration lamp 9f, and the attack lamp 9c are controlled in the same procedure as above. I do.

Background The brightness data set in the grandchild table that the normal child table refers to for the side lamp 9b, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, and the attack lamp 9c is also set with blue-based brightness. 9b, the movable body lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, and the attack lamp 9c also have a lighting mode in which the brightness changes based on blue.

Since the child table and grandchild table for the button lamp 9e are not set in the background normal parent table, the lamp control based on the previously set lamp data table (white button lighting) continues. done.

[Lamp data table: background time reduction]
Figure 139 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table used when the extension command B11D is received: parent table of background time reduction, and Figure 140 shows the setting contents of the lamp data table: child table of background time reduction. 141 and 142 are diagrams showing setting contents of the lamp data table: the grandchild table of background time reduction.

Effect control CPU 120, when receiving the extension command: B11D transmitted with the display control unit 123 performing control to display the background image for time reduction, the extension command: B11D Based on the background time reduction parent table specify. As shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, the background time-saving parent table is set with a child table that refers to the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable body lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, and the attacker lamp 9c, and , grandchild tables to be referred to are set in these child tables, and brightness data and the like to be referred to are set in the order of execution in these grandchild tables. With reference to the specified child table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the luminance data specified by the grandchild table, the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable body lamp 9d, and the decorative lamp are displayed in the same procedure as in the normal background. 9f, lamp control of the attacker lamp 9c.

For the luminance data set in the grandchild table that the background time saving child table refers to for the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, and the attacker lamp 9c, the luminance based on green is set. The main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable lamp 9d, the decoration lamp 9f, and the attack lamp 9c are also lit in a lighting mode in which the luminance changes based on green.

In addition, since the child table and grandchild table for the button lamp 9e are not set in the background time saving parent table, the lamp control based on the previously set lamp data table (button white lighting) continues. done.

[Lamp data table: Background probability change]
FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table used when the extension command B121 is received: the parent table of background probability variation. FIG. 145 and 146 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: grandchild table of background probability change.

When the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B121 that is transmitted along with the display control unit 123 performing control to display the probability variation background image, the effect control CPU 120 displays the background probability variation parent table based on the extension command: B121. specify. As shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the parent table of variable background probability includes child tables that refer to the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable body lamp 9d, the decoration lamp 9f, and the attacker lamp 9c. , grandchild tables to be referred to are set in these child tables, and brightness data and the like to be referred to are set in the order of execution in these grandchild tables. With reference to the specified child table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table, the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable body lamp 9d, and the decorative lamp are displayed in the same procedure as in the normal background. 9f, lamp control of the attacker lamp 9c.

For the brightness data set in the grandchild table to which the variable background probability child table refers to the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable lamp 9d, the decoration lamp 9f, and the attack lamp 9c, the brightness based on purple is set. The main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable body lamp 9d, the decoration lamp 9f, and the attack lamp 9c also have a lighting mode in which the luminance changes based on purple.

In addition, since the child table and grandchild table for the button lamp 9e are not set in the background probability change parent table, the lamp control based on the previously set lamp data table (button white lighting) continues. done.

[Lamp Data Table: Customer Waiting Demo]
FIG. 147 shows the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo used when the extended command BF01 is received, and FIG. 148 shows the setting of the lamp data table: child table of the customer waiting demo. FIG. 149 to FIG. 155 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: the grandchild table of the customer waiting demo.

The effect control CPU 120 designates the parent table of the customer waiting demo based on the extended command: BF01 when the display control unit receives the extended command: BF01 that is transmitted when the display control unit performs display control of the customer waiting demo display effect. do. As shown in FIG. 147, the parent table of the customer waiting demo is set to control the main lamp 9a for a maximum of 600000 ms by referring to the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. : When BF01 is received, the child table specified by the parent table of the customer waiting demo: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO is referred to and the main lamp 9a is controlled.

In the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, as shown in FIG. 148, the grandchild table of the main lamp 9a and the execution time are set in the order of reference.

The effect control CPU 120 first performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (FIG. 149) set first in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a flashes in white at the start of the company name part constituting the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, when 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, is counted, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02 (Fig. 150, Fig. 151) set second in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO to perform lamp control. I do. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up in white over the period of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the light emitting mode changes according to the movement of the company name characters.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 measures 9500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02. control. A common table is a grandchild table that is commonly referenced even if the parent table is different. As a result, during the period of the model introduction 1, model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, model introduction 2-2, model introduction 3-1, and model introduction 2-3 parts that make up the customer waiting demonstration, the main The lamp 9a is turned off.

After that, when 30500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, is measured, the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (Fig. 172) set fourth in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO Refer to it and perform lamp control. Common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 is a common grandchild table used when displaying the title of the big hit state. As a result, the emission color of the main lamp 9a changes to a rainbow color over the period of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01. control. As a result, the main lamp 9a flashes in white at the start of the subtitle part 1 constituting the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, and refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (Fig. 172) set sixth in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and lights the lamp. control. As a result, the emission color of the main lamp 9a changes to a rainbow color over the duration of one part of the subtitle that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, when 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, is counted, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Fig. 149) set to the seventh in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO and executes the lamp. control. As a result, the main lamp 9a flashes in white at the start of the subtitle 2 part constituting the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, and refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (Fig. 172) that is set eighth in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and lights the lamp. control. As a result, the emission color of the main lamp 9a changes to a rainbow color over the period of two parts of the subtitle that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, when 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, is measured, the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF (Fig. 171) set 9th in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. Refer to it and perform lamp control. As a result, the main lamp 9a is extinguished for 500 ms.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 counts 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, and the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06 (Fig. 155) set as the 10th in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. control. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up in white during the attention-calling 1 and attention-calling 2 parts of the customer-waiting demonstration effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 measures 4000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06. control. As a result, the main lamp 9a is extinguished for 500 ms.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 receives an extended command (B10E, B11D or B121) that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control such as background normal, so that the lamp based on the newly received extended command Switch to data table lamp control. As a result, the main lamp 9a continues to be turned off until a new extension command is received, and by receiving the new extension command, the main lamp 9a switches to a lighting mode based on the received extension command.

As shown in FIG. 147, the parent table of the customer waiting demo is set to perform lamp control with reference to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO for a maximum of 600000 ms for the side lamp 9b. : When BF01 is received, the child table specified by the parent table of the customer waiting demo: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO is referred to and the side lamp 9b is controlled.

In the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, as shown in FIG. 148, the side lamp 9b's grandchild table and execution time are set in the order of reference.

The effect control CPU 120 first performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (FIG. 149) set first in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes in white at the start of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, when 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, is measured, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the second grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02 (FIGS. 150 and 151) and controls the lamp. I do. As a result, the side lamp 9b is illuminated in white over the period of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the light emitting mode changes in accordance with the movement of the characters of the company name.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 measures 9500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02, and the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. control. As a result, the side lamp 9b is extinguished for 500 ms.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, and the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, which is set fourth in the child table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_03 (Fig. 152), is referred to as the lamp. control. As a result, the lighting color of the side lamp 9b changes in the order of green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, and white according to the type of character that appears over the period of model introduction 1 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect. do.

After that, when 12500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_03, is clocked, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (FIG. 153) set fifth in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO to perform lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b lights up in white and changes its light emission mode in a predetermined pattern over the period of model introduction 2-1 constituting the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, when 5000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, is counted, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05 (FIG. 154) set sixth in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO to perform lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes in green during the period of model introduction 3-1 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, when 1000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05, is counted, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (FIG. 153) set to the seventh in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO to perform lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b lights up in white and changes its light emission mode in a predetermined pattern over the period of model introduction 2-2 constituting the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, when 5000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, is counted, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05 (FIG. 154) set eighth in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO to perform lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks in green during the period of model introduction 3-2 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, when 1000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05, is measured, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (FIG. 153) set to the 9th place in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO to perform lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b lights up in white and changes its light emission mode in a predetermined pattern over the period of model introduction 2-3, which constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 measures 5000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, and the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Fig. control. As a result, the side lamp 9b is extinguished for 500 ms.

After that, when 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, is counted, the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (FIG. 172) set 11th in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. Refer to it and perform lamp control. Common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table common to what is used when displaying the title of the jackpot state. As a result, the emission color of the side lamp 9b changes to a rainbow color over the period of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, and the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. control. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks in white at the start of the subtitle 1 part constituting the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, and the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. control. As a result, the emission color of the side lamp 9b changes to a rainbow color over the duration of one part of the subtitle that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, and the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. control. As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes in white at the start of the subtitle 2 part constituting the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, and the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. control. As a result, the emission color of the side lamp 9b changes to a rainbow color over the period of two parts of the subtitle that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, when 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, is counted, the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (FIG. 171) that is set 16th in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. Refer to it and perform lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b is extinguished for 500 ms.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, and the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. control. As a result, the side lamps 9b are lit in white during the periods of attention 1 and attention 2 part of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 measures 4000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06, and the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. control. As a result, the side lamp 9b is extinguished for 500 ms.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 receives an extended command (B10E, B11D or B121) that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control such as background normal, so that the lamp based on the newly received extended command Switch to data table lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b continues to be turned off until a new extension command is received, and when the new extension command is received, the side lamp 9b switches to a lighting mode based on the received extension command.

As shown in FIGS. 147 to 155, the parent table of the customer waiting demo includes child tables that also refer to the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. , the grandchild tables and the like to be referred to are set in the order of execution, and the brightness data and the like to be referred to are set in the order of execution in these grandchild tables. By referring to the table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the luminance data specified by the grandchild table, the lamp control of the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, and the attacker lamp 9c is performed in the same procedure as described above.

As a result, the movable body lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, and the attack lamp 9c blink in white for 500 ms at the start of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect after the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect, thereby constituting the customer waiting demo effect. During the period of the company name part, it lights up in white, and the lighting mode changes according to the movement of the characters of the company name. After that, it turns off for 500 ms, and appears during the model introduction 1 period that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration. The lighting color changes in order of green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, and white according to the type of character, and lights white for the period of model introduction 2-1, which constitutes the customer waiting demonstration. In addition, the light emitting mode changes in a predetermined pattern, flashes in green during the period of model introduction 3-1 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect, and lights up in white during the period of model introduction 2-2 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect. Also, the lighting mode changes in a predetermined pattern, flashes in green during the period of model introduction 3-2 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect, and lights up in white during the period of model introduction 2-3 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration effect. Then, the luminescence mode changes in a predetermined pattern, and after that, it is turned off for 500 ms, and the luminous color changes to a rainbow color over the period of the main title part constituting the customer waiting demonstration production, thereby constituting the customer waiting demonstration production. Flashes in white at the start of the subtitle part 1, changes to a rainbow color over the duration of the subtitle part 1 that makes up the customer waiting demo effect, and flashes in white at the start of the subtitle 2 part that makes up the customer waiting demo effect. , The luminous color changes to rainbow color during the period of two parts of the subtitle that constitutes the customer waiting demo effect, and then it is turned off for 500 ms, and during the periods of the attention call 1 and the attention call 2 part that constitute the customer waiting demo effect, respectively. It lights up in white and then turns off for 500 ms, and the light off state continues until a new extended command is received, and when the new extended command is received, it switches to a lighting mode based on the received extended command.

In this way, when the extended command: BF01 is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the extended command: BF01 and based on the lamp data table: customer waiting demo, so that the main lamp 9a, the movable body lamp 9d, decoration lamp 9f, and attack lamp 9c change in light emission color and light emission mode according to each part of the customer waiting demonstration production.

Since the child table and grandchild table for the button lamp 9e are not set in the parent table of the customer waiting demo, the lamp control based on the previously set lamp data table (the button lights up in white) continues. is done.

In the lamp data table: customer waiting demo, the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attack lamp 9c are shown in the company name part, model introduction part 1, model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, and model introduction 2-. 2. Since a grandchild table is specified for each model introduction 3-2, model introduction 2-3, main title part, subtitle 1 part, subtitle 2 part, and alert part, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker Lamp control can be performed so that the lamp 9c has a light emission mode corresponding to each part.

Also, in the lamp data table: customer waiting demo, a grandchild table is specified for each company name part, model introduction part, main title part, subtitle 1 part, subtitle 2 part, and attention calling part for the main lamp 9a, Since one grandchild table is specified for model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, model introduction 2-2, model introduction 3-2, and model introduction 2-3, which constitute the model introduction part, the overall Data volume can be reduced.

Lamp data table: The customer waiting demo does not have a grandchild table of the button lamp 9e, and the button lamp 9e is controlled based on the grandchild table from before the customer waiting demo. can be reduced.

In addition, for the grandchild table that controls the light-off state and the grandchild table that emits light in rainbow colors, the lamp control is performed using a common table that is also used in common with other parent tables, so that the total amount of data can be reduced. A grandchild table that temporarily emits white light may also be controlled using the common table.

[Lamp data table: Button lit white]
FIG. 156 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table used when the extended command B001 is received: the parent table of white button lighting. FIG. 157 shows the settings of the lamp data table: child table of white button lighting. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: the grandchild table of button white lighting.

The effect control CPU 120 receives an extended command: B001 transmitted from the display control unit 123 after the completion of the initialization notification associated with the initialization of the game state after the recovery from the power failure, and after the end of the operation promotion effect. : Designates the parent table for button white lighting based on B001. As shown in FIG. 156, the parent table for button white lighting is set to repeatedly perform lamp control referring to the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP for a maximum of 600000 ms for the button lamp 9e. : When B001 is received, the child table specified by the parent table for button white lighting: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP is referred to and lamp control of the button lamp 9e is performed.

In the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 157, the grandchild table of the button lamp 9e to be referenced and the execution time are set.

The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU (FIG. 158) set in the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP over a maximum of 600000 ms.

In the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU, as shown in FIG. 158, the luminance data and the execution time of the button lamp 9e to be referenced are set. Then, the effect control CPU 120 switches the control based on the luminance data set in the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU every execution time of the luminance data. The luminance data set in the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU is set to emit white light, and the button lamp 9e lights up in white.

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP is specified, the effect control CPU 120 repeats the lamp control by the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU until 600000 ms elapses. Repeat control. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 receives an extended command (B002 or B003) for changing the lighting mode of the button lamp 9e before 600000 ms has elapsed after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP is designated, newly received Lamp control is performed based on the lamp data table based on the extended command.

In addition, since the child table and grandchild table for the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable body lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, and the attack lamp 9c are not set in the parent table for button white lighting, they are set before that. Lamp control based on the existing lamp data table continues.

[Lamp Data Table: Button Blinking White]
FIG. 159 shows the settings of the lamp data table used when the extended command B002 is received: the parent table of button blinking white. FIG. 160 shows the settings of the lamp data table: child table of button blinking white. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: the grandchild table of button white flashing.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives an extension command: B002 transmitted along with performing control to display an image corresponding to the operation promotion effect of blinking the display control unit 123 button lamp 9e in white during the game, the extension command is received. Command: Specify the parent table for button white flashing based on B002. As shown in FIG. 159, in the parent table of button white flashing, it is set that the button lamp 9e repeatedly performs lamp control referring to the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600000 ms. : When B002 is received, the child table specified by the parent table of button white blinking: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP is referred to and lamp control of the button lamp 9e is performed.

In the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 160, the grandchild table of the button lamp 9e to be referenced and the execution time are set.

The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU (FIG. 161) set in the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP over a maximum of 600000 ms.

In the grandchild table: XD_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU, as shown in FIG. 161, the brightness data and execution time of the button lamp 9e to be referenced are set. Then, the effect control CPU 120 switches the control based on the luminance data set in the grandchild table: XD_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU every execution time of the luminance data. The luminance data set in the grandchild table: XD_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU is set to the luminance of emitting white light and the off state, and the button lamp 9e blinks in white.

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, the effect control CPU 120 repeats the lamp control by the grandchild table: XD_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU until 600000 ms has passed, and when 600000 ms has passed, sets the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP again, and performs the same operation. Repeat control. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives an extension command (B001) for changing the lighting mode of the button lamp 9e before 600000 ms has elapsed after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, the newly received extension command (B001) is received. It performs lamp control based on the command-based lamp data table.

In the parent table for button white flashing, the child table and grandchild table for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decoration lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set. Lamp control based on the existing lamp data table continues.

[Lamp data table: button blinking red]
FIG. 162 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table used when the extended command B003 is received: the parent table of the red flashing button. FIG. 163 shows the settings of the lamp data table: the child table of the red flashing button. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: the grandchild table of button blinking red.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives an extension command: B003 transmitted along with performing control to display an image corresponding to the operation promotion effect of blinking the display control unit 123 button lamp 9e in red during the game, the extension command is received. Command: Designate the parent table of the red flashing button based on B003. As shown in FIG. 162, in the parent table of button red flashing, it is set to repeatedly perform lamp control referring to the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600000 ms for the button lamp 9e. : When B003 is received, refer to the child table XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table of the red flashing button, and perform lamp control of the button lamp 9e.

In the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 163, the grandchild table of the button lamp 9e to be referenced and the execution time are set.

The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU (FIG. 164) set in the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP over a maximum of 600000 ms.

In the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU, as shown in FIG. 164, the brightness data and execution time of the button lamp 9e to be referenced are set. Then, the effect control CPU 120 switches the control based on the luminance data set in the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU for each execution time of the luminance data. The luminance data set in the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU is set to the luminance of emitting red light and the off state, and the button lamp 9e flashes in red.

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, the effect control CPU 120 repeats the lamp control by the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU until 600000 ms elapses. Repeat control. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives an extension command (B001) for changing the lighting mode of the button lamp 9e before 600000 ms elapses after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP is designated, the newly received extension command (B001) is received. It performs lamp control based on the command-based lamp data table.

In addition, since the child table and grandchild table for the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable body lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, and the attack lamp 9c are not set in the parent table of the red flashing button, they are set before that. Lamp control based on the existing lamp data table continues.

[Lamp data table: Initialization notification]
FIG. 165 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table used when the extended command BFFF is received: the parent table of initialization notification, and FIG. 166 is the setting of the lamp data table: child table of initialization notification. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: the grandchild table of initialization notification.

When the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: BFFF transmitted along with the display control unit 123 controlling to display an image corresponding to the initialization notification, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the initialization based on the extended command: BFFF. Specifies the parent table of In the parent table of initialization notification, as shown in FIG. 165, the main lamp 9a is set to repeatedly perform lamp control referring to the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP for a maximum of 600000 ms. : When BFFF is received, refer to the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP specified by the parent table of the initialization notification, and perform lamp control of the main lamp 9a.

In the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 166, the grandchild table of the main lamp 9a to be referenced and the execution time are set.

The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA (FIG. 167) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP over a maximum of 600000 ms.

In the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA, as shown in FIG. 167, the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referred to are set. Then, the effect control CPU 120 switches the control based on the luminance data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA every execution time of the luminance data. The luminance data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA sets the luminance for emitting red light, and the main lamp 9a lights up in red.

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP is specified, the effect control CPU 120 repeats the lamp control by the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA until 600000 ms has passed, and when 600000 ms has passed, sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP again, and performs the same operation. Repeat control. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives an extension command before 600000 ms has elapsed after the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP is designated, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extension command. .

As shown in FIGS. 165 to 167, the parent table for initialization notification includes child tables that also refer to side lamps 9b, movable body lamps 9d, decoration lamps 9f, attacker lamps 9c, and button lamps 9e. Also, in these child tables, grandchild tables and the like to be referred to are set, and luminance data and the like to be referred to are set in the order of execution in these grandchild tables. By referring to the child table specified by the table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the luminance data specified by the grandchild table, the side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker Lamp control of the lamp 9c and the button lamp 9e is performed.

For the brightness data set in the grandchild table that the child table of the initialization notification refers to for the side lamp 9b, the movable body lamp 9d, the decoration lamp 9f, the attack lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e, the luminance for emitting red light is also set. The side lamp 9b, the movable body lamp 9d, the decoration lamp 9f, the attack lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e also light up in red.

[Lamp Data Table: Error]
FIG. 168 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error parent table used when the extended command BFF1 is received, and FIG. 169 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error child table. FIG. 170 shows the setting contents of the lamp data table: error grandchild table.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the extension command: BFF1 transmitted from the display control unit 123 with the occurrence of an error, the extension command: BFF1 designates the parent table of the error. In the error parent table, as shown in FIG. 168, it is set to repeatedly perform lamp control referring to the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP for a maximum of 600000 ms for the main lamp 9a. is received, the child table specified by the error parent table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP is referenced to control the main lamp 9a.

In the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 169, the grandchild table of the main lamp 9a to be referenced and the execution time are set.

The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR (FIG. 170) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP over a maximum of 600000 ms.

In the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR, as shown in FIG. 170, the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referred to are set. Then, the effect control CPU 120 switches the control based on the luminance data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR every execution time of the luminance data. The luminance data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR sets the luminance for emitting red light and the off state, and the main lamp 9a blinks in red.

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP is specified, the effect control CPU 120 repeats the lamp control by the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR until 600000 ms has passed. Repeat control. In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives an extension command before 600000 ms has passed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP was designated, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extension command. .

In addition, since the child table and grandchild table for the side lamp 9b, the movable body lamp 9d, the decoration lamp 9f, the attack lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e are not set in the error parent table, they are set before them. Lamp control based on the lamp data table continues.

[Common table]
The common table is a grandchild table that is also referred to by child tables set in different parent tables, and as shown in FIGS. A common table (XD___L~_OFF) that turns off the attack lamp 9c and the button lamp 9e, the main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable body lamp 9d, the decoration lamp 9f, the attack lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e are slowly changed to a rainbow color. Equipped with a common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01), a common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_02) that changes the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attack lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e to rainbow colors at high speed. .

These common tables are provided for each of the in-lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable lamp 9d, the decoration lamp 9f, the attack lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e. It is possible to perform lamp control using a table.

By providing a common table that allows lamp control to be performed by referring to child tables set in different parent tables in this way, the data volume can be reduced.

As noted above, the present invention provides:
A gaming machine that executes variable display of specific identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state for a player when a specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
game control means;
production control means;
a display means;
The game control means is
performing variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns;
controllable between a normal state and a special state in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is short;
The production control means is
It is possible to perform variable display of a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information that has not yet started,
A corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area,
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display,
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display for moving the decoration identification information and a pre-operation display for moving the decoration identification information in a manner different from the movement display before starting the movement display are performed. is possible and
performing the pre-operation display while performing the switching display in the normal state;
performing variable display of the decoration identification information based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means;
The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. and
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
A demonstration display is displayed in a second period after the first period ends,
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the game machine is displayed in animation,
The title name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
The attention-calling display scene is a scene in which a character display for calling attention when playing the game machine is displayed in animation,
The animation display of the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is a mode that is emphasized more than the animation display of the character display for calling attention when playing the gaming machine,
The animation display of the character display of the title of the gaming machine is characterized in that it is emphasized more than the animation display of the character display for calling attention when the gaming machine is played.
According to the present invention, along with the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, the switching display for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is performed, and during the switching display, the decoration identification information is scrolled. By performing the pre-operation display in which the decoration identification information is operated in a manner different from the scroll display before starting the display, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required for the switching display. In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and when the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous. can increase the interest of Also, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced. In addition, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed by text display, but we want to emphasize each information such as company name information, model title, and attention alert, so we can emphasize it by displaying it with a dedicated display animation. Among them, by emphasizing the display animation of the display scene of the company name and model title compared to the scene calling attention, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed. can. As described above, the present invention suppresses the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the display of the decoration identification information and the pending display in an unnatural manner, thereby improving the interest of the player and performing suitable customer waiting control. be able to. Therefore, the present invention has high marketability.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the first production mode can be executed in the low base state, the second production mode in the low probability high base state, and the third production mode in the high probability high base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more production modes may be executed in the low base state, or three or more production modes may be executed in the high base state. Only one type of presentation mode may be executable.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is illustrated in which vertical scroll display is performed in the first effect mode, rotating display is performed in the second effect mode, and vertical scroll display is performed in the third effect mode. It is not limited to this, and the aspect of the variable display of the decoration pattern in each production mode can be changed variously.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, the form in which the jackpot game state is applied is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous state is a time-saving state or a variable probability state. , Small hit game state and the like may be applied.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal state and the low probability low base state, the special state with a short average variable display period and the low probability high base state and high probability low base state and the variable display is likely to be executed than the normal state However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be a low-probability state, and the special state may be a high-probability state.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the normal state (low base state), the time saving state (low probability high base state), the probability variable state (high probability high base state) are provided as the game state, and the time saving state or probability change at the end of the big hit game Although the form in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to the state is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a part of the case where the variable display result is wrong in the low probability state. Therefore, it is possible to control the time saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, or it is advantageous in a low probability state after the end of the advantageous state or after clearing the RAM (cold start of the pachinko game machine 1) The present invention may be applied to a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a time-saving state based on the execution of a predetermined number of variable displays without being controlled by the state. In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after the big hit game is the time-saving state A, and in a low-probability state after the end of the advantageous state or after clearing the RAM (cold start of the pachinko game machine 1), it is predetermined without being controlled to the advantageous state. The time saving state controlled based on the number of times the variable display is performed is the time saving state B, a part of the case where the variable display result is lost in the low probability state, and the variable display result is displayed as a specific result. The time saving state controlled based on what is done should be the time saving state C.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine that can be controlled in the time-saving state C, a plurality of types of variable display results are provided for winning the time-saving state C, and depending on the type of variable display result when winning the time-saving state C You may vary the variable display frequency|count by which time saving control is performed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state corresponds to non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to big bonus, regular bonus, assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT).

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the game machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko game machine or a slot machine, and may be a general game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Effect control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes variable display of specific identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state for a player when a specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
game control means;
production control means;
a display means;
The game control means is
performing variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns;
controllable between a normal state and a special state in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is short;
The production control means is
It is possible to perform variable display of a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information that has not yet started,
A corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area,
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display,
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display for moving the decoration identification information and a pre-operation display for moving the decoration identification information in a manner different from the movement display before starting the movement display are performed. is possible and
performing the pre-operation display while performing the switching display in the normal state;
executing variable display of the decoration identification information based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means;
The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. and
The display means is
In the first period after the game is over, the background display is displayed,
A demonstration display is displayed in a second period after the first period ends,
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
The title name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
The attention-calling display scene is a scene in which a character display for calling attention when playing the game machine is displayed in animation,
The animation display of the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is in a mode that is emphasized more than the animation display of the character display for calling attention when playing the gaming machine,
A gaming machine, wherein the animation display of the character display of the title of the gaming machine is emphasized more than the animation display of the character display for calling attention when the gaming machine is played.

Images